5 - Dcme

&855,&8/80
&
',3/20$,1&20387(5
(1*,1((5,1*
STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING

ANDHRA PRADESH
1
2
DIPLOMA IN COMPUTER ENGINEERING
CURRICULUM- 2023 (C-23)
INDEX
S.No Contents Page No.
1. Preamble ř
2. High lights of Curriculum (C-23) ś
3. Acknowledgements Ŝ
4. Rules and Regulations ŝ
5. Vision and Mission
6. Scheme of Instructions and Examinations – 1 Year
7. Scheme of Instructions and Examinations -III Sem
8. Scheme of Instructions and Examinations- IV Sem
9. Scheme of Instructions and Examinations -V Sem
10. Scheme of Instructions and Examinations -VI Sem
1ŗ.
I Year Syllabus
1Ř. III Sem Syllabus
1ř. IV Sem Syllabus
1Ś. V Sem Syllabus
1ś VI Sem Syllabus
3
PREAMBLE
Technical Education is a key driver of economic development and plays a crucial

role in providing individuals with the skills and knowledge necessary to thrive in
the workplace. As technological advancements continue to reshape
industries and create new opportunities, it is critical that technical education
curricula remain relevant and up-to-date.
The curriculum has been designed with this in mind, with a focus on practical
skills, critical thinking, and problem-solving. We believe that these skills are essential
for success in both academic and professional spheres. The revamping of the
technical education curriculum is made with collaborative effort from educators,
industry experts, policymakers, and students.
At the heart of the curriculum, is the belief that the technical education should be
student-centered, empowering learners to take ownership of their learning and
pursue their passions. We aim to create a learning environment that is safe,
supportive, and nurturing, where every student has the opportunity to reach their
fullest potential. We acknowledge that learning is a lifelong journey, and our
curriculum is designed to provide a solid foundation for continued growth and
development. We hope that our students will not only leave with a diploma but with
employability and passion for learning.
The State Board of Technical Education and Training, (SBTET) AP, has been
offering Diploma programmes to meet the above said aspirations of the stake
holders: industries, students, academia, parents and the society at large. The
Curriculum should be flexible, adaptable, and responsive to the changing
needs of the industry and society. As such, it has been the practice of SBTET, A.P.,
to keep the curriculum abreast with the advances in technology through systematic
and scientific analysis of current curriculum and bring out an updated revised
version at regular intervals.
The design of Curriculum C-23 was started in the month of January - 2023.
Feedback was collected from all stake holders: Students, Lecturers, Senior Lecturers,
Head of Sections and Principals for all programmes for this purpose. Accordingly, a
workshop was convened on 15th February 2023 by Smt. C. Naga Rani, I.A.S,
Director of Technical Education & Chairperson, SBTET, AP to discuss on
revamping of C-20 curriculum to meet the needs of industries and for improvement
of placements.
The meeting was attended by Sri. Saurab Gaur, I.A.S, Principal Secretary,
Skill Development & Training, Smt. Lavanya Veni, I.A.S, Director, Employment
& Training. Thirteen Representatives from Industries and Fourteen Academicians
from Higher Level Institutions and officials of ITI, Skill Development, CTE & SBTET
attended the workshop.
Smt. C Naga Rani, I.A.S., Commissioner of Technical Education while

addressing in the workshop, emphasized the necessity of industrial training and on-
4
hand experience, that the students need to undergo to support the industries and the
Gaps in the Curriculum need to be fixed to make the students passionate to work
in the industry in order to support economy of the country.
The committees of each branch consisting of experts from Industries, Higher Level
Institutions and Faculty of Polytechnics are informed to study the possibility of
incorporating the following aspects while preparation of the curriculum so as to improve
employability.
x To bring out industry oriented Diploma Engineers.
x Internet of Things ( IoT) for all branches
x Theoretical & Practical subjects 50: 50 Ratio
x Industry 4.0 concepts.
x 5G Technology.
x Critical Thinking (Quantitative Aptitude, Data Interpretation, Quantitative
reasoning etc) to face the written tests conducted by the industries during
placements.
x ¢ǰȱȱȱȱȱȱȱȱȱ¢ǯ
In continuation, series of workshops with subject experts followed in the subsequent

weeks for thorough perusal for preparation of draft curriculum. Also, the suggestions
received from representatives from various industries, academic experts from higher level
institutions, subject experts from Polytechnics, have been recorded, validated for
incorporation into the Curriculum C-23. Finally, the draft curriculum was sent to
academicians of higher-level institutions, industrial experts for Vetting.
The design of new Curricula C-23 for different diploma programmes has thus been
finalised with the active participation of the members of the faculty teaching in the
Polytechnics of Andhra Pradesh, and duly reviewed by Expert Committee constituted of
academicians and representatives from industries. Thus, the primary objective of the
curriculum change is to produce employable diploma holders in the country by correlating
the growing needs of the industries with relevant academic input.
The outcome-based approach as given by NBA guidelines has been followed

throughout the design of this curriculum and designed to meet the requirements of NBA
Accreditation, too.
The Revised Curriculum i.e., Curriculum–2023 (C-23) is approved by 45th

Academic Committee of SBTET, A.P for its implementation with effect from Academic
Year 2023-24. Also, the SBTET, A.P under the aegis of the Department of Technical
Education, Andhra Pradesh in it’s 62nd Board Meeting held on 13-07-2023 (vide item no:
17) Approved to update the Polytechnic Curriculum C-23 with effect from the academic
year 2023-2024 onwards after revamping the present C-20 curriculum, to meet the latest
industrial technological developments including Industry 4.0 concepts.
2. HIGHLIGHTS OF CURRICULUM C-23
The following Courses/ Topics are incorporated in this curriculum C-23 as per the
suggestions received from Industrial Experts, Faculty of Higher Level Institutions and
Polytechnics to improve the Employability Skills of the Polytechnic Students.
1) The Weightage of theory & Practical in 50:50.

2) A new subject Big Data & Cloud Computing incorporated to meet the
requirements of Industry.
5
3) Industrial Training (CISCO) is replaced with training in Industry or two
online certificate courses.
4) A new theory subject “Computer Networking & Cyber Security incorporated
to meet the industry needs.
5) A new subject Android Programming incorporated
6) Computer Networking & Cyber Security lab incorporated.
7) Android Programming lab incorporated.
3. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The Members of the working group are grateful to Smt C. Naga Rani I.A.S.,
Commissioner of Technical Education & Chairman of SBTET, for continuous guidance and
valuable inputs during process of revising, modifying and updating the Curriculum C-20 to
Curriculum C-23.
We are grateful to Sri. S. Suresh Kumar, I.A.S, Principal Secretary, Skills

Development & Training for his valuable suggestions to bring the revamped curriculum C-
23 in to a final form to meet latest Industry 4.0 concepts.
We are grateful to Sri. Saurab Gaur, I.A.S, former Principal Secretary, Skills
Development & Training who actively participated in the Industry-Academia workshop
conducted on 15th February, 2023 and offered valuable suggestions and insights into the
learning needs and preferences so that the curriculum is engaging, inclusive, and effective.
It is pertinent to acknowledge the support of the following in the making of

Curriculum C-23. A series of workshops in different phases were conducted by SBTET, AP,
Guntur involving faculty from Polytechnics, Premier Engineering Colleges &
representatives from various Industries and Dr. C. R. Nagendra Rao, Professor & Head,
NITTTR-ECV to analyse the Previous C-20 Curriculum and in designing of C-23
Curriculum, is highly appreciated and gratefully acknowledged.
We also extend our sincere thanks to Sri. V. Padma Rao, Joint Director of Technical
Education, Sri K.V. Ramana Babu, Secretary, SBTE&T, Andhra Pradesh, Sri K. Vijaya
Bhaskar, Deputy Director (Academic) , Andhra Pradesh, officials of Directorate of Technical
Education and the State Board of Technical Education, Andhra Pradesh and all teaching
fraternity from the Polytechnics who are directly or indirectly involved in preparation of the
curricula.
4. RULES AND REGULATIONS OF C-23 CURRICULUM
4.1 Duration and pattern of the courses
All the Diploma programs run at various institutions are of AICTE approved 3 years
or 3½ years duration of academic instruction. All the Diploma courses are run on year wise
pattern in the first year, and the remaining two or two & half years are run in the semester
6
pattern. In respect of few courses like Diploma in Bio-Medical course, the training will be in
the seventh semester. Run-through system is adopted for all the Diploma Courses, subject
to eligibility conditions.
4.2 Procedure for Admission into the Diploma Courses:
Selection of candidates is governed by the Rules and Regulations laid down in this
regard from time to time.
a) Candidates who wish to seek admission in any of the Diploma courses will have to
appear for the Common Entrance Test for admissions into Polytechnics (POLYCET)
conducted by the State Board of Technical Education and Training, Andhra Pradesh,
Vijayawada. Only the candidates satisfying the following requirements will be eligible to
appear for the Common Entrance Test for admissions into Polytechnics (POLYCET).
a. The candidates seeking admission should have appeared for S.S.C examination,
conducted by the Board of Secondary Education, Andhra Pradesh or equivalent
examination thereto, at the time of applying for the Common Entrance Test for
admissions into Polytechnics (POLYCET). In case of candidates whose results of
their Qualifying Examinations is pending, their selection shall be subject to
production of proof of their passing the qualifying examination in one attempt or
compartmentally at the time of admission.
b. Admissions are made based on the merit obtained in the Common Entrance Test
(POLYCET) and the reservation rules stipulated by the Government of Andhra
Pradesh from time to time.
c. For admission into the following Diploma Courses for which entry qualification
is 10+2, candidates need not appear for POLYCET. A separate notification will be
issued for admission into these courses.
i). D.HMCT ii).D. Pharmacy
4.3 Medium of Instruction
The medium of instruction and examination shall be English.
4.4 Permanent Identification Number (PIN)
A cumulative / academic record is to be maintained of the Marks secured in

sessional work and end examination of each year for determining the eligibility for
promotion etc., A Permanent Identification Number (PIN) will be allotted to each
admitted candidate to maintain academic records.
4.5 Number of Working Days Per Semester / Year:

a) The Academic year for all the Courses shall be in accordance with the Academic
Calendar.
b) The Working days in a week shall be from Monday to Saturday
c) There shall be 7 periods of 50 minutes duration each on all working days.
d) The minimum number of working days for each semester / year shall be 90 / 180
days excluding examination days. If this prescribed minimum is not achieved
due to any reason, special arrangements shall be made to conduct classes to
complete the syllabus.
7
4.6 Eligibility (Attendance to Appear for the End Examination)
a) A candidate shall be permitted to appear for the end examination in all

subjects, if he or she has attended a minimum of 75% of working days during the
year/Semester.
b) Condonation of shortage of attendance in aggregate up to 10% (65% and
above and below 75%) in each semester or 1st year may be granted on medical
grounds.
c) A stipulated fee shall be payable towards condonation for shortage of
attendance.
d) Candidates having less than 65% attendance shall be detained.
e) Students whose shortage of attendance is not condoned in any semester / 1 st
year and not paid the condonation fee in time are not eligible to take their end
examination of that class and their admissions shall stand cancelled. They may seek
re-admission for that semester / 1st year when offered in the next subsequent
academic semester/year.
For INDUSTRIAL TRAINING:

i) During Industrial Training the candidate shall put in a minimum of 90%
attendance.
ii) If the student fails to secure 90% attendance during industrial training, the student
shall reappear for 6 months industrial training at his own expenses.
4.7 Readmission
Readmission shall be granted to eligible candidates by the respective

Principal/ Regional Joint Director.
a) (i) Within 15 days after commencement of class work in any semester (Except
Industrial Training).
(ii) For Industrial Training: before commencement of the Industrial training.
b) Within 30 days after commencement of class work in any year (including D.
Pharmacy course or first year course in Engineering and Non-Engineering
Diploma streams). Otherwise, such cases shall not be considered for readmission
for that semester / year and are advised to seek readmission in the next
subsequent eligible academic year.
c) The percentage of attendance of the readmitted candidates shall be calculated
from the first day of beginning of the regular class work for that year / Semester,
as officially announced by CTE/SBTET but not from the day on which he/she
has actually reported to the class work.
4.8 Scheme of Evaluation
a) First Year
Theory Courses: Each Course carries Maximum marks of 80 with an end
examination of 3 hours duration, along with internal assessment for Maximum
of 20 marks. (Sessional marks). However, there are no minimum marks
prescribed for sessionals.
Laboratory Courses: There shall be 40/20 Marks for internal assessment i.e.
sessional marks for each practical Course with an end examination of 3 hours
8
duration carrying 60/30 marks. However, there are no minimum marks
prescribed for sessional.
b) III, IV, V, VI and VII Semesters:
Theory Courses: End semester evaluation shall be of 3 hours duration and for a
maximum of 80 marks.
Laboratory Courses: Each Course carry 60/30 marks of 3 hours duration 40/20
sessional marks.
4.9 Internal Assessment Scheme

a) Theory Courses: Internal assessment shall be conducted for awarding Sessional
marks on the dates specified. Three-unit tests shall be conducted for I year
students and two Unit Tests for semesters. The details are presented below.
Type of Assessment Weightage

S. Assigned
No.
(i) Testing of knowledge through mid-examination for 40
year/sem as (Mid-1+Mid-2+Mid3) or (Mid-1 + Mid-2)
(ii) Assignments 5
(iii) Dynamic Learning activities : Project Work/ Seminar/Tech-
fest/Group Discussion, Quizzes etc./Extra-curricular 5
activities/NSS/NCC/ IPSGM/Cleaning & Greening of Campus
etc.
TOTAL 50
Internal Assessment shall be of 90 minutes duration and for a maximum of 40

marks for each test.
At least one assignment should be completed for each unit which carries 10 marks.
The total assignment marks should be reduced to 5.
The dynamic learning activity is to be conducted which carries 10 marks. The total
marks should be reduced to 5.
The total 50 marks assigned to internal assignment is to be scaled down to 20

marks.
b) Practical Courses:
(i) Drawing Courses:
The award of Sessional marks for internal Assessment shall be as given in the
following table:
Distribution of Marks for the Internal Assessment Marks

First Year (Total:40 Marks) Semesters (Total:40 Marks)
Max:20 Marks Max:20 Marks Max:20 Marks Max:20 Marks
From the From the Average of From the Average of From the Average of
Average of Assessment of Regular TWO Unit Tests. Assessment of Regular
THREE Unit Class work Exercises. Class work Exercises.
Tests.
9
¾ For first year engineering drawing each unit test will be conducted for a duration
of 2 hours with maximum marks of 40.
¾ (Part - A: 4 questions x 5 marks = 20 Marks; Part –B: 2 questions x 10 marks = 20

marks).
¾ For the semester drawing examinations, Two Unit tests shall be conducted as per
the Board End Examination Question Paper Pattern.
¾ All Drawing exercises are to be filed in serial order and secured for further
scrutiny by a competent authority
(ii) Laboratory Courses:
(a) Student’s performance in Laboratories / Workshop shall be assessed during

the year/ semester of study for 40 marks in each practical Course.
(b) Evaluation for Laboratory Courses, other than Drawing courses:
i. Instruction (teaching) in laboratory courses (except for the course on
Drawing) here after shall be task/competency based as delineated in the
Laboratory sheets, prepared by SBTET, AP & NITTTR- ECV and posted in
SBTET website.
ii. Internal assessment for Laboratory shall be done on the basis of task/s
performed by the student as delineated in the laboratory sheets, prepared by
SBTET, AP & NITTTR- ECV and posted in AP, SBTET website.
iii. Question paper for End semester Evaluation shall also be task/s based and
shall be prepared and distributed by SBTET as done in case of theory courses
be prepared as per SBTET rules in vogue.
c) Internal assessment in Labs / workshops / Survey field work etc., during the
course of study shall be done and sessional marks shall be awarded by the
concerned Teacher.
d) For practical examinations, except in drawing, there shall be two examiners.
External examiner shall be appointed by the Principal in consultation with
respective Head of Section preferably choosing a qualified person from in the
order of preference.
i) Nearby Industry
ii) Govt / Semi Govt organization like R & B, PWD, PR, Railways, BSNL,
APSRTC, APSEB etc.
iii) Govt / University Engg College.
iv) HoD/Senior Lecture ( Selection Grade-II) from the Govt. Polytechnic
Internal examiner shall be the person concerned with internal assessment as in
(c) above. The end examination shall be held along with all theory papers in
respect of drawing.
e) Question Paper for Practicals: Question paper should cover ( the experiments /
exercise prescribed to test various) skills like handling, manipulating, testing,
trouble shooting, repair, assembling and dismantling etc., from more than one
experiment / exercise
f) Records pertaining to internal assessment marks of both theory and practical
Courses are to be maintained for official inspection.
10
g) In case of Diploma programs having Industrial Training, Internal Assessment and
Summative Evaluation, shall be done as illustrated in the following table:
Upon
Assessment Max
completion By Based on
no Marks
of
1. The faculty
concerned (Guide) Learning outcomes as
1 12 weeks 120
and given in the scheme of
2. Training in assessment ,for
charge (Mentor) of Industrial Training
22 weeks 120
2 the industry
1.Demonstration of any
1. The faculty one of the skills listed in
member learning outcomes 30
3. Final
concerned, 2.Training Report 20
summative 24 week
2. HoD concerned
Evaluation
and
3.Viva Voce
3. An external
examiner 10
TOTAL 300
h) Each staff member including Head of Section shall be assigned a batch of students
10 to 15 for making assessment during industrial training.
4.10 Minimum Pass Marks

a) Theory Examination:
For passing a theory Course, a candidate has to secure a minimum of 35% in end
examination and a combined minimum of 35% of both Sessional and end
examination marks put together.
b) Practical Examination:
For passing a practical Course, a candidate has to secure a minimum of 50% in end
examination and a combined minimum of 50% of both sessional and practical end
examination marks put together. In case of D.C.C.P., the pass mark for typewriting
and short hand is 45% in the end examination. There are no sessional marks for
typewriting and Shorthand Courses of D.C.C.P course.
C) Industrial Training:
I. Monitoring: Similar to project work each teacher may be assigned a batch of 10-
15 students irrespective of the placement of the students to facilitate effective
monitoring of students learning during industrial training.
II. Assessment: The Industrial training shall carry 300 marks and pass marks is
50% in assessments at industry (first and second assessment) and final
summative assessment at institution level put together i.e. 150 marks out of
11
300 marks. And also student has to secure 50% marks in final summative
assessment at institution level.
III. In-Plant Industrial Training for 3-Year Diploma (C-23) Courses is
scheduled as per the Academic Calendar of the SBTET every year.
4.11. Provision for Improvement
Improvement is allowed only after he / she has completed all the Courses from First
Year to Final semester of the Diploma.
a) Improvement is allowed in any 4 (Four) Courses of the Diploma.
b) The student can avail of this improvement chance ONLY ONCE, that too within the
succeeding two examinations after the completion of Diploma. However, the
duration including Improvement examination shall not exceed FIVE years from the
year of first admission.
c) No improvement is allowed in Practical / Lab Courses or Project work or Industrial
Training assessment. However, improvement in drawing Course(s) is allowed.
d) If improvement is not achieved, the marks obtained in previous Examinations hold
good.
e) Improvement is not allowed in respect of the candidates who are punished under
Mal-practice in any Examination.
f) Examination fee for improvement shall be paid as per the notification issued by State
Board of Technical Education and Training from time to time.
g) All the candidates who wish to appear for improvement of performance shall
deposit the original Marks Memos of all the years / Semesters and also original
Diploma Certificate to the Board. If there is improvement in performance of the
current examination, the revised Memorandum of marks and Original Diploma
Certificate will be issued, else the submitted originals will be returned.
4.12. Rules of Promotion From 1ST YEAR TO 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th and 7th Semesters:
A) For Diploma Courses of 3 Years duration

i). A candidate shall be permitted to appear for first year examination provided he
/ she puts in 75% attendance (which can be condoned on Medical grounds up to
10%) and pay the examination fee.
ii) A candidate shall be promoted to 3rd semester if he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the first year and pays the examination fee. A
candidate who could not pay the first year examination fee has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training,
AP from time to time before commencement of 3rd semester.
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 3rd semester examination if he/she puts
the required percentage of attendance in the 3rd semester and pays the
examination fee.
iii) A candidate shall be promoted to 4th semester provided he/she puts the
required percentage of attendance in the 3rd semester and pay the examination
fee. A candidate, who could not pay the 3rd semester exam fee, has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and Training
AP from time to time before commencement of 4th semester. A candidate is
12
eligible to appear for the 4th semester examination if he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the 4th semester and pays the examination fee.
iv) A candidate shall be promoted to 5th semester provided he / she puts the
required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester and pays the examination
fee. A candidate, who could not pay the 4th semester examination fee, has to pay
the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and
Training from time to time before commencement of 5th semester.
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 5th semester examination if he/she puts
the required percentage of attendance in the 5th semester and pays the
examination fee.
v) A candidate shall be sent to Industrial training / VI semester provided he/she

puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 5 th semester and pay the
examination fee/ promotion fee as prescribed by SBTET.
A candidate is eligible to appear for Industrial Training assessment
(Seminar/Viva-voce) puts the required percentage of attendance, i.e., 90% in 6th
semester Industrial Training.
For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:
i.) A candidate shall be permitted to appear for Third Semester examination

provided he / she puts in 75% attendance (which can be condoned on Medical
grounds up to 10%) and pay the examination fee for Third semester.
ii) A candidate shall be promoted to 4th semester provided he/she puts the
required percentage of attendance in the 3rd semester and pay the examination
fee. A candidate, who could not pay the 3rd semester exam fee, has to pay the
AP from time to time before commencement of 4th semester.
examination fee.
ii) A candidate shall be promoted to 5th semester provided he / she puts the
examination fee.
iii) A candidate shall be sent to Industrial training / VI semester provided he/she

puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 5 th semester and pay the
examination fee/ promotion fee as prescribed by SBTET.
13
A candidate is eligible to appear for Industrial Training assessment
(Seminar/Viva-voce) puts the required percentage of attendance, i.e., 90% in 6th
semester Industrial Training and pays the examination fee.
B) For Diploma Courses of 3 ½ Years duration (MET/ CH/ CHPP/ CHPC/ CHOT/ TT ):
i. A candidate shall be permitted to appear for 1st year examination provided he /
she puts in 75% attendance (which can be condoned on Medical grounds upto
10%) i.e. attendance after condonation on Medical grounds should not be less
than 65% and pay the examination fee.
ii. A candidate shall be promoted to 3rd semester if he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the 1st year and pays the examination fee. A
candidate who could not pay the 1st year examination fee has to pay the
from time to time before commencement of 3rd semester.
iii. A candidate shall be promoted to 4th semester provided he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the 3rd semester and pay the examination fee. A
candidate, who could not pay the 3rd semester exam fee, has to pay the
from time to time before commencement of 4th semester.
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester exam if he/she puts the
required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester
a) Puts the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester

iv. A candidate shall be promoted to 5th semester industrial training provided he /
she puts the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester and pays the
examination fee. A candidate, who could not pay the 4th semester examination
fee, has to pay the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical
Education and Training from time to time before commencement of 5th semester.
v. Promotion from 5th to 6th semester is automatic (i.e., from 1st spell of Industrial
Training to 2nd spell) provided he/she puts the required percentage of
attendance, which in this case ie.,90 % of attendance and attends for the VIVA-
VOCE examination at the end of training.
vi. A candidate shall be promoted to 7th semester provided he / she puts the
vii. A candidate shall be promoted to 7th semester of the course provided he/she has
successfully completed both the spells of Industrial Training.
A candidate is eligible to appear for 7th semester examination if he/she
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 7th semester
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 7 th semester .
C) For Diploma Courses of 3 ½ Years duration (BM):
14
The same rules which are applicable for conventional courses also apply for this
course. The industrial training in respect of this course is restricted to one semester (6
months) after the 6th semester (3 years) of the course.
i. A candidate shall be permitted to appear for first year examination provided
he / she puts in 75% attendance (which can be condoned on Medical grounds
upto 10%) i.e. attendance after condonation on Medical grounds should not
be less than 65% and pay the examination fee.
ii. A candidate shall be promoted to 3rd semester if he/she puts the required
percentage of attendance in the first year and pays the examination fee. A
candidate who could not pay the first year examination fee has to pay the
promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of Technical Education and
Training from time to time before commencement of 3rd semester.
iii. A candidate shall be promoted to 4th semester provided he/she puts the
required percentage of attendance in the 3rd semester and pay the
examination fee. A candidate who could not pay the 3rd semester
examination fee, has to pay the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of
Technical Education and Training from time to time before commencement of
4th semester.
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester examination if he/she
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester
For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry Students:
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester examination if he/she

puts the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester
iv. A candidate shall be promoted to 5th semester provided he / she puts the
required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester and pays the
examination fee. A candidate, who could not pay the 4th semester
examination fee, has to pay the promotion fee as prescribed by State Board of
Technical Education and Training from time to time before commencement of
5th semester.
A candidate is eligible to appear for the 5th semester exam if he/she
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 5th semester.
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 5th semester.

v. A candidate shall be promoted to 6th semester provided he/she puts in the
required percentage of attendance in the 5th semester and pays the
examination fee.
A candidate who could not pay the 5th semester examination fee, has to pay
A candidate is eligible to appear for 6th semester examination
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in 6th semester
IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in 6th semester.
15
vi. A candidate shall be promoted to 7th semester provided he/she puts in the
required percentage of attendance in 6th semester and pay the examination
fee. A candidate, who could not pay the 6th semester examination fee, has to
pay the promotion fee prescribed by SBTET from time to time before
commencement of the 7th semester (Industrial Training).
A candidate is eligible to appear for 7th semester Industrial Training assessment
(Seminar/Viva-voce) if he/she
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance, ie., 90% in 7th semester
Industrial Training.
a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance, i.e., 90% in 7th semester

Industrial Training.
4.13. Students Performance Evaluation
Successful candidates shall be awarded the Diploma under the following divisions of
pass.
a) First Class with Distinction shall be awarded to the candidates who secure an overall
aggregate of 75% marks and above.
b) First Class shall be awarded to candidates who secure overall aggregate of 60%
marks and above and below 75% marks.
c) Second Class shall be awarded to candidates who secure a pass with an overall
aggregate of below 60%.
i. The Weightage of marks for various year/Semesters which are taken for
computing overall aggregate shall be 25% of I year marks + 100% of 3 rd and
subsequent Semesters.
ii. In respect IVC & ITI Lateral Entry candidates who are admitted directly into
diploma course at the 3 rd semester (i.e., second year) level the aggregate of
(100%) marks secured at the 3 rd and subsequent semesters of study shall be
taken into consideration for determining the overall percentage of marks
secured by the candidates for award of class/division.
d) Second Class shall be awarded to all students, who fail to complete the Diploma in
the regular 3 years/ 3 ½ years and four subsequent examinations from the year of
first admission.
4.14. EXAMINATION FEE SCHEDULE:

The examination fee should be as per the notification issued by State Board of
Technical Education and Training, AP from time to time.
4.15. Structure of Examination Question Paper:

I. Formative assessment (Internal examination)
a) For theory Courses:
Three-unit tests for first year and two-unit tests for semesters shall be conducted
with a duration of 90 minutes for each test for maximum marks of 40. It consists of
part A and Part B.
Part A contains five questions and carries 16 marks. Among these five questions
first question consists of four objective items like one word or phrase
answer/filling-in the blanks/true or false etc with one mark for each question.
The other four questions are short answer questions and carry three marks each.
16
Part B carries 24 marks and consists of three questions with internal choice ie.,
Either/Or type , and each question carries 8 marks.
The sum of marks of 3 tests for I year and 2 tests for semesters including
assignments and Dynamic learning activities (50 marks) shall be reduced to 20
marks in each Course for arriving at final sessional marks.
Ǽ For drawing Courses:

For I year:
Three-unit tests with duration of 90 minutes and for maximum marks of 40 marksshall
be conducted for first year. It consists of part A and Part B.
Part A consists four questions for maximum marks of 16 and each question carriesfour
marks (4×4 marks=16 marks).
Part B carries maximum marks of 24 and consists of five questions while the
student shall answer any three questions out of these five questions. Each
question in this part carries a maximum mark of 8, (3×8 marks=24 marks).
The sum of marks obtained in 3-unit test marks shall be reduced to 20 marks for
arriving at final sessional marks. Remaining 20 marks are awarded by the Course
teacher based on the student’s performance during regular class exercise.
For semester: Two-unit tests with duration of 90 minutes and for maximum marksof 40
marks shall be conducted. The sum of marks obtained in 2-unit test marksshall be
reduced to 20 marks for arriving at final sessional marks. Remaining 20marks are
awarded by the Course teacher based on the student’s performanceduring regular
class exercise.
Ǽ For Laboratory /workshop: 50% of total marks for the Course shall be awarded
based on continuous assessment of the student in laboratory/workshop classes andthe
remaining 50% shall be based on the sum of the marks obtained by the studentsin two
tests.
II. Summative assessment (End examination)
The question paper for theory examination is patterned in such a manner that the
Weightage of periods/marks allotted for each of the topics for a particular Course be
considered. End Examination paper is of 3 hours duration.
a) Each theory paper consists of Section ‘A’ and ‘B’

Section ‘A’ with Max marks of 30, contains 10 short answer questions. All
questions are to be answered and each carry 3 marks, i.e., 10 x 3 = 30.
17
Section ‘B’ with Max marks of 50 contains 8 essay type questions. Only 5
questions are to be answered and each carry 10 marks, i.e., Max. Marks: 5 x 10 =
50.
Thus, the total marks for theory examination shall be: 80.
b) For Engineering Drawing Course (107) consist of section ‘A’ and section ‘B’.
Section ‘A’ with max marks of 20, contains four (4) questions. All questions in
section ‘A’ are to be answered to the scale and each carries 5 marks, ie. 4 x 5=20.
Section ‘B’ with max marks of 40, contains six (6) questions. The student shall
answer any four (4) questions out of the above six questions and each question
carries 10 Marks, i.e., 4 x 10 = 40.
c) Practical Examinations
For Workshop practice and Laboratory Examinations, Each student has to pick
up a question paper distributed by Lottery System.
Max. Marks for an experiment / exercise : 50
Max. Marks for VIVA-VOCE : 10
Total Max. Marks : 60
In case of practical examinations with 50 marks, the marks shall be distributed as
Max. Marks for an experiment / exercise : 25
Max. Marks for VIVA-VOCE : 05
Total Max. Marks : 30
In case of any change in the pattern of question paper, the same shall be informed
sufficiently in advance to the candidates.
d) Note: Evaluation for Laboratory Courses, other than Drawing courses:
I. Instruction (teaching) in laboratory courses (except for the course on

Drawing) hereafter shall be task/competency based as delineated in the
Laboratory sheets, prepared by SBTET, AP and posted in its website.
II. Internal assessment for Laboratory shall be done on basis of task/s
performed by the student as delineated in the laboratory sheets,
prepared by SBTET, AP and posted in its website.
III. Question paper for End semester Evaluation shall be prepared as per
SBTET rules in vogue.
4.16. ISSUE OF MEMORONDUM OF MARKS

All candidates who appear for the end examination will be issued memorandum of
marks without any payment of fee. However candidates who lose the original
memorandum of marks have to pay the prescribed fee to the Secretary, State Board
of Technical Education and Training, A.P. for each duplicate memo from time to
time.
4.17. MAXIMUM PERIOD FOR COMPLETION OF DIPLOMA PROGRAMMES:
18
Maximum period for completion of the diploma courses is twice the duration of the
course from the date of First admission (includes the period of detention and
discontinuation of studies by student etc) failing which they will have to forfeit the
claim for qualifying for the award of Diploma (They will not be permitted to appear
for examinations after that date). This rule applies for all Diploma courses of 3 years
and 3 ½ years of engineering and non-engineering courses.
4.18. ELIGIBILITY FOR AWARD OF DIPLOMA
A candidate is eligible for award of Diploma Certificate if he / she fulfil the

following academic regulations.
i. He / She pursued a course of study for not less than 3 / 3 ½ academic years &
not more than 6 / 7 academic years.
ii. He / she have completed all the Courses.
Students who fail to fulfil all the academic requirements for the award of the
Diploma within 6 / 7 academic years from the year of admission shall forfeit
their seat in the course & their seat shall stand cancelled.
i. He / She pursued a course of study for not less than 2 / 2 ½ academic years &
not more than 4 / 5 academic years.
ii. He / she has completed all the Courses.
Students who fail to fulfil all the academic requirements for the award of the
Diploma within 4 / 5 academic years from the year of admission shall forfeit
their seat in the course & their seat shall stand cancelled.
4.19. ISSUE OF PHOTO COPY OF VALUED ANSWER SCRIPT, RECOUNTING&

REVERIFICATION:
A) FOR ISSUE OF PHOTO COPIES OF VALUED ANSWER SCRIPTS

I. A candidate desirous of applying for Photo copy of valued answer script/s
should apply within prescribed date from the date of the declaration of the
result.
II. Photo copies of valued answer scripts will be issued to all theory Courses and
Drawing Course (s).
III. The Photo copy of valued answer script will be dispatched to the concerned
candidate’s address as mentioned in the application form by post.
IV. No application can be entertained from third parties.
B) FOR RE-COUNTING (RC) and RE-VERIFICATION(RV) OF THE VALUED

ANSWER SCRIPT
i. A candidate desirous of applying for Re-verification of valued answer script
should apply within prescribed date from the date of the declaration of the
result.
ii. Re-verification of valued answer script shall be done for all theory Courses’
and Drawing Course(s).
iii. The Re-verification committee constituted by the Secretary, SBTETAP with
Course experts shall re-verify the answer scripts.
I. RE-COUNTING
19
The Officer of SBTET will verify the marks posted and recount them
in the already valued answer script. The variations if any will be recorded
separately, without making any changes on the already valued answer script.
The marks awarded in the original answer script are maintained (hidden).
II. RE-VERIFICATION
(i) The Committee has to verify the intactness and genuineness of the
answer script(s) placed for Re-verification.
(ii) Initially single member shall carry out the re-verification.
(iii) On re-verification by single member, if the variation is less than 12%
of maximum marks, and if there is no change in the STATUS in the
result of the candidate, such cases will not be referred to the next level
ie., for 2-Tier evaluation.
(iv) On re-verification by a single member, if the variation is more than
12% of maximum marks, it will be referred to 2-Tier evaluation.
(v) If the 2-Tier evaluation confirms variation in marks as more than 12%
of maximum marks, the variation is considered as follows:
a) If the candidate has already passed and obtains more than 12% of
the maximum marks on Re-verification, then the variation is
considered.
b) If the candidate is failed and obtains more than 12% of the
maximum marks on Re-verification and secured pass marks on re-
verification, then the status of the candidate changes to PASS.
c) If a candidate is failed and obtains more than 12% of the maximum
marks on Re-verification and if the marks secured on re-verification
are still less than the minimum pass marks, the status of the candidate
remain FAIL only.
(vii) After Re-verification of valued answer script the same or change if
any therein on Re-verification, will be communicated to the candidate.
(viii) On Re-verification of Valued Answer Script if the candidate’s marks
are revised, the fee paid by the candidate will be refunded or else the
candidate has to forfeit the fee amount.
Note: No request for Photo copies/ Recounting /Re-verification of valued answer script
would be entertained from a candidate who is reported to have resorted to Malpractice in
that examination.
4.20. Mal Practice Cases:

If any candidate resorts to Mal Practice during examinations, he / she shall be
booked and the Punishment shall be awarded as per SBTETAP rules and regulations
in vogue.
4.21. Discrepancies/ Pleas:

Any Discrepancy /Pleas regarding results etc., shall be represented to the SBTETAP
within one month from the date of issue of results. Thereafter, no such cases shall be
entertained in any manner.
4.22. Issue of Duplicate Diploma
If a candidate loses his/her original Diploma Certificate and desires a duplicate to be

issued he/she should produce written evidence to this effect. He / she may obtain a
20
duplicate from the Secretary, State Board of Technical Education and Training, A.P.,
on payment of prescribed fee and on production of an affidavit signed before a First
Class Magistrate (Judicial) and non-traceable certificate from the Department of
Police. In case of damage of original Diploma Certificate, he / she may obtain a
duplicate certificate by surrendering the original damaged certificate on payment of
prescribed fee to the State Board of Technical Education and Training, A.P.
In case the candidate cannot collect the original Diploma within 1 year from the date
of issue of the certificate, the candidate has to pay the penalty prescribed by the
SBTET AP from time to time.
4.23. Issue of Migration Certificate and Transcripts:
The Board on payment of prescribed fee will issue these certificates for the
candidates who intend to prosecute Higher Studies in India or Abroad.
4.24. General
i. The Board may change or amend the academic rules and regulations or syllabi at
any time and the changes or amendments made shall be applicable to all the
students, for whom it is intended, with effect from the dates notified by the
competent authority.
ii. All legal matters pertaining to the State Board of Technical Education and
Training, AP are within the jurisdiction of Mangalagiri.
iii. In case of any ambiguity in the interpretation of the above rules, the decision of
the Secretary, SBTET, A.P is final.
21
VISION
Develop Computer Engineers to be technologically adept, innovative, self-motivated and

responsible citizen with human values , high quality skills and to contribute significantly towards
ever changing Computer Technologies.
MISSION
M1 To provide opportunity to Diploma students who are capable of playing pivotal

role in wide aspects of modern Computer Engineering.
M2 To make the students understand basic concepts underlie in Computer
Engineering and able to apply them creatively in different fields of Engineering
M3 To train the student sensitive to the Environment, safety and economic context.
M4 To produce technically skilled students through intensive training in Computer
Engineering tools and application and to prepare the students for professional
career and further research.
PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVIES(PEOs)
Computer Engineering programme is ever changing to transform to transform students Ito

competent professionals with qualities, ethics and human values . On completion of the
integrated programme, the students should have acquired the following characteristics
PEO1 To produce best Diploma in Computer Engineering technicians by correlating

growing need of the industries in modern topics with the academic input and giving
the technical knowledge for further learning.
PEO2 To prepare the students as productive Computer Engineers, possessing supportive

and leadership skills in multidisciplinary domains, expertise in Practical orientation,
Communication Skills and latest developments.
PEO3 To give the depth of related skills and expertise in a single field, and the ability to
collaborate with other disciplines and work at the Supervisory cadre.
PEO4 To promote the students in professionalism, by successful completion of the

Diploma in Computer Engineering by emphasizing Field Practices in industry-
oriented activities.
PEO5 To sensitize the students on social and economic commitment and to inculcate a
nature to guard the values of community and protect environment.
22
PROGRAMME SPECIFIC OUTCOME(PSOs)
PSO1 Foundation of Computer System: Ability to understand the principles and working
of computer systems and can assess the hardware and software aspects of
computer systems.
PSO2 Foundations of Software development: Ability to understand the structure and

development methodologies of software systems. Possess professional skills and
knowledge of software design process. Familiarity and practical competence with a
broad range of programming language and open-source platforms.
PSO3 Foundation of mathematical concepts: Ability to apply mathematical methodologies

to solve computation task, model real world problem using appropriate data
structure and suitable algorithm, methodologies in developing computer related
problem solutions as well as apply them in establishing new firms in small scale
with the help of experience gained as part of industrial training.
PROGRAM OUTCOMES (POs)
Students completing Diploma in Computer Engineering are anticipated to have the following
abilities
PO1 Basic and Discipline specific knowledge: Apply knowledge of basic mathematics,
science and engineering fundamentals and engineering specialization to solve the
engineering problems.
PO2 Problem analysis: Identify and analyse well-defined engineering problems using
codified standard methods.
PO3 Design/ development of solutions: Design solutions for well-defined technical

problems and assist with the design of systems components or processes to meet
specified needs.
PO4 Engineering Tools, Experimentation and Testing: Apply modern engineering tools and
appropriate technique to conduct standard tests and measurements.
PO5 Engineering practices for society, sustainability and environment: Apply appropriate
technology in context of society, sustainability, environment and ethical practices.
PO6 Project Management: Use engineering management principles individually, as a team

member or a leader to manage projects and effectively communicate about well-
defined engineering activities.
PO7 Life-long learning: Ability to analyse individual needs and engage in updating in the
context of technological changes.
23
MAPPING OF PEOs WITH MISSIONS
PEO M1 M2 M3 M4
To produce best Diploma in Computer Engineering technicians 9 9 9 9

by correlatinggrowing need of the industries in modern topics
with the academic input and giving the technical knowledge
for further learning.
To prepare the students as productive Computer Engineers,

9 9 9 9
possessing supportive and leadership skills in multidisciplinary
domains, expertise in Practical orientation, Communication
Skills and latest developments.
To give the depth of related skills and expertise in a single 9 9 9 9

field, and the ability to collaborate with other disciplines and
work at the Supervisory cadre.
To promote the students in professionalism, by successful 9 9 9 9

completion of the Diploma in Computer Engineering by
emphasizing Field Practices in industry oriented activities.
To sensitize the students on social and economic commitment 9 9 9 9

and to inculcate a nature to guard the values of community
and protect environment.
24
SCHEME OF INSTRUCTIONS AND EXAMINATION
CURRICULUM-2023
(FIRST YEAR)
Instruction
Scheme Of Examinations
Periods/Week Total
Sub Code Name of the Subject Periods End
Per Year Duration Sessional Total
Theory Practicals Exam
(hrs) Marks Marks
Marks
THEORY SUBJECTS
CM-101 English-I 3 - 90 3 20 80 100
CM-102 Engineering Mathematics-I 5 - 150 3 20 80 100
CM-103 Engineering Physics 3 90 3 20 80 100

Engineering Chemistry and 100
CM-104 3 - 90 3 20 80
Environmental studies
Basics of Computer
CM-105 5 - 150 3 20 80 100
Engineering
CM-106 Programming in C 5 - 150 3 20 80 100
PRACTICAL SUBJECTS
CM-107 Engineering Drawing - 3 90 3 40 60 100
CM-108 Programming in C Lab - 6 180 3 40 60 100
CM-109 Physics Lab - 1.5 20 30 50

3 90
CM-110 Chemistry Lab - 1.5 20 30 50
Computer Fundamentals
CM-111 - 3 90 3 40 60 100
Lab
Activities - 3 90 3
Total 24 18 1260 - 1000
101,102,103,104 ,109,110&111common to all branches

107 common with DECE, DAIML,DAMG,DAMT,DCAI,DCBD,DWD,DCCN,DIOT
108 common with DCAI,DCBD,DWD
25
CURRICULUM-2023 ( III Semester )
Instruction
Periods/Week Total
Periods End Tot
Sub Code Name of the Subject
Per Duration Sessional Exam al
Theory Practicals Semester (hrs) Marks Mark Mar
s ks
THEORY SUBJECTS
CM-301 Mathematics –II 4 60 3 20 100

80
CM-302 Digital Electronics 5 - 75 3 20 100

80
100
CM-303 Operating systems 4 - 60 3 20 80
100
CM-304 Data Structures through C 5 - 75 3 20 80
100
CM-305 DBMS 5 - 75 3 20 80
PRACTICAL SUBJECTS
Digital Electronics Lab
CM-306 3 45 3
- 40 60 100
Data Structures Through C 90

CM-307 - 6 3 40 60 100
Lab
CM-308 DBMS Lab - 4 60 3 40 60 100
CM-309 Multimedia Lab - 3 45 3 40 60 100
ACTIVITIES - 3 45
Total 23 19 630 260 640 900

301 common with all branches 302 common with DIOT
303 common with DAIML,DCCN,DIOT
304 common with DCAI, DCBD,DWD
305 common with DAIML,DCAI,DCCN,DWD,DIOT
307 common with DCAI, DCBD,DWD&308 common with DAIML,DCAI,DCCN,DW&309 common
with DCCN
26
CURRICULUM-2023
(IV Semester)
Instruction
Periods/Week Scheme Of Examinations
Total
Periods
Sub Code Name of the Subject End
Per
Practicals
Duration Sessional Total
Exam
Theory
Semester (hrs) Marks Marks
Marks
THEORY SUBJECTS
CM-401 Software Engineering 5 - 75 3 20 80 100

Web Technologies
CM-402 5 75 3 20 80 100
-
Computer Organization
CM-403 And Microprocessors 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
OOP through Java

CM-404 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
Computer Networks
CM-405 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
&Cyber Security
PRACTICAL SUBJECTS
CM-406 Web Technologies Lab 4 60

- 3 40 60 100
Java Lab
CM-407 4 60 3 40 60 100
-
Communication Skills
CM-408 - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Computer Networking &

CM-409 - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Cyber Security Lab
ACTIVITIES - 3 45
Total 25 17 630 - 260 640 900

401 common with DAIML
402 common with DAIML,DCAI, DCBD,DCCN,DIOT
405 common with DCCN,DWD
406 common with DAIML,DCAI,DCCN
407 common with DAIML,DCCN
408 common with All branches & 409 common with DAIML,DCCN,DWD
27
CURRICULUM-2023
(V Semester)
Instruction
Periods/Week Total Scheme Of Examinations
Periods
Sub Code Name of the Subject Sessio- End
Pract- Per Duration Total
Theory Semester nal Exam
icals (hrs) Marks
Marks Marks
THEORY SUBJECTS
Industrial Management
CM-501 and Entrepreneurship 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
Big Data & Cloud

CM-502 Computing 5 75 3 20 80 100
-
CM-503 Android Programming 4 60 3 20 80 100

-
CM-504 Internet Of Things 4 60 3 20 80 100

-
CM-505 Python programming 5 75 3 20 80 100

-
PRACTICAL SUBJECTS
Android Programming
CM-506 4 60 3 40 60 100
Lab -
Python Programming
CM-507 _ 3 45 3 40 60 100
Lab
CM-508 Life Skills - 3 45 3 40 60 100
CM-509 Project work - 6 90 3 40 60 100
ACTIVITIES - 3 45
Total 23 19 630 - 260 640 900
501,508 common to all branches
503 common with DWD,DIOT
504 common with DAIML,DAMT, DCBD,DCCN,DWD,DIOT
506 common with DAIML,DWD
28
CURRICULUM-2023
(VI Semester)
CM-601 Industrial Training(At Industry)
SI. Subject Duration Scheme of evaluation

No. Max.
Item Nature
Marks
Assessment of
learning
1.First outcomes by
Assessment at both the
120
Industry (After faculty and
12 Weeks) training
mentor of the
industry
Assessment of
learning
2.Second
outcomes by
Assessment at
both the
the Industry 120
faculty and
(After 20
Industrial 6 months training
1 weeks))
Training mentor of the
industry
Final Training
20
Summative Report
assessment at Demonstration
institution level of any one of
30
the skills listed
in learning
outcomes
Viva Voce 10
TOTAL MARKS 300
The industrial training shall carry 300 marks and pass marks are 50%.A candidate failing to
secure the minimum marks should complete it at his own expenses.
During Industrial training the candidate shall put in a minimum of 90%attendance.
29
INDUSTRIAL TRAINING(Online Certification)
LEARNING OUTCOMES – SCHEME OF EVALUATION (Two Online Certificate courses):
LEARNING
TRAINING
TOPIC OUTCOMES (In- MARKS
MODULE NO.
house training)
First 3 1) Registration and Training of the course at i) Learning 120

Months/ Nptel/ Swayam /Moocs/course era/ Lectera/cal
ii) Mini Application
tech/oxford/hackerrank/udemy/ AP Skill
12 weeks Development/NASSCOM courses… etc., development
iii) Report
preparation
iv) 1st Assessment
Next 3 1) Registration and Training of the course at i) Learning 120

Months/ Nptel/Swayam/Moocs/course era/
Lectera/caltech/oxford/hackerrank/udemy/APskil
12 Weeks development
lDevelopment/NASSCOME courses… etc.,
iii) Report
preparation
iv) 2st Assessment
External Seminar on two reports/viva Evaluation by 60

Evaluation GUIDE/Co -
Examiner, HOD and
External Examiner
TOTAL 300
30
FIRST YEAR
31
CURRICULUM-2023
(FIRST YEAR)
Instruction
Periods/Week Total
Sub Code Name of the Subject Periods End
Per Year Duration Sessional Total
Theory Practicals Exam
(hrs) Marks Marks
Marks
THEORY SUBJECTS
CM-101 English-I 3 - 3 20 80 100
CM-102 Engineering Mathematics- I 5 - 150 3 20 80 100
CM-103 Engineering Physics 3 90 3 20 80 100

Engineering Chemistry and 100
CM-104 3 - 90 3 20 80
Environmental studies
Basics of Computer
CM-105 5 - 90 4 20 80 100
Engineering
CM-106 Programming in C 5 - 150 3 20 80 100
PRACTICAL SUBJECTS
CM-107 Engineering Drawing - 3 90 3 40 60 100
CM-108 Programming in C Lab - 6 180 3 40 60 100
CM-109 Physics Lab - 1.5 20 30 50

3
90
CM-110 Chemistry Lab - 1.5 20 30 50
Computer Fundamentals
CM-111 - 3 90 4 40 60 100
Lab
Activities - 3 90 3
Total 24 18 1260 - 1000
101,102,103,104 ,109,110&111common to all branches

107 common with DECE, DAIML,DAMG,DAMT,DCAI,DCBD,DWD,DCCN,DIOT
108 common with DCAI,DCBD,DWD
32
CM-101: English
Course Course No. of Periods per Total No. Marks Marks for
Code Title Week of Periods for FA SA
CM-101 English 3 90 20 80
Chapter. No of COs Mapped

Title of the Unit Periods
No
1 English for Employability 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4,CO5
2 Living in Harmony 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4,CO5
3 Connect with Care 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5
4 Humour for Happiness 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5
5 Never Ever Give Up! 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5
6 Preserve or Perish 9 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5
7 The Rainbow of Diversity 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5
8 New Challenges- Newer Ideas 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5
9 The End Point First 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5
10 The Equal Halves 8 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5
11 Dealing with Disaster 9 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, CO5
Total Periods 90
Course - To improve grammatical knowledge and enrich vocabulary.

Objectives - To develop effective reading, writing and speaking skills.
- To comprehend themes related to Personality, Society, Environment

to exhibit Universal Human Values.
33
CO No. Course Outcomes
Learn and apply various grammatical concepts to communicate in academic,
CO1
professional and everyday situations
CO2 Use appropriate vocabulary in various contexts
Read and comprehend different forms of academic, professional and general
CO3
reading material
Communicate effectively in speaking and writing in academic, professional
CO4
and everyday situations.
Display human values by applying the knowledge of themes related to Self,
CO5 Society, Environment, Science and Technology for holistic development and
harmonious living through communication.
CO-PO Matrix
Course Code Course Title: English No. of Periods: 90
Common-101 Number of Course Outcomes: 5
POs Mapped CO Periods Addressing PO in Level of Remarks

CO No. Column 1 Mapping
Number Percentage (1,2,3)
PO1 Not directly Applicable for English course, however, the language
activities make use of the content from Science and Technology
PO2 relevant to the programme to enhance English communication
PO3 skills.
PO4
PO5 CO5 16 18% Level 1
PO6 CO1, CO2, 52 58% Level 3 Up to 20%: Level 1

CO3, CO4,
21%-50%: Level 2
PO7 CO1, CO2, 22 24% Level 2
>50%: Level 3
CO3,
CO4,CO5
Level 3 – Strongly Mapped, Level 2- Moderately Mapped; Level 1- Slightly

Mapped
34
Learning Outcomes
1. English for Employability

1.1. Perceive the need for improving communication in English for employability
1.2. Use adjectives and articles effectively while speaking and in writing
1.3. Write simple sentences
2. Living in Harmony
2.1. Develop positive self-esteem for harmonious relationships
2.2. Use affixation to form new words
2.3. Use prepositions and use a few phrasal verbs contextually
3. Connect with Care

3.1. Use social media with discretion
3.2. Speak about abilities and possibilities
3.3. Make requests and express obligations
3.4. Use modal verbs and main verbs in appropriate form
3.5. Write short dialogues about everyday situations
4. Humour for Happiness

4.1. Realize the importance of humour for a healthy living
4.2. Improve vocabulary related to the theme
4.3. Inculcate reading and speaking skills
4.4. Frame sentences with proper Subject – Verb agreement
4.5. Understand the features of a good paragraph and learn how to gather ideas as a
preliminary step for writing a good paragraph.
5. Never Ever Give Up!

5.1. Learn to deal with failures in life
5.2. Use the present tense form for various every day communicative functions such as
speaking and writing about routines, professions, scientific descriptions and sports
commentary
5.3. Write paragraphs with coherence and other necessary skills
6. Preserve or Perish
6.1. Understand the ecological challenges that we face today and act to save the
environment.
6.2. Narrate / Report past events and talk about future actions
6.3. Develop vocabulary related to environment
6.4. Write e-mails
7. The Rainbow of Diversity

7.1. Appraise and value other cultures for a happy living in multi-cultural workspace
35
7.2. Understand the usage of different types of sentences
7.3. Ask for or give directions, information, instructions
7.4. Use language to express emotions in various situations
7.5. Write letters in various real life situations
8. New Challenges – Newer Ideas

8.1. Understand the functional difference between Active Voice and Passive Voice
8.2. Use Passive Voice to speak and write in various contexts
8.3. Understand the major parts and salient features of an essay
8.4. Learn about latest innovations and get motivated
9. The End Point First!

9.1. Understand the importance of setting goals in life
9.2. Report about what others have said both in speaking and writing
9.3. Write an essay following the structure in a cohesive and comprehensive manner
9.4. Apply the words related to Goal Setting in conversations and in life
10. The Equal Halves

10.1. Value the other genders and develop a gender-balanced view towards life
10.2. Identify the use of different conjunctions in synthesising sentences
10.3. Write various types of sentences to compare and contrast the ideas
10.4. Apply the knowledge of sentence synthesis in revising and rewriting short essays
10.5. Develop discourses in speech and writing
11. Dealing with Disasters

11.1. be aware of different kinds of disasters and the concept of disaster management
11.2. Generate vocabulary relevant to disaster management and use it in sentences
11.3. Analyze an error in a sentence and correct it
11.4. Learn and write different kinds of reports
Textbook: „INTERACT‟ (A Text book of English for I Year Engineering Diploma

Courses) - by SBTET, AP
Reference Books:
Martin Hewings: Advanced Grammar in Use, Cambridge University Press
Murphy, Raymond : English Grammar in Use, Cambridge University Press
Sidney Greenbaum : Oxford English Grammar, Oxford University Press
Wren and Martin (Revised by N.D.V. Prasad Rao) : English Grammar and Composition,
Blackie ELT Books, S. Chand and Co.
Sarah Freeman: Strengthen Your Writing, Macmillan
36
End Exam ( 80 Marks) 1,2,3 Unit Tests ( 20 Marks each)
Part A 10 Question 5 Questions
@ 3 Marks @ (1Q X4M) + (4Q X3M =12)
Total = 30 Marks Total = 16 Marks
Part B 5 Questions ( + 3 3 Questions ( with internal choice)

Choice)
@ 8 Marks
@10 Marks
Total = 50 Marks Total = 24 marks
Grand Total 80 Marks 40 Marks
Time Schedule : C23-Common- 101 : ENGLISH
No. of No. of
Chapter. Title of the Periods Weightage Short Long Mapping
No Unit allotted of Marks answer Answer of COs
questions questions
CO1, CO2,
English for
1 8 CO3, CO4,
Employability 1
CO5
16 2
CO1, CO2,
Living in
2 8 CO3, CO4,
Harmony
CO5
CO1, CO2,
Connect with
3 8 CO3, CO4,
Care
CO5
2
26 2
CO1, CO2,
Humour for CO3, CO4,
4 8
Happiness CO5
37
5 Never Ever 8 10 1 CO1, CO2,
Give Up! CO3, CO4,
CO5
1
Preserve or CO1, CO2,
6 Perish 9 CO3, CO4,
CO5
2
The Rainbow CO1, CO2,
7 of Diversity 8 23 CO3, CO4,
CO5
New 2 CO1, CO2,

8 Challenges - 8 CO3, CO4,
Newer Ideas CO5
19 1
The End Point CO1, CO2,
9 First 8 1 CO3, CO4,
CO5
The Equal CO1, CO2,

10 Halves 8 1 CO3, CO4,
CO5
16 1
Dealing with CO1, CO2,
11 Disaster 9 1 CO3, CO4,
CO5
Total 90 110 30 80
38
C23-Common-101 :English : Bifurcation of Syllabus for UNIT TESTS 1,2,3
Unit Lessons / Grammar / Language aspects Writing Skills

Test Chapters
( Topics or Short Answer ( Topics for Long answer/ Essay
questions) Questions)
U.T 1 Chapters 1,2,3 a) articles & prepositions, a) Theme based Paragraph
b)Vocabulary: Affixes, ( focus on LSRW skills, importance

synonyms, Antonyms, of English, Self-esteem, SWOC
matching meanings, words & analysis, Social media )
phrases, one word substitutes)
b) Dialogue on themes of lessons 2&3
c)Adjectives ( degrees of
comparison) / Dialogue on General topic / a
situation
d) Main& Auxiliary Verbs
c) Reading comprehension
e) phrasal verbs/ word order
U.T 2 Chapters a) concord a) Theme based paragraph

4,5,6,7
b) Tenses (Humour for happy living, learning
from failures, Environmental
c) Types of sentences protection, multi- culture /global
d) Framing questions culture )
e) words &phrases, linkers b) Letter writing ( formal& informal),
c) instructions/ directions, E-mail

writing
U.T 3 Chapters a) Voice (active &passive) a) Theme based paragraph/ Essay

8,9,10,11 writing ( Technical innovations, Goal
b) Speech( direct& indirect) setting, gender sensitivity, dealing
c) Synthesis of sentences with disaster)
( simple, complex, compound b) Essay writing, Report writing

sentences) c) Reading Comprehension
d) Error analysis
39
e) words &phrases, linkers
Unit Test Total=40 Short Answer questions Long Answer Questions: ( Part-B)
Question Marks
( Part-A) Q. 6,7,8 @ 8 marks each ;
Paper
( Part A=16
pattern Q. 1 = 4 marks Each question with Internal choice
Part B =24)
Q. 2 to 5 = 3 Marks each Total: 8X3 = 24 Marks
Total=16 Marks
40
CM-102
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-I
(Common to all Branches)
Course Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for FA Marks for SA
Code Periods/week periods
Engineering
CM-102 5 150 20 80
Mathematics-I
Chapter.
Unit Title No. of periods COs mapped
No
1 Algebra 31 CO1
2 Trigonometry 44 CO2
3 Co-ordinate Geometry 23 CO3
4 Differential Calculus 34 CO4
5 Applications of Derivatives 18 CO5
Total Periods 150
(i) To apply the principles of Algebra, Trigonometry and Co-ordinate

Course Objectives Geometry to real-time problems in engineering.
(ii) To comprehend and apply the concept of Differential Calculus in
engineering applications.
CO1 Identify functions as special relations, resolve partial fractions and

solve problems on matrices and determinants.
CO2 Solve problems using the concept of trigonometric functions, their
inverses and complex numbers.
Course Outcomes CO3 Find the equations and properties of straight lines, circles and conic
sections in coordinate system.
CO4 Evaluate the limits and derivatives of various functions.
CO5 Find solutions for engineering problems using differentiation.
Learning Outcomes:
UNIT - I
C.O. 1 Identify functions, resolve partial fractions and solve problems on matrices and
determinants.
L.O. 1.1 Define Set, Ordered pair and Cartesian product of two sets - examples.
1.2 Explain Relations and Functions – examples
1.3 Find Domain & Range of functions – simple examples.
1.4 Define one-one and onto functions.
1.5 Find the inverse of a function – simple examples.
1.6 Define rational, proper and improper fractions of polynomials.
41
1.7 Explain the procedure of resolving proper fractions of the types mentioned
below into partial fractions
f (x) f (x)
i) (ax b)(cx d ) ii) (ax b)2(cx d )
1.8 Define a matrix and order of a matrix.
1.9 State various types of matrices with examples (emphasis on 3rd order square
matrices).
1.10 Compute sum, difference, scalar multiplication and product of matrices. Illustrate the
properties of these operations such as commutative, associative and distributive
properties with examples and counter examples.
1.11 Define the transpose of a matrix and state its properties – examples.
1.12 Define symmetric and skew-symmetric matrices with examples. Resolve a
square matrix into a sum of symmetric and skew-symmetric matrices and
provide examples.
1.13 Define determinant of a square matrix; minor, co-factor of an element of a
3x3 square matrix with examples. Expand the determinant of a 3 x 3 matrix
using Laplace expansion formula. State and apply the properties of
determinants to solve problems.
1.14 Distinguish singular and non-singular matrices. Define multiplicative inverse
of a matrix and list properties of adjoint and inverse. Compute adjoint and
multiplicative inverse of a square matrix.
1.15 Solve a system of 3 linear equations in 3 unknowns using Cramer’s rule and
matrix inversion method.
UNIT - II
C.O. 2 Solve problems using the concept of trigonometric functions, their inverses and complex
numbers.
L.O. 2.1 Define trigonometric ratios of any angle - List the values of trigonometric ratios at
specified values.
2.2 Draw graphs of trigonometric functions - Explain periodicity of trigonometric
functions.
2.3 Define compound angles and state the formulae of sin(A±B), cos(A±B), tan(A±B) and
cot(A±B).
2.4 Give simple examples on compound angles to derive the values of sin150, cos150 ,
sin750 , cos750 , tan 150 , tan750 etc.
2.5 Derive identities like sin(A+B) sin(A-B) = sin 2 A –sin2 B etc.
2.6 Solve simple problems on compound angles.
2.7 Derive the formulae of multiple angles 2A, 3A etc and sub multiple angle A/2 in
terms of angle A of trigonometric functions.
2.8 Derive useful allied formulae like sin2A= (1- cos2A)/2 etc.
2.9 Solve simple problems using the multiple and submultiple formulae.
Syllabus for Unit test-I
completed
2.10 Derive the formulae on transforming sum or difference of two trigonometric ratios in
to a product and vice versa - examples on these formulae.
42
2.11 Solve problems by applying these formulae to sum or difference or product of two
terms.
2.12 Explain the concept of the inverse of a trigonometric function by selecting an
appropriate domain and range.
2.13 Define inverses of six trigonometric functions along with their domains and ranges.
2.14 Derive relations between inverse trigonometric functions so that the given inverse
trigonometric function can be expressed in terms of other inverse trigonometric
functions with examples.
2.15 State various properties of inverse trigonometric functions and identities like
-1 -1 S
sin x+cos x = , etc.
2
1 §
1 1
x y ·
2.16 Apply formulae like tan x tan y tan ¨ , where x t 0, y t 0, xy 1 etc.,
© 1 ¹
to solve Simple problems.
2.17 Explain what is meant by solution of trigonometric equations and find the general
solutions of sin x=k, cos x =k and tan x=k with appropriate examples.
2.18 Solve models of the type a sin2 x + b sin x +c=0 and a sin x + b cos x=c.
2.19 State sine rule, cosine rule, tangent rule and projection rule and solve a triangle using
these formulae.
2.20 List various formulae for the area of a triangle with examples.
2.21 Define a complex number, its modulus, conjugate, amplitude and list their
properties.
2.22 Define arithmetic operations on complex numbers with examples.
2.23 Represent the complex number in various forms like modulus-amplitude
(polar) form, Exponential (Euler) form with examples.
UNIT - III
Coordinate Geometry
C.O. 3 Find the equations and properties of straight lines, circles and conic sections in
coordinate system.
L.O. 3.1 Write different forms of a straight line – general form, point-slope form, slope-
intercept form, two-point form, intercept form and normal form (or perpendicular
form).
3.2 Find distance of a point from a line, acute angle between two lines, intersection of two
non-parallel lines and distance between two parallel lines.
3.3 Define locus of a point and circle.
3.4 Write the general equation of a circle and find its centre and radius.
3.5 Find the equation of a circle, given (i) centre and radius, (ii)two ends of the diameter
(iii)
three non collinear points of type (0,0) (a,0), (0, b).
3.6 Define a conic section - Explain the terms focus, directrix, eccentricity, axes and latus-
rectum of a conic with illustrations.
3.7 Find the equation of a conic when focus, directrix and eccentricity are given.
3.8 Describe the properties of Parabola, Ellipse and Hyperbola in standard forms
whose axes are along the co-ordinate axes and solve simple examples on these conics.
Syllabus for Unit test-II completed
43
C.O.4 Evaluate the limits and derivatives of various functions.
L.O. 4.1 Explain the concept of limit and meaning of lim f (x) l and state the
xo a
properties of limits.
4.2 Evaluate the limits of the type ᐦሺ‫ݔ‬ሻand lim f (x)
‫ݔ‬՜ܽ ሺ‫ݔ‬ሻ x of g(x)
xn a n sin x tan x a x 1
4.3 State the Standard limits lim , lim , lim , lim ,
x a x o0 x x o0 x
xo a xo0 x
ex 1 1 1 ·x
lim §
, lim(1 x) , lim ¨1 ¸ (without proof) and solve simple
x
xo 0 x x o0 x of © x ¹
problems
using these standard limits.
4.4 Explain the concept of continuity of a function at a point and on an interval
4.5 State the concept of derivative of a function y = f(x) – definition, first principle
f (x h) f (x)
as lim and also provide standard notations to denote the
h o0 h
derivative of a function.
4.6 Explain the significance of derivative in scientific and engineering applications.
4.7 Find the derivative of standard algebraic, logarithmic, exponential and trigonometric
functions using the first principle.
4.8 Find the derivatives of inverse trigonometric, hyperbolic and inverse hyperbolic
functions.
4.9 State the rules of differentiation of sum, difference, scalar multiplication,
product and quotient of functions with simple illustrative examples.
4.10 Explain the method of differentiation of a function of a function (Chain rule)
with illustrative examples.
4.11 Explain the method of differentiation of parametric functions with examples.
4.12 Explain the procedure for finding the derivatives of implicit functions with examples.
4.13 Explain the need of taking logarithms for differentiating some functions of [f(x)]g(x)
type – examples on logarithmic differentiation.
4.14 Explain the concept of finding the second order derivatives with examples.
4.15 Explain the concept of functions of several variables, finding partial derivatives and
difference between the ordinary and partial derivatives with simple examples.
4.16 Explain the concept of finding second order partial derivatives with simple problems.
C.O. 5 Evaluate solutions for engineering problems using differentiation
L.O. 5.1 State the geometrical meaning of the derivative - Explain the concept of derivative to
find the slopes of tangent and normal to a given curve at any point on it with
examples.
5.2 Find the equations of tangent and normal to to a given curve at any point on it –
simple problems.
5.3 Explain the derivative as a rate of change in distance-time relations to find the
velocity and acceleration of a moving particle with examples.
5.4 Explain the derivative as a rate measurer in the problems where the quantities like
areas, volumes vary with respect to time- illustrative examples.
44
5.5 Define the concept of increasing and decreasing functions - Explain the conditions to
find points where the given function is increasing or decreasing with illustrative
examples.
5.6 Explain the procedure to find the extreme values (maxima or minima) of a function
of single variable- simple problems for quadratic and cubic polynomials.
5.7 Apply the concept of derivatives to find the errors and approximations - simple
problems.
Syllabus for Unit test-III completed
CO/PO – Mapping
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 2 2 3 3 2 2
CO2 3 3 2 2 3 2 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 3 2 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Avg. 3 2.8 2.4 2.6 3 2.4 2.4
3 = Strongly mapped (High), 2 =moderately mapped (Medium), 1 =slightly mapped (Low)
Note: The gaps in CO/PO mapping can be met with appropriate activities as follows:
For PO5: Appropriate quiz programmes may be conducted at intervals and duration as
decided by concerned faculty.
For PO6: Seminars on applications of mathematics in various engineering disciplines are to
be planned and conducted.
For PO7: Plan activities in such a way that students can visit the Library to refer standard
books on Mathematics and access the latest updates in reputed national and
international journals. Additionally, encourage them to attend seminars and learn
mathematical software tools.
PO- CO – Mapping strength

CO periods addressing PO in
Level
PO No Mapped with CO no column I Remarks
(1,2 or 3)
No %
CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, 150 >40% Level
1 100% 3
CO5 (31+44+23+34+18) 3
CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, 80 Highly
2 53.3% 3
CO5 (8+23+12+22+15) addressed
CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, 61 25% to 40%
3 40.6% 3
CO5 (9+14+9+14+15) Level 2
4 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, 61 40.6% 3 Moderately
45
CO5 (14+9+9+14+15) addressed
CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, 150 5% to 25%
PSO 1 100% 3
CO5 (31+44+23+34+18) Level 1 Low
CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, 62 addressed
PSO 2 41.3% 3
CO5 (10+14+9+14+15) <5% Not
CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4, 62 addressed
PSO 3 41.3% 3
CO5 (10+14+9+14+15)
COURSE CONTENT
Unit-I
Algebra
1. Functions:
Definitions of Set, Ordered pair, Cartesian product of two sets, Relations, Functions, Domain
& Range of functions – One-one and onto functions, inverse of a function.
2. Partial Fractions:
Definitions of rational, proper and improper fractions of polynomials. Resolve rational

fractions (proper fractions) into partial fractions covering the types mentioned below.
f (x) f (x)
i) (ax b)(cx d ) ii) (ax b)2(cx d )
3. Matrices:
Definition of a matrix, types of matrices - Algebra of matrices, equality of two matrices, sum,
difference, scalar multiplication and product of matrices. Transpose of a matrix, Symmetric,
skew-symmetric matrices - Determinant of a square matrix, minor and cofactor of an
element, Laplace’s expansion, properties of determinants - Singular and non-singular
matrices, Adjoint and multiplicative inverse of a square matrix-System of linear equations in
3 variables-Solutions by Cramer’s rule and Matrix inversion method.
Unit-II
Trigonometry
4. Trigonometric ratios:
Definition of trigonometric ratios of any angle, values of trigonometric ratios at specified
values, draw graphs of trigonometric functions, periodicity of trigonometric functions.
5. Compound angles:
Formulas of sin(A±B), cos(A±B), tan(A±B), cot(A±B), and related identities.
6. Multiple and sub multiple angles:
Formulae for trigonometric ratios of multiple angles 2A, 3A and sub multiple angle A/2.
7. Transformations:
Transformations of products into sums or differences and vice versa.
8. Inverse trigonometric functions:
Definition, domains and ranges-basic properties.
9. Trigonometric equations:
46
Concept of a solution, principal value and general solution of trigonometric equations:
Sinx =k, cosx= k, tanx =k, where k is a constant. Solutions of simple quadratic equations and
equations of type a sin x + b cos x=c.
10. Properties of triangles:
Relations between sides and angles of a triangle- sine rule, cosine rule, tangent rule and
projection rule-area of a triangle.
11. Complex Numbers:
Definition of a complex number, modulus, conjugate and amplitude of a complex number -
Arithmetic operations on complex numbers - Modulus-Amplitude (polar) form,
Exponential form (Euler form) of a complex number.
UNIT-III
Coordinate geometry
12 Straight lines: Various forms of a straight line - Angle between two lines, perpendicular
distance from a point, intersection of non-parallel lines and distance between parallel lines.
13. Circle: Locus of a point, Circle definition - Circle equation given (i) centre and radius, (ii)
two ends of a diameter (iii) three non-collinear points of type (0,0), (a,0), (0, b) - General
equation of a circle –its centre and radius.
14. Definition of a conic section - Equation of a conic when focus, directrix and eccentricity
are given - Properties of parabola, ellipse and hyperbola in standard forms.
UNIT-IV
Differential Calculus
15. Concept of Limit- Definition and Properties of Limits and Standard Limits - Continuity of a
function at a point.
16. Concept of derivative- Definition (first principle)- different notations - Derivatives of
standard algebraic, logarithmic, exponential, trigonometric, inverse trigonometric,
hyperbolic and inverse hyperbolic functions - Derivatives of sum, difference, scalar
multiplication, product, quotient of functions - Chain rule, derivatives of parametric
functions, derivatives of implicit functions, logarithmic differentiation - Second order
derivatives - Functions of several variables, first and second order partial derivatives.
UNIT-V
Applications of Derivatives
17. Geometrical meaning of the derivative, equations of tangent and normal to a curve at any
point.
18. Physical applications of derivatives – Velocity, acceleration, derivative as a rate
measurer.
19. Applications of the derivative to find the extreme values – Increasing and decreasing
functions, maxima and minima for quadratic and cubic polynomials.
20. Absolute, relative and percentage errors - Approximate values due to errors in
measurements.
Textbook:
Engineering Mathematics-I, a textbook for first year diploma courses, prepared & prescribed
by SBTET, AP.
Reference Books:
ϭ͘ Shanti Narayan, A Textbook of matrices, S.Chand&Co.
Ϯ͘ Robert E. Moyer & Frank Ayers Jr., Schaum’s Outline of Trigonometry, 4th Edition, Schaum’s
Series.
ϯ͘ G.B.Thomas, R.L.Finney, Calculus and Analytic Geometry, Addison Wesley, 9th Edition, 1995.
ϰ͘ Frank Ayers & Elliott Mendelson, Schaum’s Outline of Calculus, Schaum’s Series.
ϱ͘ D͘sǇŐŽĚƐŬǇ͕DĂƚŚĞŵĂƚŝĐĂů,ĂŶĚďŽŽŬ͕DŝƌWƵďůŝƐŚĞƌƐ͕DŽƐĐŽǁ͘
47
TIME SCHEDULE
Chapter. Chapter No. of Marks Short Essay COs

No Periods Allotted type type mapped
Unit - I: Algebra
1 Functions 6 3 1 0 CO1
2 Partial Fractions 5 3 1 0 CO1
3 Matrices and 2 1 CO1
20 16
Determinants
Unit - II: Trigonometry
4 Trigonometric Ratios 2 0 0 0 CO2
5 Compound Angles 5 3 1 0 CO2
6 Multiple and Submultiple 1 0 CO2
8 3
angles
7 Transformations 6 5 0 1/2 CO2
8 Inverse Trigonometric 0 1/2 CO2
6 5
Functions
9 Trigonometric Equations 6 5 0 1/2 CO2
10 Properties of triangles 5 5 0 1/2 CO2
11 Complex Numbers 6 3 1 0 CO2
Unit III: Co-ordinate Geometry
12 Straight Lines 5 3 1 0 CO3
13 Circles 6 5 0 1/2 CO3
14 Conic Sections 12 5 0 1/2 CO3
Unit – IV: Differential Calculus
15 Limits and Continuity 6 3 1 0 CO4
16 Differentiation 28 23 1 2 CO4
Unit – V: Applications of Derivatives
17 Geometrical Applications 4 5 0 1/2 CO5
18 Physical Applications 6 5 0 1/2 CO5
19 Maxima and Minima 4 5 0 1/2 CO5
20 Errors and 0 1/2 CO5
4 5
Approximations
Total 150 110 10 8
Marks 30 80
C-23 common-102
Unit Test Syllabus

Unit Test Syllabus
Unit Test-I From L.O. 1.1 to L.O. 2.9
Unit Test-II From L.O. 2.10 to L.O. 3.8
Unit Test-III From L.O.4.1 to L.O. 5.7
48
C-23
ENGINEERING PHYSICS
Course code Course title No.of periods Total no. of Marks for FA Marks for SA
per week periods
CM-103 Engineering 03 90 20 80
Physics
Weightage No. of No. of

Chapter. No. of of Marks Short Essay COs
Major topics
No Periods Answer Type mapped
Questions Questions
Units and 09 3 1 CO1
1.
measurements
2. Statics 11 13 1 1
3. Gravitation 12 20 2
4. Concepts of energy 10 13 1 1 CO2
5. Thermal physics 10 13 1 1
6. Sound 12 16 2 1 CO3
7. Electricity &Magnetism 13 16 2 1
8. Modern physics 13 16 2 1 CO4
Total: 90 110 10 8
Course title : Engineering Physics

(1) To understand the basic concepts of physics for various Engineering
applications as required for industries.
Course objectives
(2) To equip the students with the scientific advances in technology and
make the student suitable for any industrial or scientific organization.
MATRIX SHOWING MAPPING OF COURSE OUTCOMES WITH PROGRAMME OUTCOMES
Familiarize with various physical quantities, their SI units and

CO1 errors in measurements; understand the concepts of vectors
and various forces in statics.
Understand the concepts of gravitation with reference to
CO2 applications in satellites, provide the knowledge of various
forms of energy and their working principles.
COURSE
Familiarize with the knowledge of transmission of heat and
OUTCOMES
CO3 gas laws; provide the knowledge on musical sound and noise
as pollution and also the concepts of echo and reverberation.
Provide basic knowledge of electricity and concepts of
CO4 magnetism and magnetic materials; familiarize with the
advances in Physics such as photoelectric ell, optical fibers,
semiconductors, superconductors and nanotechnology.
49
Matrix showing mapping of Course Outcomes with Program Outcomes
CO1 3 2 2 1 2 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 2 2 2 1 2
CO3 2 1 2 1 1 1
CO4 3 2 3 2 2 3 2 2
CO-PO Mapping Strength

Engineering Physics No of periods 90
Course No of Course Objectives : 4
code
Common -
103
Pos Mapped with CO No CO periods Level remarks
addressing PO in Col 1,2,3
1
NO %
PO1 CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4 44 48.9 % 3 >40% level 3
(highly addressed)
PO2 CO1,CO2, CO4 11 12.2% 1
25% to 40% level 2
PO3 CO1, CO2,CO3, CO4 10 11.1% 1 (moderately addressed)
PO4 CO1, CO2,CO4 8 8.9% 1 5% to 25% level 1 (Low

addressed)
PO5 CO2,CO3, CO4 8 8.9% 1
< 5%
PO6
(not addressed)
PO7 CO1, CO2, CO3, CO4 9 10.0% 1
3 = strongly mapped, 2 = moderately mapped, 1 = slightly mapped
Note: The gaps in CO and PO mapping will be achieved by one or more appropriate activities from the
following.
(i) Seminars (ii) Tutorials (iii) Guest Lecturers (iv) Assignments

(v) Quiz competitions (vi) Industrial visits (vii) Tech fest (viii) Mini project
(ix) Group discussions (x) Virtual classes (xi) Library visit for e-books
50
Learning outcomes
Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to
1.0 Understand the concept of units and measurements

1.1 Explain the concept of units
1.2 Define t he te rms
a) Physical quantity, b) Fundamental physical quantities and
c ) D erived physical quantities
1.3 Define unit
1.4 Define fundamental units and derived units
1.5 State SI units with symbols for fundamental and some derived quantities
1.6 State Multiples and Submultiples in SI system
1.7 State rules of writing S.I units
1.8 State advantages of SI units
1.9 What are direct and indirect measurements.
1.10 Define accuracy and least count
1.11 Define error in measurement
1.12 Define absolute, relative and percentage errors with their formulae
1.13 Solve simple problems on absolute, relative and percentage errors
2.0 Understand the concepts of statics
2.1 Explain the concept of Vectors
2.2 Define scalar and vector quantities with examples
2.3 Represent vectors geometrically
2.4 Define the types of vectors (equal, negative, unit, co-initial, co-planar, position vector)
2.5 Resolve the vector into rectangular components
2.6 State and explain triangle law of addition of vectors
2.7 Define concurrent forces, co-planar forces and equilibrant.
2.8 State and explain Lami’s theorem
2.9 State the parallelogram law of addition of forces with diagram.
2.10 Write the expressions for magnitude and direction of resultant (no derivation)
2.11 Illustrate parallelogram law with examples (i) flying of bird and (ii) working of sling.
2.12 Define moment of force and couple.
2.13 Write the formulae and S.I units of moment of force and couple.
2.14 Solve simple problems on (i)Resolution of force and
(ii) Parallelogram law of forces (finding R,α and θ).
3.0 Understand the concepts of Gravitation
3.1 State and explain Newton’s universal law of gravitation.
3.2 Define G and mention its value.
3.3 Explain the acceleration due to gravity (g)
3.4 Explain the factors affecting the value of g
3.5 Derive the relationship between g and G.
3.6. State and explain the Kepler’s laws of planetary motion
3.7 Define a satellite.
3.8 What are natural and artificial satellites? Give examples.
3.9 Define orbital velocity and write its formula.
3.10 Define escape velocity and write its formula.
3.11 Write a brief note on Polar satellites.
3.12 Write a brief note on Geo-stationary satellites.
3.13 Mention the applications of artificial satellites.
51
3.14 Solve simple problems on (i) Newton’s law of gravitation and (ii) calculation of orbital
and escape velocities.
4.0 Understand the concepts of Energy.
4.1 Define work done and energy. Mention their SI units.
4.2 List various types of energy.
4.3 Define P.E with examples. Write its equation.
4.4 Define K.E with examples. Write its equation.
4.5 Derive relationship between K.E and momentum.
4.6 State the law of conservation of energy. Give various examples.
4.7 Write a brief note on solar energy.
4.8 Explain the principle of solar thermal conversion.
4.9 Explain the principle of photo voltaic effect
4.10 Solve simple problems on (i) work done (ii) P.E & K.E and (iii) Relation between K.E &
momentum.
5.0 Understand the concepts of thermal physics
5.1 Define the concepts of heat and temperature
5.2 State different modes of transmission of heat
5.3 Explain conduction, convection and radiation with two examples each.
5.4 State and explain Boyle’s law
5.5 Define absolute zero temperature
5.6 Explain absolute scale of temperature
5.7 State the relationship between degree Celsius, Kelvin and Fahrenheit temperatures
5.8 State Charle’s law and write its equation
5.9 State Gay-Lussac’s law and write its equation
5.10 Define ideal gas
5.11 Derive ideal gas equation
5.12 Explain why universal gas constant ( R) is same for all gases
5.13 Calculate the value of R for 1 gram mole of gas.
5.14 Solve simple problems on (i) Inter conversion of temperatures between °C, K and F
(ii) Gas laws and (iii) Ideal gas equation.
6.0 Understand the concepts of Sound
6.1 Define the term sound
6.2 Define longitudinal and transverse waves with one example each
6.3 Explain the factors which affect the velocity of sound in air
6.4 Distinguish between musical sound and noise
6.5 Explain noise pollution and state SI unit for intensity of sound
6.6 Explain sources of noise pollution
6.7 Explain effects of noise pollution
6.8 Explain methods of minimizing noise pollution
6.9 Define Doppler effect.
6.10 List the Applications of Doppler effect
6.11 Define reverberation and reverberation time
6.12 Write Sabine’s formula and name the physical quantities in it.
6.13 Define echoes and explain the condition to hear an echo.
6.14 Mention the methods of reducing an echo
6.15 Mention the applications of an echo
6.16 What are ultra sonics
6.17 Mention the applications of ultra sonics, SONAR
52
6.18 Solve simple problems on echo
7.0 Understand the concepts of Electricity and Magnetism
7.1 Explain the concept of P.D and EMF
7.2 State Ohm’s law and write the fo rmula
7.3 E xplain Ohm’s law
7.4 Define resistance and specific resistance. Write their S.I units.
7.5 State and explain Kichoff’s first law.
7.6 State and explain Kirchoff’s second law.
7.7 Describe Wheatstone bridge with legible sketch.
7.8 Derive an expression for balancing condition of Wheatstone bridge.
7.9 Describe Meter Bridge experiment with necessary circuit diagram.
7.10 Write the formulae to find resistance and specific resistance in meter bridge
7.11 Explain the concept of magnetism
7.12 What are natural and artificial magnets (mention some types)
7.13 Define magnetic field and magnetic lines of force.
7.14 Write the properties of magnetic lines of force
7.15 State and explain the Coulomb’s inverse square law of magnetism
7.16 Define magnetic permeability
7.17 Define para, dia, ferro magnetic materials with examples
7.18 Solve simple problems on (i) Ohm’s law (ii) Kirchoff’s first law (iii) Wheatstone bridge (iv) meter
bridge and (v) Coulomb’s inverse square law
8.0 Understand the concepts of Modern physics
8.1 State and explain Photo-electric effect.
8.2 Write Einstein’s Photo electric equation and name the physical quantities in it.
8.3 State laws of photo electric effect
8.4 Explain the Working of photo electric cell
8.5 List the Applications of photoelectric effect
8.6 Recapitulate refraction of light and its laws
8.7 Define critical angle
8.8 Explain the Total Internal Reflection
8.9 Explain the principle and working of Optical Fiber
8.10 List the applications of Optical Fiber
8.11 Explain the energy gap based on band structure
8.12 Distinguish between conductors, semiconductors and insulators based on energy gap
8.13 Define doping
8.14 Explain the concept of hole
8.15 Explain the types of semiconductors : Intrinsic and extrinsic
8.16 Explain n-type and p-type semiconductors
8.17 Mention the applications of semiconductors
8.18 Define superconductor and superconductivity
8.19 List the applications of superconductors
8.20 Nanotechnology definition, nano materials and applications
COURSECONTENT
1. Units and measurements

Introduction – Physical quantity – Fundamental and Derived quantities – Fundamental and
derived units - SI units – Multiples and Sub multiples – Rules for writing S.I. units-
Advantages of SI units – Direct and indirect measurements – Accuracy and least count –
Errors : Absolute, relative and percentage errors –Problems.
53
2. Statics
Scalars and Vectors– Representation of a vector - Types of vectors - Resolution of vector into
rectangular components – Triangle law of vectors – Concurrent forces - Lami’s theorem -
Parallelogram law of forces : Statement, equations for magnitude and direction of resultant,
examples – Moment of force and couple – Problems.
3. Gravitation
Newton’s law of gravitation and G – Concept of acceleration due to gravity (g) – Factors
affecting the value of g – Relation between g and G- Kepler’s laws – Satellites :
Natural and artificial – Orbital velocity and escape velocity – Polar and
geostationary satellites – Applications of artificial satellites – Problems.
4. Concepts of energy
Work done & Energy-Definition and types of energy - potential energy - kinetic energy-- K.E
and momentum relation – Law of Conservation of energy, examples - Solar energy, principles
of thermal and photo conversion – Problems.
5. Thermal physics
Modes of transmission of heat – Expansion of Gases - Boyle’s law – Absolute scale of
temperature - Thermometric scales and their inter conversion - Charle’s law - Gay-Lussac’s
law - Ideal gas equation - Universal gas constant (R) - Problems.
6. Sound
Sound - Nature of sound - Types of wave motion, Longitudinal and transverse – Factors
affecting the velocity of sound in air - musical sound and noise - Noise pollution – Causes &
effects - Methods of reducing noise pollution - Doppler effect - Echo- Reverberation -
Reverberation time-Sabine ‘s formula – Ultrasonics & applications – SONAR -
Problems.
7. Electricity & Magnetism
Concept of P.D and EMF - Ohm’s law and explanation-Specific resistance - Kirchoff’s
laws – Wheat stone’s bridge - Meter bridge.
Natural and artificial magnets – magnetic field and magnetic lines of force –
Coulomb’s inverse square law – Permeability – Magnetic materials – Para, dia, ferro
– Examples – Problems.
8. Modern Physics
Photoelectric effect – laws of photoelectric effect – photoelectric cell – Applications of
photoelectric cell - Total internal reflection - Fiber optics - Principle and working of an optical
fiber - Applications of optical fibers – Semiconductors : Based on Energy gap – Doping –
Hole - Intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors (n-type & p-type) – Applications of
semiconductors – Superconductivity – applications – Nanotechnology definition, nano
materials, applications.
REFERENCES
1. Intermediate physics - Volume - I & 2 Telugu Academy (English version)
2. Unified physics Volume 1, 2, 3 and 4 Dr. S.L Guptha and Sanjeev Guptha
3. Concepts of Physics, Vol 1 & 2 H.C. Verma
4. Text book of physics Volume I & 2 Resnick & Halliday
5. Fundamentals of physics Brijlal & Subramanyam
6. Text book of applied physics Dhanpath Roy
7. NCERT Text Books of physics Class XI & XII Standard
8. e-books/e-tools/websites/Learning Physics software/eLMS
54
Table showing the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests
Unit test Learning outcomes to be covered
Unit test - 1 From 1.1 to 3.14
55
Engineering Chemistry and Environmental Studies (C-23)
CM-104
No. of
Total No. of
Course code Course Title Periods per Marks for FA Marks for SA
Periods
week
Engineering
Chemistry and
CM- 104 3 90 20 80
Environmental
Studies
Chapter.
Unit Title/Chapter No. of Periods COs Mapped
No
Fundamentals of
14 CO1
Chemistry
Solutions, Acids and
2 16 CO1
Bases
3 Electrochemistry 12 CO2
4 Corrosion 8 CO2
5 Water Treatment 8 CO3
Polymers& Engineering
6 12 CO4
Materials
7 Fuels 6 CO4
8 Environmental Studies 14 CO5
Total 90
Course Objectives
Course Title: Engineering Chemistry & Environmental Studies
1. To familiarize with the concepts of chemistry involved in the

process of various Engineering Industrial Applications.
2. To know the various natural and man-made environmental
Course Objectives issues and concerns with an interdisciplinary approach that
include physical, chemical, biological and socio cultural aspects
of environment.
3. to reinforce theoretical concepts by conducting relevant
experiments/exercises
56
Course outcomes
Explain Bohr`s atomic model, chemical bonding, mole concept, acids

CO1 and bases, PH and Buffer solutions.
CO2 Explain electrolysis, Galvanic cell, batteries and corrosion
CO3 Explain the chemistry involved in the treatment of hardness in water.
Course Explain the methods of preparation and applications of Polymers and

Outcomes CO4 Elastomers, chemical composition and applications of Alloys, Composite
Materials, Liquid Crystals , Nano Materials and Fuels.
Explain Global impacts due to air pollution, causes , effects and

controlling methods of water pollution and understand the
CO5 environment, forest resources, e-Pollution and Green Chemistry
Principles.
Engineering. Chemistry and Environmental studies

CM-104 No Of periods 90
No of Course Outcomes:5
CO periods
Mapped with CO Level
POs addressing % remarks
No PO in Col 1,2,3
NO. 1
PO1 CO1,CO2,CO3 42 46.7 % 3
PO2 CO2,CO3 16 17.8% 1

>40% level 3 (highly
PO3 CO4 12 13.3% 1 addressed) 25% to 40% level
2(moderately addressed) 5%
PO4 CO4 6 6.7% 1
to 25% level 1 (Low
PO5 CO5 14 15.5% 1 addressed) < 5%(not
addressed)
PO6 - - - -
PO7 - - - -
57
COs-POs mapping strength (as per given table)
CO1 3 - - - - - - - - -
CO2 3 1 - - - - - - - -
CO3 3 1 - - - - - - - -
CO4 - - 1 1 - - - - - -
CO5 - - - - 1 - - - - -
Average 3 1 1 1 1 - - - -
3=strongly mapped 2= moderately mapped 1= slightly mapped

Note: The gaps in CO and PO mapping will be achieved by one or more appropriate activities
from the following:
i) Seminars ii) Tutorials iii) Guest Lectures iv) Assignments v) Quiz competitions vi) Industrial visit
vii) Tech Fest viii) Mini project ix) Group discussions x) Virtual classes xi) Library visit for e-books
Time Schedule:
Cha Question wise

No of Weightage distribution Mapped with
pter. Unit Title/Chapter
Periods of marks CO
No
Essay Short
1 Fundamentals of Chemistry 14 21 1½* 2 CO1
2 Solutions, Acids and Bases 16 21 1½* 2 CO1
3 Electrochemistry 12 13 1 1 CO2
4 Corrosion 8 13 1 1 CO2
5 Water Treatment 8 13 1 1 CO3
Polymers & Engineering

6 12 13 1 1 CO4
materials.
7 Fuels 6 3 0 1 CO4
8 Environmental Studies 14 13 1 1 CO5
Total 90 110 8 10
58
*One question of 10 marks should be given with 50% weightage from unit title 1and 2
Upon completion of the course, the student shall be able to learn out
ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY AND ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

1.0 Atomic structure
1.1 Explain the charge, mass of fundamental particles of an atom (electron, proton and neutron)
and the concept of atomic number and mass number.
1.2 State the Postulates of Bohr’s atomic theory and its limitations.
1.3 Explain the s ignifican ce of four Quantum numbers and draw the atomic structures of
Silicon and Germanium.
1.4 Define Orbital of an atom and draw the shapes of s,p and d-orbitals.
1.5 Explain 1. Aufbau principle, 2. Pauli’s exclusion principle 3. Hund’s principle.
1.6 Write the electronic configuration of elements up to atomic number 30.
1.7 Explain the significance of chemical bonding.
1.8 Explain the Postulates of Electronic theory of valency.
1.9 Define and explain Ionic and Covalent bonds with examples of NaCl , *H2,*O2 and *N2.(*
Lewis dot method).
1.10 List out the Properties of Ionic compounds and covalent compounds and distinguish
between their properties.
2.0 Solutions, Acids and Bases
2.1 Define the terms 1 . Solution, 2 . Solute and 3 . Solvent.
2.2 Classify solutions based on solubility.
2.3 Define the terms 1. Atomic weight, 2. Molecular weight and 3. Equivalent weight.
Calculate Molecular weight and Equivalent weight of the given acids (HCl, H 2SO4, H3PO4)
Bases (NaOH, Ca(OH)2, Al(OH)3 and Salts (NaCl, Na2CO3, CaCO3).
2.4 Define mole and solve numerical problems on mole concept.
2.5 Define molarity, normality and solve numerical problems on molarity and normality.
a) Calculate the Molarity or Normality, if weight of solute and volume of solution are given.
b) Calculate the weight of solute, if Molarity or Normality with volume of solution are given.
c) Problems on dilution to convert high concentrated solutions to low concentrated
solutions.
2.6 Explain Arrhenius theory f Acids and Bases and give its limitations.
2.7 Define ionic product of water, pH and solve numerical problems on pH (Strong Acids and
Bases).
2.8 Define buffer solution and classify buffer solutions with examples. Give its applications.
3.0 Electrochemistry
3.1 Define the terms 1. Conductor 2. Semiconductor 3. Insulator, 4. Electrolyte 5. Non–
electrolyte. Give two examples each.
3.2 Distinguish between Metallic conduction and Electrolytic conduction.
3.3 Explain electrolysis by taking an example of used NaCl and list out the applications of
electrolysis.
3.4 Define Galvanic cell. Explain the construction and working of Galvanic cell.
3.5 Distinguish between electrolytic cell and galvanic cell.
3.6 Define battery and list the types of batteries with examples.
3.7 Explain the construction, working and applications of i) Dry cell (Leclanche cell), ii) Lead
storage battery, iii) Lithium-Ion battery and iv) Hydrogen-Oxygen fuel cell.
4.0 Corrosion
4.1 Define the term corrosion.
59
4.2 state the Factors influencing the rate of corrosion.
4.3 Describe the formation of (a)composition cell (b) stress cell (c)concentration cell during
corrosion.
4.4 Define rusting of iron and explain the mechanism of rusting of iron.
4.5 Explain the methods of prevention of corrosion by
(a)Protective coatings (anodic and cathodic coatings).
(b) Cathodic protection (Sacrificial anode process and Impressed–voltage process).
5. 0Water Treatment
5.1 Define soft water and hard water with respect to soap action.
5.2 Define and classify the hardness of water.
5.3 List out the salts that causing hardness of water (with Formulae).
5.4 State the disadvantages of using hard water in industries.
5.5 Define Degree of hardness and units of hardness (mg/L and ppm).
5.6 Solve numerical problems on hardness.
5.7 Explain the methods of softening of hard water by (i) Ion-exchange process and (ii) Reverse
Osmosis process.
6.0 Polymers & Engineering materials.
A) Polymers
6.1 Explain the concept of polymerization.
6.2 Describe the methods of polymerization (a) addition polymerization of ethylene (b)
condensation polymerization of Bakelite (Only flowchart).
6.3 Define plastic. Explain a method of preparation and uses of the following plastics:
1. PVC 2. Teflon 3. Polystyrene 4. Nylon 6,6.
6.4 Define elastomers. Explain a method of preparation and applications of the following:
1. Buna- S 2. Neoprene.
B) Engineering Materials
6.5 Define an alloy. Write the composition and applications of the following:
1.Nichrome 2. Duralumin 3.Stainless Steel.
6.6 Define Composite Materials and give any two examples. State their Properties and
applications.
6.7 Define Liquid Crystals and give any two examples. State their Properties and applications.
6.8 Define Nano Materials and give any two examples. State their Properties and applications.
7.0 Fuels
7.1 Define the term fuel.
7.2 Classify the fuels based on occurrence.
7.3 Write the composition and uses of the following:
1. LPG 2. CNG 3.Biogas 4.Power alcohol
7.4 Write the commercial production of Hydrogen as future fuel. Give its advantages and
disadvantages.
8.0 ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES
8.1 Explain the scope and importance of environmental studies.
8.2 Define environment. Explain the different segments of environment.
1.Lithosphere 2. Hydrosphere 3. Atmosphere 4. Biosphere
8.3 Define the following terms:
1. Pollutant 2.Pollution 3.Contaminant 4. Receptor 5. Sink 6. Particulates 7. Dissolved
oxygen (DO) 8. Threshold Limit Value (TLV) 9. BOD 10.COD 11. Eco system 12 . Producers
13 . Co ns ume r s 14. Decomposers with examples.
8.4 State the renewable and non- renewable energy sources with examples.
8.5 State the uses of forest resources.
60
8.6 Explain the causes and effects of deforestation.
8.7 Define air pollution and explain its Global impacts 1. Greenhouse effect, 2. Ozone layer
depletion and 3. Acid rain.
8.8 Define Water pollution. Explain the causes, effects and controlling methods of Water
pollution.
8.9 Define e-Pollution, State the sources of e-waste. Explain its health effects and control
methods.
8.10 Define Green Chemistry. Write the Principles and benefits of Green Chemistry.
COURSE CONTENT
ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY AND ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

1. Fundamentals of Chemistry
Atomic Structure: Introduction - Fundamental particles – Bohr’s theory – Quantum
numbers – Atomic structure of Silicon and Germanium - Orbitals, shapes of s, p and d
orbitals - Aufbau’s principle - Hund’s rule - Pauli’s exclusion Principle -Electronic
configuration of elements.
Chemical Bonding: significance–Electronic theory of valency- Types of chemical bonds –
Ionic and covalent bond with examples–Properties of Ionic and Covalent compounds.
2. Solutions, Acids and Bases
Solutions: Types of solutions - Mole concept – Numerical problems on mole concept -
Methods of expressing concentration of a solution – Molarity and Normality – Numerical
problems on molarity and normality.
Acids and Bases: Arrhenius theory of acids and bases – Ionic product of water- pH–
Numerical problems on pH–Buffer solutions – Classification- applications.
3. Electrochemistry
Conductors, semiconductors, insulators, electrolytes and non-electrolytes – Electrolysis of
fused NaCl–Applications of electrolysis - Galvanic cell – Battery-Types- Dry Cell (Leclanche
Cell), Lead- Storage battery- Lithium-Ion battery -Hydrogen-Oxygen Fuel cell.
4. Corrosion
Introduction - Factors influencing corrosion - Composition, Stress and Concentration Cells–
Rusting of iron and its mechanism – Prevention of corrosion by Protective Coating methods,
Cathodic Protection methods.
5. Water treatment
Introduction– Soft and Hard water– Causes of hardness– Types of hardness– Disadvantages
of hard water – Degree of hardness (ppm and mg/lit) – Numerical problems on hardness -
Softening methods – Ion-Exchange process– Reverse Osmosis process.
6. Polymers & Engineering materials
Polymers:
Concept of polymerization – Types of polymerization – Addition, condensation with
examples – Plastics - Preparation and uses of i).PVC ii) Teflon iii) Polystyrene and iv) Nylon
6,6.
Elastomers: Preparation and application of i)Buna-s and ii) Neoprene.
Engineering Materials:
Alloys- Composition and applications of i) Nichrome, ii) Duralumin and iii) Stainless Steel.
Composite Materials- Properties and applications.
Liquid Crystals- Properties and applications.
Nano Materials- Properties and applications.
7. Fuels
Definition and classification of fuels – Composition and uses of i) LPG ii) CNG iii) Biogas
61
and iv) Power alcohol – Hydrogen as a future fuel-production- advantages and disadvantages.
8. ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES
Scope and importance of environmental studies – Environment - Important terms related to
environment–Renewable and non-renewable energy sources–Forest resources –
Deforestation –Air pollution–Global impacts on environment –Water pollution – causes –
effects – control measures- e-Pollution –Sources of e-waste - Health effects - Control
methods - Green Chemistry- Principles -Benefits.
Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for Unit Test- 1, Unit Test- 2 and Unit Test -
3
Unit Test Learning outcomes to be covered
Unit Test – 1 From 1.1 to 2.8
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Telugu Academy Intermediate chemistry Vol. 1&2

2. Jain & Jain Engineering Chemistry
3. O.P. Agarwal, Hi-Tech. Engineering Chemistry
4. D.K.Sharma Engineering Chemistry
5. A.K. De Engineering Chemistry
62
No. of Total No. of
Course code Course Title Marks for FA Marks for SA
Periods/Weeks periods
Basics Of
CM-105 Computer 5 150 20 80
Engineering
Time Schedule
No. of No. of
Chapter No. of Short Essay CO’s
Chapter/Unit Title Marks
No. Periods Answer Type Mapped
Questions Questions
1. Fundamentals of Computers 30 16 2 1 CO1
2. Programming Methodology 15 13 1 1 CO2
3. Operating System basics 35 26 2 2 CO3
Computer Hardware and

4. 35 29 3 2 CO4
Networking Basics
Emerging Trends in Computer

5. 35 26 2 2 CO5
Technologies
Total 150 110 10 8
i) To know the fundamentals of Computers

Course ii) To familiarize programming methodologies like algorithms and
Objectives flowcharts
iii) To understand Operating system basics
iv) To familiarize Emerging Technologies
Course Outcomes:
At the end of the course the student able to learn following:
CO1 CM-105.1 Explain computer fundamentals
CO2 CM-105.2 Explain various flowchart, algorithm methods

CO3 CM-105.3 Explain the importance of Basic Computer operating systems
CO4 CM-105.4 Analyse functioning of various Hardware components and
Explain Networking process in computers
CO5 CM-105.5 Explain basics of emerging technologies in the world
63
CO-PO/PSO Matrix:
CO NO. PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CM-105.1 3 3 1 1
CM-105.2 1 2 2 1 3 1 3 1
CM-105.3 3 1 1 1 1 3 1 1
CM-105.4 3 2 2 1 1 2 1 2
CM-105.5 3 2 1 1 1 2 1 2
Average 2.7 1.5 2 1.25 1.3 1.7 1.25 2.2 1.3 1.3
3=Strongly mapped , 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped
Learning Outcomes:
1.0 Fundamentals of Digital Computer

1.1. Define various terms related to computers – Computer, Hardware , Software, Firmware,
High Level Language , Low Level Language
1.2. Draw and explain block diagram of a Computer in detail
1.3. Describe the current family of CPUs used in Computers.
1.4. State the use of storage devices used in a Computer.
1.5. List the two types of memory used in a Computer.
1.6. State the importance of cache memory.
1.7. Explain the generations of computers.
1.8. Classification of computers - based on a) size, b) processor.
1.9. State the importance of binary number system for use in Digital Computers
2.0 Implement Programming Methodology.
2.1. State the different steps involved in problem solving.
2.2. Define algorithm.
2.3. List four characteristics of algorithm.
2.4. Define a program
2.5. Differentiate between program and algorithm.
2.6. State the steps involved in algorithm development.
2.7. Differentiate between algorithm and flowchart.
2.8. Develop algorithms for simple problems.
2.9. Draw the symbols used in flowcharts.
2.10. Draw flowcharts for simple problems.
3.0 Operating Systems basics
3.1. Describe the need for an operating system.
3.2. List the various operating systems used presently.
3.3. List and explain
3.3.1. Types of dos commands
3.3.2. Any 10 Internal Commands
3.3.3. Any 5 External Commands
64
3.3.4. Features of Windows desktop.
3.3.5. Components of a Window.
3.4. State the function of each component of a Window.
3.5. Describe the Method of starting a program using start button
3.6. Explain usage of maximize, minimize, restore down and close buttons.
3.7. State the meaning of a file ,folder.
3.8. Describe the Method of viewing the contents of hard disk drive using Explorer
3.9. Describe the Method of finding a file using search option.
3.10. Use control panel for
3.10.1. installing and uninstalling software
3.10.2. installing and uninstalling hardware
3.10.3. Changing the system date and time
3.10.4. Installing a printer
3.11. Explain Drive space using system tool option of Accessories group
3.12. Explain Disk defragmentation using System tools
3.13. Explain the procedure for changing resolution, color, appearance, screensaver options of
the display
4.0 Computer Hardware and Networking Basics
4.1 Hardware Basics
4.1.1 Identify hardware used for I/P, O/P & inside computer case, system board
components used for communication among devices
4.1.2 Software - 3 types of Software :ROM BIOS, OS, application software
4.1.3 Explain Functions of BIOS
4.1.4 Explain boot process
4.1.5 Explain POST and important beep codes
4.1.6 Describe about different connectors.
1.2 Networking Basics
1.2.1 Explain meaning of a computer network.
1.2.2 Describe the concept of a Local Area Network, Wide Area Network
1.2.3 Compare Internet and Intranet
1.2.4 Describe about internet service provider.
1.2.5 Explain the role of a modem in accessing the Internet.
1.2.6 Describe address format and IP address
1.2.7 What is browser and List various browsers
1.2.8 Explain the role of search engines with examples.
1.2.9 Explain Internet Security.
5.0 Emerging Trends in Computer Technology
5.1. Introduction to Machine Learning
5.1.1. Define Machine Learning, Compare Traditional Programming with Machine Learning
5.1.2. List the applications and key elements of Machine Learning
5.1.3. Define the terms in relation to approaches to Machine Learning(Decision tree learning,
Association rule learning, Artificial neural networks, Deep Learning, Inductive Learning,
Genetic algorithms, Clustering)
5.1.4. Explain Inductive Learning
5.1.5. Classify the Machine Learning
5.2. Introduction to Block chain Technology
5.2.1. Define Block chain
5.2.2. State the importance of Block chain with examples
5.2.3. List applications of Block chain
65
5.2.4. Types of Block chain
5.2.5. Features of Block chain
5.2.6. Advantages of Block chain
5.2.7. Characteristics of Block chain
5.3. Basics of Ethical Hacking
5.3.1. Define Ethical Hacking and List the categories of Hackers
5.3.2. Describe Roles and responsibilities of Ethical Hackers
5.3.3. List and explain the phases in Ethical Hacking and Explain Penetrate testing
5.4. Virtual Reality concepts
5.4.1. Define the terms Virtual Reality, Tele presence, Cyberspace, Tel existence, HCI(Human-
Computer Interaction), Haptics, Haptics technologies, augmented reality and mixed
reality
5.4.2. Discuss the evolution of Virtual Reality
COURSE CONTENT
1.0 Fundamentals of Digital Computer

Block diagram of a digital computer, functional parameters of CPU, Clock speed and word
length, Functional blocks of a CPU: ALU and Control unit, types of memory RAM, ROM,
purpose of cache memory
2.0 Programming Methodology.

Steps involved in problem solving – Define algorithm , Program - Characteristics of algorithm
- Differentiate between program and algorithm- Steps involved in algorithm development -
Differentiate algorithm and flowchart - Algorithms for simple problems - Symbols used in
flowcharts -Flowcharts for simple problems.
3.0 Understand Operating Systems

Need for an operating system - List the various operating systems - Types of commands,
Internal & External Commands Features of Windows desktop - Components of a Window -
Function of each component of a Window - Method of starting a program using start button
-Maximize, minimize, restore down and close buttons- Meaning of a file and folder -Viewing
the contents of hard disk drive using explorer -Finding a file - Formatting a floppy disk using
explore option - Installing and uninstalling new software using control panel - installing
and un installing a new hardware using control panel - Drive space - disk defragmentation -
Installing a printer - Changing resolution, colour, appearance and screensaver options of the
display - Changing the system date and time
4.0 Computer Hardware and Networking Basics

Hardware Basics- I/P, O/P - inside computer case- system board components - 3 types of
Software - BIOS- boot process - POST - different connectors. Networking Basics - computer
network - Local Area Network - Wide Area Network - Compare Internet and Intranet -
internet service provider - role of a modem - address format and IP address - browser -
search engines with examples -Describe Internet Security.
66
5.0 Emerging Trends in Computer Technology
Introduction to Machine Learning - Compare Traditional Programming with Machine
Learning- applications -know the key elements- Define the terms - Decision tree learning,
Association rule learning, Artificial neural networks, Deep Learning, Inductive Learning,
Genetic algorithms, Clustering- Explain Inductive Learning- Classify the Machine Learning -
List the applications
Introduction to Block chain Technology – Definition of Block chain - Iimportance of Block

chain with examples - Aapplications of Block chain - Types of Block chain - Features of Block
chain- Advantages of Block chain - Characteristics of Block chain
Basics of Ethical Hacking - categories of Hackers - Penetrate testing -Roles and

responsibilities of Ethical Hackers- phases in Ethical Hacking
Virtual Reality concepts- Virtual Reality, Tele presence, Cyberspace, Tel existence, HCI ,
Haptics, Haptics technologies, Discuss the evolution of Virtual Reality
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Information Technology - Curtin.

2. Computer Science Theory & Application - E. Balaguruswamy, B. Sushila
3. Introduction to Computers (Special Indian Edition) - Peter Norton
4. Cloud Computing : Principles and Paradigms - RajkumarBuyya, James Broberg
and AndrzejGoscinski
5. http://www.ijeset/media(for Basics of Ethical Hacking)
6. Brief-Introduction-of-Virtual-Reality-its-Challenge by Sharmistha Mandal international Journal
of Scientific & Engineering Research, Volume 4, Issue April-2013)
Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for unit tests

Unit test-1 From 1.1 to 3.3
67
No. of Total No. of
Programming
CM-106 5 150 20 80
in C
Time Schedule
No. of No. of
Questions Questions
1. Introduction to C
20(10,10) 16 2 1 CO1,CO2
Language
2. Input and output 25 CO1,CO2,

statements, Operators 16 2 1
(8,12, 5) C3
and Expressions in C.
3. Decision making, 40 CO1,CO2,
iterative and other 26 2 2
(5,20,15) CO3
control statements
4. Arrays and strings, 30 CO1,CO2
26 2 2
Structures and Unions (5,15,10) ,CO3
5. User defined functions, CO1,CO2
pointers, file 35
26 2 2 ,CO3,CO4,
management and pre- (3,5,10,10,7)
CO5
processor directives.
Total Periods 150 110 10 8
Course Objectives x To Relate basics of programming language constructs

using C Language
x To classify and implement data types, derived data types,
pointers, files, statements
x To analyse and develop effective modular programming
x To construct mathematical, logical and scientific problems
and real time applications using C language
CO NO COURSE OUTCOMES
CO1 CM-106.1 Develop, compile and debug programs using C- fundamentals and
different programming statements in C language.
CO2 CM-106.2 Evaluate various operations using primary and derived data types in C.
CO3 CM-106.3 Analyze programs using predefined functions, modules and recursive
68
techniques
CO4 CM-106.4 Write scientific and logical programs using pointers, file pointers
CO5 CM-106.5 Develop programs using information passing
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
CM-
3 2 2 3 2
106.1
CM-
2 3 3
106.2
CM-
2 3 3 3 1 2
106.3
CM-
3 1 1 2 3 2 2
106.4
CM-
2 2 2 2 3 2 3
106.5
Average 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2.3
Learning Objectives
1.0 Introduction to C-Language

1.1 Describe the history of C-language, structure of C-language program
1.2 Describe the programming style of C language
1.3 Explain the steps involved in Editing, compiling ,executing and debugging of C
program
1.4 Describe character set, C-Tokens, Keywords, Identifiers, Constants, Variables
1.5 Define Data Type
1.6 Classify Data Types and explain them with examples.
1.7 Explain declaration of constants and variables
1.8 Explain initializing values to variables in declaration
1.9 Explain about user defined data types with a simple program
1.10 Explain the usage of type qualifiers
2.0 Input and output statements, Operators and Expressions in C

2.1 Explain the importance of Pre-processor Directive #include
2.2 Illustrate
2.2.1 Reading a character using getch(), getche() and getchar()
2.2.2 writing a character using putch(), putchar()
2.2.3 formatted input using scanf() & write sample programs using it.
2.2.4 formatted output using printf() & write sample programs using it.
2.3 Explain character functions
2.4 Define an operator, an expression
69
2.5 Explain
2.5.1 Various arithmetic operators and explain the evaluation of arithmetic
expressions with example.
2.5.2 Various relational operators and discuss evaluation of relational expressions
2.5.3 Various logical operators and discuss evaluation of logical expressions
2.6 Explain the difference between unary and binary operators
2.7 Describe various assignment operators, increment and decrement operators
2.8 Illustrate nested assignment
2.9 Explain conditional operators with an example
2.10 Explain
2.10.1 Bit-wise operators and explain each with an example
2.10.2 Special operators with examples
2.10.3 Precedence and Associativity of operators
2.11 Describe evaluation of compound expression
2.12 Illustrate type conversion techniques
2.13 Write sample programs by using all the operators
3.0 Decision making, iterative and other control statements

3.1 Explain decision making statements and its need in programming
3.2 Explain
3.2.1 Simple if and if-else statement with syntax and sample program
3.2.2 Nested if..else statements with syntax and sample program
3.2.3 if-else-if ladder with syntax and sample program
3.2.4 switch statement with syntax and sample program
3.3 State the importance of break statement with switch and illustrate
3.4 Compare
3.4.1 Conditional operator with if-else statement
3.4.2 if-else with switch statement
3.5 Define looping or iteration
3.6 List and explain iterative statements with syntax and examples
3.7 Compare different loop statements
3.8 What is nested loop and illustrate.
3.9 Explain the usage of goto, break and continue statements with loop statements
3.10 Differentiate break and continue statements.
3.11 Define structured programming.
4.0 Arrays, strings, Structures and Unions
4.1 Define Array
4.2 Describe
4.2.1 Declaration and initialization of One Dimensional(1D) Array
with syntax and sample programs.
4.2.2 Accessing the elements in 1D-Array with sample programs.
4.2.3 Reordering an array in ascending order.
4.3 Explain declaration and initialization and usage of two Dimensional(2D)Arrays.
4.4 Illustrate the concept of arrays with sample programs on matrix
addition, subtraction and matrix multiplication
4.5 Define String
4.6 Describe
4.6.1 Declare and initialize of String variables.
4.6.2 gets() and puts()
4.6.3 Reading and displaying of strings from terminal with sample programs.
70
4.6.4 Explain about various String handling functions with sample programs.
4.7 Explain Character arithmetic.

4.8 Define a structure.
4.9 Explain
4.9.1 Initializing structure, Declaring structure, Declaring Structure Variables.
4.9.2 Accessing of the structure members
4.9.3 Structure assignment.
4.9.4 How to find size of a structure.
4.9.5 Nested structure concept.
4.9.6 Structures containing arrays
4.9.7 Array of structures
4.10 Define Union, declare, initialize and use of union.
4.11 Distinguish between Structures and Unions
4.12 Write sample programs for all the concepts of structures and unions
5.0 User defined functions, pointers, file management and preprocessor directives
5.1 Explain
1. Need of user defined functions
2. Advantages of the functions
3. Elements of function
4. Return values and their types
5.2 Define a function call, function prototype
5.3 Explain
5.3.1 Function declaration in programs
5.3.2 Functions with no arguments and no return values with sample programs
5.3.3 Functions with arguments with no return values with sample programs
5.3.4 Functions with arguments with return values with sample programs
5.3.5 Functions with no arguments with return values with sample programs
5.3.6 Functions that return multiple values with sample programs
5.3.7 Recursion with sample programs
5.3.8 Passing arrays to functions with sample programs
5.3.9 Structure as function arguments and structures as function values.
5.3.10Structures containing pointers.
5.3.11Self referential structures with examples.
5.3.12Storage classes-auto, register, static, extern
5.3.13Scope, visibility and lifetime of variables in functions
5.4 Differentiate Local and External variables
5.5 Define Global variable
5.6 Discuss passing the global variables as parameters using sample programs
5.7 Explain
5.7.1 Declaration and initialization of Pointers.
5.7.2 Accessing the address of a variable using &operator
5.7.3 Accessing the value of a variable through pointer
5.7.4 Pointer Arithmetic
5.7.5 Precedence of address and de-referencing operators.
5.7.6 Relationship between arrays and pointers.
5.7.7 Accessing array elements using pointers
5.7.8 Pointers as function arguments
5.7.9 Pointer arrays with examples.
5.8 Differentiate between address and de-referencing operators.
71
5.9 Explain
5.9.1 Dynamic memory management functions with examples.
5.9.2 Structures containing pointers.
5.9.3 Pointer to structure.
5.9.4 Self referential structures with examples.
5.10 Explain
5.10.1 Files and how to declare file pointer to a file
5.10.2 Illustrate the concept of file opening using various modes
5.10.3 Illustrate the concept of closing of a file
5.10.4 Illustrate the concept of Input / Output operations on a file
5.10.5 Illustrate the concept of random accessing files
5.10.6 Explain different file handling functions
5.11 Explain
5.11.1 Preprocessor directives
5.11.2 Need of preprocessor directives.
5.12 Write
5.12.1 Simple programs using preprocessor directives.
5.12.2 Simple program using command line arguments (argc and argv )
COURSE CONTENT
1. Introduction to C Language: History of C language - importance of C Define language -

structure of C language - programming style of C language - steps involved in executing
the C program-Character set - C Tokens - Keywords and Identifiers- Constants and
Variables - Data Types and classification - declaration of constants and variables-
initializing values to variables-user defined data types-usage of type qualifiers.
2. Input and output statements, Operators and Expressions in C: importance of Pre-

processor #include-reading and writing a single character functions- formatted input and
output statements-operators-classification of operators-operator precedence and
associativity- expressions and expression evaluation-type conversion techniques.
3. Understand Decision making, iterative and other control statements :simple if,if-else, if
else ladder, nested if-else-switch statement - else if, nested if , else if ladder, switch
statements- Classification of various loop statements- while statement – do.. while
statement ram - for loop statement - nesting of loops- Comparisons of different loop
statements –go to statement-break and continue statements –concept of structured
programming.
4. Understand Arrays and strings , basics of Structures and Unions: Arrays -One Dimensional
Arrays – array programs -two Dimensional Arrays- programs on matrix - Strings –- String
handling functions - Structure- Array of structures - Nested structures- pointer to
structure Self referential structures - Union and illustrate use of a union – difference
between Structures and Union
72
5. Understand User defined functions, basics of pointers, file management and
preprocessor directives: Function – user defined functions – Advantages - Recursion
concept - parameter passing –storage classes - scope, visibility and lifetime of variables in
functions- Local and External variables -Global variable- - Pointer - Differentiate address
and de-referencing operators - Pointer Arithmetic- precedence of address and de-
referencing operators - -Relationship between Arrays and Pointers - Pointers as Function
Arguments - Dynamic memory management- Files - file pointers - file opening in various
modes - Concept of closing of a file –operations on files - Need of Preprocessor directives
- Various Preprocessor directives- Macros – Command line arguments
REFERENCE BOOKS
Programming in ANSI C E. Balaguruswamy TataMcGrawHill

Programming with C Gottfried Tata McGrawHill
C The complete Reference Schildt Tata McGrawHill

73
ENGINEERING DRAWING
No. of
Total No. of
Course code Course Title periods Marks for FA Marks for SA
periods
/week
ENGINEERING
CM-107 3 90 40 60
DRAWING
Time Schedule
No. of No. of
Unit Title Marks
No. periods Answer Type Mapped
Questions Questions
Use of Drawing Instruments,

1 Free Hand Lettering and 10 10 2 0 CO1
Dimensioning Practice
Principles of Geometric
2 15 15 1 1 CO2
Constructions
Projections of points, lines,
3 20 25 1 2 CO3
planes and solids
4 Sectional Views 20 10 0 1 CO4
5 Orthographic projection 25 20 0 2 CO5
Total 90 80 4 6
Upon completion of the course the student shall be able to understand the
Course
basic graphic skills and use them in preparation, reading and interpretation of
Objectives
engineering drawings.
COURSE OUTCOMES
Practice the use of engineering drawing instruments and Familiarise

CO1 CM-107.1
with the conventions to be followed in engineering drawing as per BIS
CO2 CM -107.2 Construct the i) basic geometrical constructions ii) engineering curves
Visualise and draw the projections of i) Points ii) Lines iii) Regular
CO3 CM -107.3
Planes iv) Regular Solids
CO4 CM -107.4 Visualise and draw the sectional views of components
CO5 CM -107.5 Visualise and draw the orthographic projections of components
74
PO-CO Mapping
P P P P P P P
CM- PS PS PS
O O O O O O O
107 O1 O2 O3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CO1 3 2 2 1 1 2 3 1
CO2 3 2 2 2 1 2 3 1
CO3 3 2 2 1 1 1 2 3 1
CO4 3 2 2 1 2 1 2 3 1
CO5 3 2 2 1 1 2 1 2 3 1
CO6 3 2 2 1 1 2 1 2 3 1
AVER
3 3 3 1 1 2 1 2 3 1
AGE
3: High, 2: Moderate,1: Low
LEARNING OUTCOMES
Upon completion of the course the student shall able to
1.0 Use of Drawing Instruments, Free Hand Lettering and Dimensioning Practice
1.1 State the importance of drawing as an engineering communication medium
1.2 Select the correct instruments to draw the different lines / curves.
1.3 Use correct grade of pencil and other instruments to draw different types of lines and for
different purposes
1.4 Identify the steps to be taken to keep the drawing clean and tidy.
1.5 Write titles using vertical and slopping (inclined) lettering and numerals of 7mm, 10mm
and 14mm height.
1.6 Acquaint with the conventions, notations, rules and methods of dimensioning in
engineering drawing as per the B.I.S.
1.7 Dimension a given drawing using standard notations and desired system of dimensioning.
2.0 Principles of Geometric Constructions
2.1 Practice the basic geometric constructions like i) dividing a line into equal parts
i) Exterior and interior tangents to the given two circles
ii) Tangent arcs to two given lines and arcs
2.2 Draw any regular polygon using general method when i) side length is given
i) Inscribing circle radius is given ii) describing circle radius is given
2.3 Draw the engineering curves like i) involute ii) cycloid
3.0 Projections of points, lines, planes and solids (All in first quadrant only)
3.1 Explain the basic principles of the orthographic projections
3.2 Visualise and draw the projection of a point with respect to reference planes (HP & VP)
3.3 Visualise and draw the projections of straight lines with respect to two reference
Planes (up to lines parallel to one plane and inclined to other plane)
3.4 Visualise and draw the projections of planes (up to planes perpendicular to one plane and
inclined to other plane)
75
3.5 Visualise and draw the projections of regular solids like Prisms, Pyramids, Cylinder, Cone
(up to axis of solids parallel to one plane and inclined to other plane)
4.0 Sectional Views
4.1 Identify the need to draw sectional views.
4.2 Draw sectional views of regular solids by applying the principles of hatching.
5.0 Orthographic projection
5.1 Draw the orthographic views of an object from its pictorial drawing.
5.2 Draw the minimum number of views needed to represent a given object fully.
Competencies and Key competencies to be achieved by the student
S.No Major topic Key Competency
x Explain the linkages between Engineering drawing

and other subjects of study in Diploma course.
x Select the correct instruments to draw various
Use of Drawing Instruments, Free entities in different orientation
1.
Hand Lettering and Dimensioning
x Write titles using sloping and vertical lettering and
Practice
numerals as per B.I.S (Bureau of Indian standards)
x Dimension a given drawing using standard
notations and desired system of dimensioning
x Dividing a line into equal parts, tangents to circles,
2. Geometrical construction Construct involute, cycloid from the given data.
x Draw the projections of points, straight lines,

Projection of points, Lines,
3. planes & solids with respect to reference planes
Planes & Solids
(HP& VP)
x Differentiate between true shape and apparent
shape of section
4. Sectional Views
x Apply principles of hatching.
x Draw simple sections of regular solids
x Draw the minimum number of views needed to
5. Orthographic Projection represent a given object fully.
COURSE CONTENTS:
NOTES: 1. B.I.S Specification should invariably be followed in all the topics.

2. A-3 Size Drawing Sheets are to be used for all Drawing Practice Exercises.
1.0 Use of Drawing Instruments, Free Hand Lettering and Dimensioning Practice
Explanation of the scope and objectives of the subject of Engineering Drawing . Its
importance as a graphic communication -Need for preparing drawing as per standards – SP-
46 –1988 – Mention B.I.S - Role of drawing in -engineering education - Basic Tools, tools for
drawing– Mentioning of names under each classification and their brief description -Scales:
76
Recommended scales reduced & enlarged -Lines: Types of lines, selection of line thickness -
Selection of Pencils -Sheet Sizes: A0, A1, A2, A3, A4, A5, Layout of drawing sheets in respect
of A0, A1, A3 sizes, Sizes of the Title block and its contents - Care and maintenance of
Drawing Sheet, Importance of lettering – Types of lettering -Guide Lines for Lettering
Practicing of letters & numbers of given sizes (7mm, 10mm and 14mm)-Advantages of single
stroke or simple style of lettering - Use of lettering stencils- Purpose of engineering Drawing,
Need of B.I.S code in dimensioning -Shape description of an Engineering object -Definition
of Dimensioning size description -Location of features, surface finish, fully dimensioned
Drawing -Notations or tools of dimensioning, dimension line extension line, leader line,
arrows, symbols, number and notes, rules to be observed in the use of above tools -Placing
dimensions: Aligned system and unidirectional system ( SP-46-1988)-Arrangement of
dimensions Chain, parallel, combined progressive, and dimensioning by co-ordinate
methods-The rules for dimensioning standard, features “Circles (holes) arcs, angles, tapers,
chamfers, and dimension of narrow spaces.
2.0 Geometric Constructions
Division of a straight line into given number of equal parts –Drawing interior and exterior
tangents to two circles of given radii and centre distance-Drawing tangent arc of given
radius to touch two lines inclined at given angle (acute, right and obtuse angles), Tangent
arc of given radius touching a circle or an arc and a given line, Tangent arcs of radius R,
touching two given circles internally and externally-Construction of any regular polygon by
general method for given side length, inscribing circle radius and describing/superscripting
circle radius - Involute, Cycloid, explanations as locus of a moving point, their engineering
application, viz., Gear tooth profile, screw threads, springs etc. – their construction
3.0 Projection of points, lines and planes and Solids (All in first quadrant only)
Classification of projections, Observer, Object, Projectors, Projection, Reference Planes,
Reference Line, Various angles of projections –Differences between first angle and third
angle projections
Projections of points -Projections of straight line –(a) Parallel to both the planes,
(b)Perpendicular to one of the planes and (c) Inclined to one plane and parallel to other
planes-Projections of regular planes-(a) Plane parallel to one of the reference planes, (b)
Plane perpendicular to HP and inclined to VP and vice versa- Projections of regular solids-
(a) Axis perpendicular to one of the planes, (b) Axis parallel to VP and inclined to HP and
vice versa.
4.0 Sectional Views
Need for drawing sectional views – what is a sectional view - Hatching – Section of regular
solids inclined to one plane and parallel to other plane
5.0 Orthographic Projections
Meaning of orthographic projection - Using a viewing box and a model – Number of views
obtained on the six faces of the box, - Legible sketches of only 3 views for describing object -
Concept of front view, top view, and side view sketching these views for a number of
engineering objects - Explanation of first angle projection. – Positioning of three views in
First angle projection -Projection of points as a means of locating the corners of the surfaces
of an object – Use of meter line in drawing a third view when other two views are given -
77
Method of representing hidden lines -Selection of minimum number of views to describe an
object fully.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Engineering Graphics by P I Varghese – ( McGraw-hill)

2 Engineering Drawing by Basant Agarwal & C.M Agarwal - ( McGraw-hill)
3 Engineering Drawing by N.D.Bhatt.
4 T.S.M. & S.S.M on “ Technical Drawing” prepared by T.T.T.I., Madras.
5 SP-46-1998 – Bureau of Indian Standards.
Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be Covered

Unit Test – I From 1.1 to 2.3
Unit Test – II From 3.1 to 3.5
Unit Test – III From 4.1 to 5.2
78
Total
No of Marks Marks
Course Code Course title no of
periods/week for FA for SA
periods
CM-108 Programming in C Lab 06 180 40 60
No. of
S No Chapter/ Unit Title COs Mapped
Periods
1. Fundamentals and Input / Output 15 CO1,CO2

statements
2. Control statements 45 CO1,CO2,CO4
3. Arrays, structures and unions 60 CO1,CO2,,CO3,CO4
4. User defined functions, storage classes, 60 CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4,CO5

pointers, files and macros
Total 180
1. Edit, compile and debug execution of C-Programs

2. Learn the syntax of all the statements, keywords, user defied identifiers
and usage of writing statements in C-Program.
3. Evaluate all the expressions using different primary types of data, derived
COURSE OBJECTIVES
data, operators and with their precedence,
4. Write C-programs using I/O statements, decision making statements.
5. Write structured and modular C-programs
6. Write C-programs on text files using different file operating modes and
file pointers.
7. Write C-programs to implement dynamic memory allocation using
pointer concepts
79
CO No COURSE OUTCOMES
CO 1 CM-108.1 Perform Edit, compile and debug and execution of C-Programs
CO 2 CM-108.2 Develop programs using different predefined functions, keywords, user

defined identifiers
CO 3 CM-108.3 Write different expressions using available C-operators and valid data
supported by C-language
CO 4 CM-108.4 Develop C-programs using control statements, array’s, structures,
unions, files
CO 5 CM-108.5 Develop C-programs using user defined functions and recursion
CO 6 CM-108.6 Develop C-programs to implement dynamic memory concept
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
CM- 2 2 1 2
108.1
CM- 2 3 2 2 2
108.2
CM- 2 2 3
108.3
CM- 2 3 2 3 3 2 2 2
108.4
CM- 2 2 3 2 2 2
108.5
CM- 2 3 2 2
108.6
Average 2 2.5 3 2 2.4 2.5 2 2 2 2.2
80
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
Fundamentals and Input/Output statements
1. Exercise on structure of C Program

2. Exercise on Keywords and identifiers
3. Exercise on constants and variables
4. Execution of simple C program
5. Exercise on operators and expressions
6. Exercise on special operators
7. Exercise on input and output of characters
8. Exercise on formatted input and output
9. Exercise on escape sequence characters
Control statements
(Note: Every statement must be repeated with at least 5 different applications)

10. Exercise on simple if statement
11. Exercise on if..else statement
12. Exercise on if..else..if ladder statement
13. Exercise on switch statement
14. Exercise on conditional operator comparing with if-else statement
15. Exercise on while statement
16. Exercise on for statement
17. Exercise on do. While statement
Arrays, structures and unions
18. Exercise on one dimensional arrays
19. Exercise on two dimensional arrays
20. Exercise on strings
21. Exercise on structure
22. Exercise on union
23. Exercise on array of structures
User defined functions, storage classes, pointers, files,and macros
24. Exercise on user-defined function

25. Exercise on storage classes
26. Exercise on parameter passing techniques
27. Exercise on recursion
28. Exercise on pointers
29. Exercise on text files
30. Exercise on macros
81
The competencies and key competencies to be achieved by the student
S.N Name of the Objectives Key Competencies

o. experiment
1 Exercise on For a given C program, Identify different building block in a C

structure of C identify the different program
program building blocks
2 Exercise on For a given C program Identify different keywords

Keywords and identify the keywords and Check whether the keywords are in
identifiers identifiers lowercase
Differentiate identifiers and keywords
3 Exercise on For a given C program Identify the constants
constants and identify the constants and Identify the variables
variables variables Declare variables with proper names
Know the assignment of values to variables
4 Execution of simple Execute a simple C Acquaint with C program editing
C program program Compile the program
Rectify the syntactical errors
Execute the program
5 Exercise on Write a C program that Identify different arithmetic operators
operators and uses different arithmetic Build arithmetic expressions
expressions operators Identify the priorities of operators
Evaluate arithmetic expression
Compile the program
Execute the program
Check the output for its correctness
6 Exercise on special Write a C program that Identify different special operators
operators uses special operators Build expressions using special operators
Compile the program
Execute the program
7 Exercise on input Write a C program for Know the use of getchar() function
and output of reading and writing Know the use of putchar() function
characters characters Compile the program
Execute the program
Check whether the correct output is printed
for the given input
8 Exercise on Write a C program using Know the use of format string for different
formatted input formatted input and types of data in scanf() function
and output formatted output Know the use of format string for different
types of data in printf() function
Check whether the data is read in correct
format
82
Check whether the data is printed in correct
format
9 Exercise on Escape Write a C program using Know the use of Escape sequence
Sequence Escape Sequence characters
Characters Characters Use the Escape sequence characters
Check whether the data is read in correct
format
Rectify the syntax errors
Check the output for correctness
10 Exercise on simple Write a C program using Build a relational expression
if statement simple if statement Use the if statement for decision making
11 Exercise on if..else Write a C program using Build a relational expression
statement if..else statement Use the if..else statement for decision
making
12 Exercise on else..if Write a C program using Use else..if ladder statements with correct
ladder statement else..if ladder statement syntax
Debug logical errors
13 Exercise on switch Write a C program using Use switch statement with correct syntax
statement switch statement Identify the differences between switch and
else..if ladder
14 Exercise on Write a C program using ( ? Build the three expressions for conditional
conditional : ) conditional operator operator
operator Use conditional operator with correct
syntax
Differentiate conditional operator and
if..else statement
15 Exercise on while Write a C program using Build the termination condition for looping
statement while statement Use while statement with correct syntax
Check whether correct number of
iterations are performed by the while loop
16 Exercise on for Write a C program using Build the initial, increment and termination
statement for statement conditions for looping
Use for statement with correct syntax
83
iterations are performed by the for loop
Differentiate for and while statements
17 Exercise on Write a C program using do Build the termination condition for looping
do..while statement Use do statement with correct syntax
statement Rectify the syntax errors
iterations are performed by the while loop
Differentiate do..while,while and for
statements
18 Exercise on one Write a C program to Create a one dimensional array with correct
dimensional arrays create and access one syntax
dimensional array Store elements into array
Read elements from array
Validate boundary conditions while
accessing elements of array
Check for the correctness of output for the
given input
19 Exercise on two Write a C program to Create a two dimensional array with correct
dimensional arrays create and access two syntax
dimensional array Store elements into array
Read elements from array
Validate boundary conditions while
accessing elements of array
given input
20 Exercise on strings Write a C program for Declare and initialize string variables
reading and writing strings Read strings from keyboard
Print strings to screen
21 Exercise on Write a C program using Define a structure with correct syntax
structure structure Identify different members of a structure
Declare a structure variable
Access different members of structure
Observe the size of the structure
given input
22 Exercise on union Write a C program using Define a union with correct syntax
union Identify different members of a union
Declare a union variable
Access different members of union
Observe the size of the union
84
given input
23 Exercise on array of Write a C program to Define a structure with correct syntax
structures create an array of Identify different members of a structure
structures and store and Declare a structure variable
Create an array of structure
retrieve data from that
Access individual element of the array of
array structure
Access different members of structure
given input
24 Exercise on user- Write a C program to Identify the different parts of function
defined function define and call user- declaration
defined functions Define function with correct syntax
Classify functions based on it parameters
and return types
Identify parameters passed
Identify parameter passing method used
Identify return value
given input
25 Exercise on storage Write a C program using Know the use of different storage classes
classes different storage classes Use the different storage classes
Check whether the scope of variables is
correctly defined or not.
26 Exercise on Write a C program using Know the use of parameter passing
parameter passing parameter passing Use the different parameter passing
techniques techniques techniques
Check whether the parameters passed
correctly or not.
27 Exercise on Write a C program using Identify where recursive call is made in the
recursion recursion function
Validate the termination condition
given input
28 Exercise on Write a C program using Declare pointer variable
pointers pointer data type Initialize pointer variable
Access a variable through its pointer
85
given input
29 Exercise on text Write a C program to Define a file pointer
files create a text file, write data Use the various modes of file opening
into it and read data from Close the file
Write text into file
it
Read text from file
given input
30 Exercise on macros Write a C program using Know the need of macros
macros Use the macros/preprocessor directives
given input
86
ENGINEERINGPHYSICS LABORATORY
PRACTICALS
SUBJECT SUBJECT CODE TOTAL PERIODS NUMBER PERIODS

PER WEEK
PHYSICS LAB COMMON -109 45 03
(1) To provide strong practical knowledge of Physics to serve as a tool

for various device applications in Engineering.
Course objectives (2) To enhance scientific skills of the students by incorporating new
experiments so as to enrich the technical expertise of the students as
required for industries.
Improving accuracy in various measurements; understanding

CO1 the nature of the forces keeping the body in equilibrium.
Estimating the acceleration caused by the gravity of earth;

CO2 Practical study of the concepts of refraction of light at
curved/plane surface
Understanding the pressure of the gas as function of its
COURSE CO3 volume; study of the combined magnetic field of the earth and
OUTCOMES an artificial magnet to estimate its pole strength; Estimating
the velocity of sound in air through resonance phenomenon.
Applying Kirch off’s laws to evaluate the specific resistance of a
CO4 wire; Study of exchange of heat from system to surrounding by
graphical analysis; Conversion of light to micro currents as
potential engineering application.
CO-PO MAPPING
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7
CO1 3 2 2 2 2 1 2
CO2 3 1 1 1 1 1
CO3 3 2 1
CO4 3 2 2 1 2
87
ENGINEERING PHYSICS LAB
C - 23 curriculum - Common to all Branches)
Subject Title : Engineering Physics Lab

Subject Code : Common-109
Periods per week : 03
Total periods per year : 45
TIMESCHEDULE
S.No List of experiments No.of
Periods
1. Vernier calipers 03
2. Micrometer (Screw gauge) 03
3. Verification of Lami’s theorem using concurrent forces 03
4. Determination of g using simple pendulum 03
5. Focal length and power of convex lens 03
6. Refractive index of solid using travelling microscope 03
7. Verification of Boyle’s law using Quill tube 03
8 Determination of pole strength of the bar magnet through magnetic field lines 03
9 Resonance apparatus – Determination of velocity of sound in air 03
Experiments for demonstration
10 Meter bridge – Determination of resistance and specific resistance of a wire 03
11 Verification of Newton’s law of cooling 03
Photo electric cell – Study of its characteristics 03

12
Revision 06
Test 03
Total: 45
88
Objectives:
1.0 Practice with Vernier calipers to determine the volumes of a cylinder and sphere.
2.0 Practice with Screw gauge to determine thickness of a glass plate and cross sectional area
of a wire.
3.0 Verify the Lami’s theorem using concurrent forces.
4.0 Determine the value of acceleration due to gravity (g) using Simple Pendulum. To verify
the result from l-T2 graph.
5.0 Calculate the Focal length and focal power of convex lens using distant object method,
and U-V method. To verify the result from U-V graph and 1 / U – 1 / V graph methods.
6.0 Determine the refractive index of a solid using travelling microscope
7.0 Verify the Boyle’s law using Quill tube. To draw a graph between P and 1/l.
8.0 Determination of magnetic pole strength of a bar magnet by drawing magnetic lines of
force and locating null points (either N - N or N - S method)
9.0 Determine the velocity of sound in air at room temperature and its value at zero degree
Centigrade using resonance apparatus.
10.0 Determine the resistance and specific resistance of material of a wire using Meter Bridge
11.0 To verify the Newton’s law of cooling.
12..0 To study the characteristics of photo electric cell.
89
Course Outcomes
No.of
S.No List of experiments COs
Periods
1. Vernier calipers 03
CO1
2. Micrometer (Screw gauge) 03
3. Verification of Lami’s theorem using concurrent forces 03
4. Determination of g using simple pendulum 03
CO2
5. Focal length and power of convex lens 03
6. Refractive index of solid using travelling microscope 03

7. Verification of Boyle’s law using Quill tube 03
CO3
Determination of pole strength of the bar magnet through magnetic
8 03
field lines
9 Resonance apparatus – Determination of velocity of sound in air 03
Meter bridge – Determination of resistance and specific resistance of
10 03 CO4
a wire
11 Verification of Newton’s law of cooling 03
12 Photo electric cell – Study of its characteristics 03
Scheme of Valuation for End Practical Examination :
Activity Marks
For writing, Apparatus, formulae, least count (if applicable) 5
Procedure & precautions 5

Drawing Tables 3
Readings, calculations, graph (if applicable), reporting the findings 12
Viva-voce 5
Total marks 30
90
CHEMISTRYLABORATORY
(C-23 curriculum common to all Branches)
Subjec t Title : Chemistry Laboratory

Subject Code : Common -110
Periods per week : 03
Total periods per year : 45
Operate and practice volumetric apparatus and preparation of

CO1
standard solution.
CO2 Evaluate and judge the neutralization point in acid base titration.
CO3 Evaluate the end point of reduction and oxidation reaction.
Judge the stable end point of complex formation, stable
CO4
precipitation.
Judge operate and demonstrate and perform precise operations
CO5
with instrument for investigation of water pollution parameters.
PO- CO mapping
Course code
Chemistry Laboratory No. of periods : 45
Common-
No. of CO’s:5
110
CO periods
Mapped with CO addressing Level Remarks
POs %
No. PO in Col. 1,2,3
No. 1
CO1,CO2,CO3, >40%
PO1 12 26.66 2
CO4,CO5 Level 3 (highly
CO1,CO2,CO3, addressed)
PO2 9 20 1
CO4,CO5
PO3 25% to 40%
CO1,CO2,CO3, Level2 (moderately
PO4 12 26.66 2
CO4,CO5 addressed)
CO2,CO3,
PO5 12 26.66 2
CO4,CO5 5% to 25%
PO6 Level1 (Low addressed)
PO7 < 5%(not addressed)
91
COs-POs mapping strength (as per given table)
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 2 3 1 1
CO2 2 3 2 2 1
CO3 2 3 2 2 1
CO4 2 3 2 2 1
CO5 2 3 2 2 1
3=strongly mapped2= moderately mapped1= slightly mapped
Note: The gaps in CO and PO mapping will be achieved by one or more appropriate activities
from the following: i) Seminars ii) Tutorials iii) Guest Lectures iv) Assignments v) Quiz
competitions
vi) Industrial visit vii) Tech Fest viii) Mini project ix) Group discussions x) Virtual classes
xi) Library visit for e-books
TIME SCHEDULE
No. of Mapped
S.No Name of the Experiment
Periods with COs
a) Recognition of chemical substances and solutions used in the
1. laboratory by senses. 03 CO1
b) Familiarization of methods for Volumetric analysis.
2. Preparation of Std.Na2CO3solution and making solutions of different dilutions 03 CO1
3. Estimation of HCl solution using Std.Na2CO3solution. 03 CO2
4. Estimation of NaOH using Std. HCl solution. 03 CO2
5. Determination of acidity of water sample. 03 CO2
6. Determination of alkalinity of water sample. 03 CO2
7. Estimation of Mohr’sSalt usingStd.KMnO4. Solution. 03 CO3
8. Estimation of Ferrous ion by using Std. K2Cr2O7solution. 03 CO3
9. Determination of total hardness of water sample using Std. EDTA solution. 03 CO4
10. Estimation of Chlorides present in water sample by using Std. AgNO3 solution. 03 CO4
11. Estimation of Dissolved Oxygen(D.O) in water sample by using Std. hypo solution. 03 CO5
12. Determination of Ph using pH meter.. 03 CO5
13. Determination of conductivity of water and adjusting ionic strength required 03 CO5
.
14. Determination of turbidity of water. 03 CO5
15. Estimation of total solids present in water sample. 03 CO5
Total: 45
92
Objectives:
1.0 To identify the chemical compounds and solutions by senses.

Practice volumetric measurements (using pipettes, measuring jars, volumetric flask, burettes)
and gravimetric measurements (using different types of balances), making dilutions, etc.
2.0 Practice making standard solutions with pre weighed salts and to make solutions of desired
dilutions using appropriate techniques.
3.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std. Na2CO3solutionfor
estimation of HCl.
4.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std. HCl solution for estimation of
NaOH.
5.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the acidity of given
samples of water (One ground water and one surface / tap water, and rain water if
available).
6.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the alkalinity of given
samples of water (One ground water and one surface / tap water).
7.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std.KMnO4 solution for
estimation of Mohr’sSalt.
8.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures and using Std.K2Cr2O7 solution for
estimation of Ferrous ion.
9.0 Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the total hardness of given
samples of water (One ground water and one surface / tap water) using Std. EDTA solution.
10. Conduct titrations adopting standard procedures to determine the chlorides present in the
given samples of water and wastewater (One ground water and one surface / tap water).
using Std. AgNO3 solution.
11. Conduct the test using titrometric / electrometric method to determine. Dissolved Oxygen
(D.O) in the given water samples (One sample from closed container and one from open
container / tap water) by Std. hypo solution.
12. Conduct the test on given samples of water / solutions (like soft drinks, sewage, etc.) to
determine their pH using standard pH meter.
13. Conduct the test on given samples of water / solutions.
a) to determine conductivity .
b) to adjust the ionic strength of the sample to the desired value.
14. Conduct the test on given samples of solutions (coloured and non-coloured) to determine
their turbidity in NTU.
15. Determine the total solids present in given samples of water (One ground water and one
surface / tap water).
93
Competencies and Key competencies to be achieved by the student
Name of the Experiment
Competencies Key competencies
(No of Periods)
Recognition of chemical
substances and solutions. -
Familiarization of --
methods for Volumetric
analysis.
Weighing the salt to the
Weighing the salt to the
accuracy of 0.01 mg.
accuracy of .01 mg.
Preparation of Std.Na2CO3 Measuring the water with
Measuring the water with
solution and making volumetric flask, measuring
volumetric flask, measuring jar,
solutions of different jar, volumetric pipette and
volumetric pipette and
dilutions. (03) graduated pipette.
graduated pipette.
Making appropriate
Making appropriate dilutions.
dilutions.
Estimation of HCl solution
using Std.
Na2CO3solution. (03) Cleaning the glassware and
Estimation of Na OH using rinsing with appropriate
Std. HCl solution. (03) solutions.
Making standard solutions.
Determination of acidity
Measuring accurately the
of water sample. (03)
standard solutions and titrants.
Determination of Filling the burette with titrant.
alkalinity of water sample. Fixing the burette to the stand.
(03) Making standard solutions.
Estimation of Mohr’s Salt Effectively Controlling the flow
of the titrant. Measuring accurately the
usingStd.KMnO4solution.
Identifying the end point. standard solutions and
(03)
Making accurate observations. titrants.
Estimation of Ferrous ion Effectively Controlling the
Calculating the results.
by using flow of the titrant.
Std.K2Cr2O7.solution (03) Identifying the end point.
Determination of total Making accurate
hardness of water using observations.
Std. EDTA solution. (03)
Estimation of Chlorides
present in water sample
using Std. AgNO3 solution
(03)
Estimation of Dissolved
Oxygen (D.O) in water
sample (By titration
method) (03)
Determination of Ph using Familiarize with Prepare standard
pH meter. (03) instrument. solutions / buffers, etc.
94
Determination of Choose appropriate ‘Mode’ Standardize the
conductivity of water and / ‘Unit’. instrument with
adjusting ionic strength to Prepare standard solutions appropriate standard
required level. (03) / buffers, etc. solutions.
Standardize the instrument Plot the standard
Determination of turbidity with appropriate standard curve.
of water. (03) solutions. Make measurements
Plot the standard curve. accurately.
Measuring the accurate Measuring the accurate
volume and weight of volume and weight of
Estimation of total solids sample. sample.
present in water sample. Filtering and air drying Filtering and air drying
(03) without losing any filtrate. without losing any
Accurately weighing the filtrate.
filter paper, crucible and Accurately weighing
filtrate. the filter paper,
SCHEME OF VALUATION
A) Writing Chemicals, apparatus, principle and procedure . 5M

B) Demonstrated competencies. 20M
Making standard solutions.
Measuring accurately the standard solutions and titrants.
Effectively controlling the flow of the titrant.
Identifying the end point.
Making accurate observations.
C) Viva-voce. 5M
Total 30M
95
No. of Total No. of
CM-
Computer
111(common
Fundamentals 3 90 40 60
to all
Lab
branches)
Time schedule:
No. of sessions
Chapter
Chapter/Unit Title each of 3 periods No. of Periods
No.
duration
1. Computer hardware Basics 2 6
2. Windows Operating System 2 6
3. MS Word 8 24
4. MS Excel 7 21
5. MS PowerPoint 5 15
6 Adobe Photoshop 6 18
Total periods 30 90
Chapter Chapter/Unit Title No. of Periods CO’s Mapped

No.
1. Computer hardware Basics 6 CO1
2. Windows Operating System 6 CO1
3. MS Word 24 CO2
4. MS Excel 21 CO3
5. MS PowerPoint 15 CO4
6 Adobe Photoshop 18 CO5
Total periods 90
96
i) To know Hardware Basics
ii) To familiarize operating systems

COURSE
OBJECTIVES iii) To use MS Office effectively to enable to students use these skills in future
courses
iv) To use Adobe Photoshop in image editing.
At the end of the course students will be able to
CO1 CM-111.1 Identify hardware and software components
CO2 CM-111.2 Prepare documents with given specifications using word

processing software
Course CO3 CM-111.3 Use Spread sheet software to make calculation and to
Outcomes draw various graphs / charts.
CO4 CM-111.4 Use Power point software to develop effective

presentation for a given theme or topic.
CO5 CM-111.5 Edit digital or scanned images using Photoshop
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
CM-111.1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
CM-111.2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
CM-111.3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
CM-111.4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
CM-111.5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
Average 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
97
Learning Outcomes:
I. Computer Hardware Basics
1. a).To Familiarize with Computer system and hardware connections

b).To Start and Shut down Computer correctly
c).To check the software details of the computer
2. To check the hardware present in your computer
II. Windows’s operating system
3. To Explore Windows Desktop

4. Working with Files and Folders
5. Windows Accessories: Calculator – Notepad – WordPad – MS Paint
III. Practice with MS-WORD
6. To familiarize with Ribbon layout of MS Word

Home – Insert- Page layout – References – Review- View.
7. To practice Word Processing Basics
8. To practice Formatting techniques
9. To insert a table of required number of rows and columns
10. To insert Objects, Clipart and Hyperlinks
11. To use Mail Merge feature of MS Word
12. To use Equations and symbols features
IV. Practice with MS-EXCEL

13. To familiarize with MS-EXCEL layout
14. To access and enter data in the cells
15. To edit a spread sheet- Copy, Cut, Paste, and selecting Cells
16. To use built in functions and Formatting Data
17. To create Excel Functions, Filling Cells
18. To enter a Formula for automatic calculations
19. To sort and filter data in table.
20. To present data using Excel Graphs and Charts.
21. To develop lab reports of respective discipline.
22. To format a Worksheet in Excel, Page Setup and Print
V. Practice with MS-POWERPOINT

23. To familiarize with Ribbon layout features of PowerPoint 2007.
24. To create a simple PowerPoint Presentation
25. To set up a Master Slide in PowerPoint
26. To insert Text and Objects
27. To insert a Flow Charts
28. To insert a Table
29. To insert a Charts/Graphs
30. To insert video and audio
31. To practice Animating text and objects
98
32. To Review presentation
VI. Practice with Adobe Photoshop
33. To familiarize withstandard toolbox

34. To edit a photograph.
35. To insert Borders around photograph.
36. To change Background of a Photograph.
37. To change colors of Photograph.
38. To prepare a cover page for the book in your subject area.
39. To adjust the brightness and contrast of the picture so that it gives an elegant look.
40. To type a word and apply the shadow emboss effects.
Key competencies:
Expt No Name of Experiment Competencies Key competencies
1 (a). To familiarize with a. Identify the parts of a Connect cables to

Computer system and computer system: i). CPU ii). external hardware and
hardware connections Mother Board iii) Monitor iv) operate the computer
CD/DVD Drive v) Power
Switch vi) Start Button vii)
Reset Button
b. Identify and connect various
peripherals
c. Identify and connect the
cables used with computer
system
d. Identify various ports on CPU
and connect Keyboard &
Mouse
1 (b). To Start and Shut down a. Log in using the password a. Login and logout as
Computer correctly b. Start and shut down the per the standard
computer procedure
c. Use Mouse and Key Board b. Operate mouse
&Key Board
1 (c). To Explore Windows a. Familiarize with Start Menu, a. Access application
Desktop Taskbar, Icons and Shortcuts programs using
b. Access application programs Start menu
using Start menu, Task b. Use taskbar and
manager Task manager
c. Use Help support
2. To check the software a. Find the details of Operating Access the

details of the computer System being used properties of
b. Find the details of Service computer and find
Pack installed
the details
99
3. To check the hardware a. Find the CPU name and a. Access device
present in your clock speed manager and find
computer b. Find the details of RAM and the details
Hard disk present b. Type /Navigate the
c. Access Device manager using correct path and
Control Panel and check the Select icon related
status of devices like mouse to the details
and key board required
d. Use My Computer to check
the details of Hard drives and
partitions
e. Use the Taskbar
4. Working with Files and a. Create folders and organizing a. Create files and
Folders files in different folders folders Rename ,
b. Use copy / paste move arrange and search
commands to organize files for the required
and folders folder/file
c. Arrange icons – name wise, b. Restore deleted

size, type, Modified files from Recycle
Working with Files and d. Search a file or folder and bin
Folders find its path
e. Create shortcut to files and
Continued.... folders (in other folders) on
Desktop
f. Familiarize with the use of
My Documents
g. Familiarize with the use of
Recycle Bin
To use Windows a. Familiarize with the use of a. Use windows
5. Accessories: Calculator accessories and
b. Access Calculator using Run select correct text
Calculator – Notepad – command editor based on the
WordPad – MS Paint c. Create Text Files using situation.
Notepad and WordPad and
observe the difference in file b. Use MS pain to
size create /Edit pictures
d. Use MS paint and create and save in the
.jpeg, .bmp files using MS required format.
Paint
6. To familiarize with a. Create/Open a document a. Create a Document
Ribbon layout of MS b. Use Save and Save as and name
word. – Home – Insert- features appropriately and
c. Work on two Word save
page layout-
documents simultaneously b. Set paper size and
References-Review- d. Choose correct Paper size print options
View and Printing options
100
7. To practice Word a. Typing text a. Use key board and
Processing Basics b. Keyboard usage mouse to enter/edit
c. Use mouse (Left click / Right text in the
click / Scroll) document.
d. Use Keyboard shortcuts b. Use shortcuts
e. Use Find and Replace c. Use spell check/
features in MS- word Grammar features
f. Use Undo and Redo Features for auto corrections.
g. Use spell check to correct
Spellings and Grammar
8. To practice Formatting a. Formatting Text a. Format Text and

techniques b. Formatting Paragraphs paragraphs and use
c. Setting Tabs various text styles.
d. Formatting Pages b. Use bullets and
e. The Styles of Word numbers to create
f. Insert bullets and numbers lists
g. Themes and Templates c. Use Templates
h. Insert page numbers, header /Themes
and footer d. Insert page
numbers date,
headers and footers
9. To insert a table of a. Edit the table by adding the a. Insert table in the
required number of fields – Deleting rows and word document and
rows and columns columns –inserting sub table edit
–marking borders. Merging b. Use sort option for
and splitting of cells in a arranging data.
Table
b. Changing the background
colour of the table
c. Use table design tools
d. Use auto fit – fixed row/
column height/length – Even
distribution of rows /
columns features
e. Convert Text to table and
Table to Text
f. Use Sort feature of the Table
to arrange data in
ascending/descending order
10. To Insert objects, clipart a. Create a 2-page document. a. Insert hyperlinks

and Hyperlinks &Insert hyperlinks and t &Bookmarks
Bookmarks. b. Create organization
b. Create an organization chart charts/flow charts
c. Practice examples like
preparing an Examination
schedule notice with a
hyperlink to Exam schedule
table.
101
11. To Use Mail merge a. Use mail merge to prepare Use Mail merge
feature of MS Word individually addressed letters feature
b. Use mail merge to print
envelopes.
12. To use Equations and a. Explore various symbols Enter Mathematical
symbols features. available in MS Word symbols and
b. Insert a symbol in the text Equations in the word
c. Insert mathematical
document
equations in the document
13. To Practice with MS- a. Open /create an MS Excel a. Familiarize with
spread sheet and familiarize excel layout and
EXCEL
with MS Excel 2007 layout use
like MS office Button- b. Use various
b. Use Quick Access Toolbar- features available
Title Bar- Ribbon- in toolbar
Worksheets- Formula Bar-
Status Bar
14. To access and Enter a. Move Around a Worksheets- a. Access and select
data in the cells Quick access -Select Cells the required cells
b. Enter Data-Edit a Cell-Wrap by various
Text-Delete a Cell Entry-Save addressing
a File-Close Excel methods
b. Enter data and edit
15. To edit spread sheet a. Insert and Delete Columns Format the excel
Copy, Cut, Paste, and and Rows-Create Borders- sheet
selecting cells Merge and Center
b. Add Background Color-
Change the Font, Font Size,
and Font Color
c. Format text with Bold,
Italicize, and Underline-Work
with Long Text-Change a
Column's Width
16. To use built in functions a. Perform Mathematical Use built in functions
and Formatting Data Calculations verify -AutoSum in Excel
b. Perform Automatic
Calculations-Align Cell Entries
17. To enter a Formula for a. Enter formula
automatic calculations b. Use Cell References in
Formulae Enter formula for
c. Use Automatic updating automatic
function of Excel Formulae calculations
d. Use Mathematical Operators
in Formulae
e. Use Excel Error Message and
Help
18. To Create Excel a. Use Reference Operators a. Create Excel sheets

b. Work with sum, Sum if , involving cross
102
Functions, Filling Cells Count and Count If references and
Functions equations
c. Fill Cells Automatically b. Use the advanced
functions for
conditional
calculations
19. To sort and filter data in a. Sort data in multiple columns a. Refine the data in a
table b. Sort data in a row worksheet and
c. Sort data using Custom order keep it organized
d. Filter data in work sheet b. Narrow a
worksheet by
selecting specific
choice
20. To Practice Excel Graphs a. Produce an Excel Pie Chart a. Use data in Excel
and Charts b. Produce sheet to Create
c. Excel Column Chart technical charts and
graphs Produce
Excel Line Graph
b. Produce a
Pictograph in Excel
21. To develop lab reports Create Lab reports using MS a. Insert Practical
of respective discipline Word and Excel subject name in
Header and page
numbers in Footer
22. To format a Worksheet a. Shade alternate rows of data a. Format Excel sheet
in Excel, page setup and b. Add currency and percentage b. Insert headers
print symbols &footers and print
c. Change height of a row and
width of a column
d. Change data alignment
e. Insert Headers and Footers
f. Set Print Options and Print
23. To familiarize with Use various options in Access required
Ribbon layout &features PowerPoint options in the tool bar
of PowerPoint 2007.
a. Home
b. Insert
c. Design
d. Animation
e. Slideshow
f. View
g. Review
24. To create a simple a. Insert a New Slide into a. Create simple
PowerPoint PowerPoint PowerPoint
Presentation b. Change the Title of a presentation with
PowerPoint Slide photographs/ClipAr
c. PowerPoint Bullets t and text boxes
103
d. Add an Image to a b. Use bullets option
PowerPoint Slide
e. Add a Textbox to a
PowerPoint slide
25. To Set up a Master Slide a. Create a PowerPoint Design a. Setup Master slide
in PowerPoint and add Template and format
notes b. Modify themes b. Add notes
c. Switch between Slide master
view and Normal view
d. Format a Design Template
Master Slide
e. Add a Title Slide to a Design
Template
f. The Slide Show Footer in
PowerPoint
f. Add Notes to a PowerPoint
Presentation
26. To Insert Text and a. Insert Text and objects Insert Text and
Objects b. Set Indents and line spacing Objects
c. Insert pictures/ clipart
d. Format pictures Use 3d features
e. Insert shapes and word art
f. Use 3d features
g. Arrange objects
27. To insert a Flow Chart / a. Create a Flow Chart in Create organizational
Organizational Charts PowerPoint charts and flow charts
b. Group and Ungroup Shapes using smart art
c. Use smart art
28. To insert a Table a. PowerPoint Tables Insert tables and
b. Format the Table Data format
c. Change Table Background
d. Format Series Legend
29. To insert a a. Create 3D Bar Graphs in Create charts and Bar
Charts/Graphs PowerPoint graphs, Pie Charts and
b. Work with the PowerPoint format.
Datasheet
c. Format a PowerPoint Chart
Axis
d. Format the Bars of a Chart
e. Create PowerPoint Pie Charts
f. Use Pie Chart Segments
g. Create 2D Bar Charts in
PowerPoint
h. Format the 2D Chart
e. Format a Chart Background
30. To Insert audio & video, a. Insert sounds in the slide and a. Insert Sounds and
Hyperlinks in a slide hide the audio symbol Video in
b. Adjust the volume in the appropriate
Add narration to the settings format.
c. Insert video file in the format b. Add narration to
104
slide supported by PowerPoint in the slide
a slide c. Use hyperlinks to
d. Use automatic and on click switch to
options different slides
e. Add narration to the slide and files
f. Insert Hyperlinks
31. To Practice Animation a. Apply transitions to slides Add animation effects

effects b. To explore and practice
special animation effects like
Entrance, Emphasis, Motion
Paths &Exit
32. Reviewing presentation a. Checking spelling and a. Use Spell check
grammar and Grammar
b. Previewing presentation feature
c. Set up slide show b. Setup slide show
d. Set up resolution c. Add timing to the
e. Exercise with Rehearse slides
Timings feature in d. Setup automatic
PowerPoint slide show
f. Use PowerPoint Pen Tool
during slide show
g. Saving
h. Printing presentation
(a) Slides
(b) Hand-out
33 To familiarize a. Open Adobe Photoshop Open a photograph
withstandard toolbox b. Use various tools such as and save it in
i. The Layer Tool Photoshop
ii. The Color& Swatches Tool
iii. Custom Fonts & The Text
Tool
iv. Brush Tool
v. The Select Tool
vi. The Move Tool
vii. The Zoom Tool
viii. The Eraser
ix. The Crop Tool
x. The Fill Tool
34 To edit a photograph a. Use the Crop tool a. Able to edit image
b. Trim edges by using
c. Change the shape and size of corresponding tools.
a photo
d. Remove the part of
photograph including
graphics and text
35 To insert Borders a. Start with a single Able to create a
around photograph background layer border or frame
b. Bring the background forward around an image to
c. Enlarge the canvas
105
d. Create a border color add visual interest to
e. Send the border color to the a photo
back
f. Experiment with different
colors
36 To change Background a. open the foreground and Able to swap
of a Photograph background image background elements
b. Use different selection tools using the Select and
to paint over the image
Mask tool and layers.
c. Copy background image and
paste it on the foreground.
d. Resize and/or drag the
background image to
reposition.
e. In the Layers panel, drag the
background layer below the
foreground image layer.
37 To change colors of a. Change colors using:
i) Color Replacement tool Able to control color
Photograph
ii) Hue/Saturation saturation
adjustment layer tool
38 To prepare a cover page a. opena file with height 500

for the book in subject and width 400 for the cover Able to prepare cover
page for the book
area page.
b. apply two different colors to

work area by dividing it into
two parts using Rectangle
tool.
c. Copy any picture and place it
on work area→ resize it using
free transform tool.
d. Type text and apply color and
style
e. Apply effects using blended
options
39 To adjust the brightness a. opena file
Able to control
and contrast of picture b. Go to image→ adjustments→
brightness/contrast.
to give an elegant look Brightness/Contrast.
f. adjust the brightness and

contrast
g. save the image
40 To type a word and a. opena file Able to apply shadow
apply the shadow b. Select the text tool and type emboss effects
emboss effects text.
c. Select the typed text go to
layer→ layer style→ blended
106
option→ drop shadow, inner
shadow, bevel and emboss→
contour→ satin→ gradient
overlay
d. Save the image.

Unit test-1 From 1 to 8
107
III SEMESTER
108
CURRICULUM-2023 (III Semester)
Instruction
Total Scheme Of Examinations
Periods/Week
Sub Name of the Periods
Code Subject Per End
Theory Practicals Semester Exam
(hrs) Marks Marks
Marks
THEORY SUBJECTS
CM- Mathematics –
4 60 3 20 100
301 II 80
CM- Digital
5 - 75 3 20 100
302 Electronics 80
CM- Operating 100

4 - 60 3 20 80
303 systems
CM- Data Structures 100

5 - 75 3 20 80
304 through C
CM- 100
DBMS 5 - 75 3 20 80
305
PRACTICAL SUBJECTS
Digital
CM-
Electronics Lab 3 45 3
306 - 40 60 100
CM- Data Structures 90

- 6 3 40 60 100
307 Through C Lab
CM-
DBMS Lab - 4 60 3 40 60 100
308
CM- Multimedia
- 3 45 3 40 60 100
309 Lab
ACTIVITIES - 3 45
Total 23 19 630 260 640 900

301 common with all branches 302 common with DIOT
304 common with DCAI, DCBD,DWD
305 common with DAIML,DCAI,DCCN,DWD,DIOT
307 common with DCAI, DCBD,DWD&308 common with DAIML,DCAI,DCCN,DW&309 common
with DCCN
109
C-23 CM-301
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS-II
(Common to CM/AIML/AMG/AMT/CAI/CCB/CCN/WD)
No. of Total No. of

Course Marks for FA Marks for SA
Course Title Periods/week periods
Code
Engineering
CM - 301 4 60 20 80
Mathematics-II
Chapter.
Unit Title No. of periods COs mapped
No
1 Integral Calculus 22 CO1
2 Differential Equations 8 CO2
3 Graph Theory and Probability 17 CO3
4 Statistics 13 CO4
Total Periods 60
Course Objectives
(iii) To understand the concepts of indefinite integration and definite
integration.
(iv) To understand the formation of differential equations and learn
various methods of solving first order differential equations.
(v) To comprehend the concepts of graph theory and probability.
(vi) To learn different statistical techniques for data analysis.
Integrate various functions using different methods and evaluate

CO1
definite integrals.
Obtain differential equations and solve differential equations of
CO2
first order and first degree.
Course Outcomes
Able to define the basic concepts of Graph Theory and use the
CO3
principles of Probability in computational systems.
CO4 Apply various statistical techniques for data analysis.
C-23 WD-301
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – II
Learning Outcomes
Unit-I
Integral Calculus
C.O. 1 Integrate various functions using different methods and evaluate definite integrals.
L.O.1.1. Explain the concept of Indefinite integral as an anti-derivative.
110
³
1.2. State the indefinite integral of standard functions and properties of (u v) dx and
³ k u dx where u, v are functions of x and k is constant.

1.3. Solve problems involving standard functions using these properties.
1.4. Evaluate integrals involving simple functions of the following type by the method of
substitution.
i) ³ f (ax b) dx,where f(x) is in standard form.
ii)
³ ( ff c(x))
(x)
n f c(x) dx, n z 1
iii) ³ f (x)
dx
iv) ³ [ f (g(x))] gc(x)dx

1.5. Find the integrals of tan x, cot x, sec x and cosec x w.r.t. x.
1.6. Evaluate the Standard integrals of the functions of the type
1 1 1
i) , , 2 2
a x a x x a
2 2 2 2
1 1 1
ii) , ,
a2 x2 a x
2 2
x a2
2
iii) a2 x2 , a2 x2 , x2 a2
1.7. Evaluate integrals using decomposition method.
1.8. Solve problems using integration by parts.
1.9. Use Bernoulli’s rule for evaluating the integrals of the form ³u.vdx .
1.10. Evaluate the integrals of the form e x [ f (x) f c(x)]dx

³
1.11. State the fundamental theorem of integral calculus
1.12. Explain the concept of definite integral.
1.13. Solve simple problems on definite integrals.
1.14. State various properties of definite integrals.
1.15. Evaluate simple problems on definite integrals using these properties.
Unit -II
Differential Equations
C.O. 2 Obtain differential equations and solve differential equations of first order and first degree.
L.O.2.1. Define a differential equation, its order and degree
2.2 Find order and degree of a given differential equation.
2.3 Form a differential equation by eliminating arbitrary constants.
2.4 Solve the first order and first degree differential equations by variables separable method.
dy
2.5 Solve linear differential equation of the form Py Q , where P and Q are functions of x
dx
only or constants.
Syllabus for Unit test-I completed
Unit-III
Graph Theory and Probability
111
C.O. 3 Able to define the basic concepts of Graph Theory and use the principles of Probability in
computational systems.
L.O. 3.1 Define a graph.
3.2 Explain the terminology of a graph, vertices, edges, parallel edges, adjacent vertices, self-
loops.
3.3 State the significance of Graph Theory in Computer Science applications.
3.4 Explain incidence and degree of a graph.
3.5 Explain the relation between degree and edges of a graph.
3.6 Explain various types of graphs, null graph, trivial graph, simple graph, multigraph, directed
graph, non-directed graph and cyclic graph.
3.7 Define walk, path, circuit, length of a graph, distance between two vertices.
3.8 Explain the formation of adjacency matrix of a graph.
3.9 Recall the basic probability principles.
3.10 Define permutations and combinations with examples.
3.11 State addition theorem of probability for two mutually exclusive and exhaustive events.
3.12 Solve simple problems on addition theorem.
3.13 Explain conditional event and conditional probability.
3.14 Solve simple problems on conditional probability.
3.15 Explain dependent, independent events and state multiplication theorem.
3.16 Solve simple problems on multiplication theorem.
3.17 Explain the concept of priori and posteriori probabilities.
3.18 State Bayes’ theorem and solve simple problems.
Unit-IV
Statistics
C.O. 4 Apply various statistical techniques for data analysis.
L.O. 4.1 Recall the measures of central tendency.
4.2 Explain the significance of measures of dispersion to determine the degree of heterogeneity
of
the data.
4.3 Find the measures of dispersion, Range, Mean Deviation and Standard Deviation for
ungrouped data.
4.4 Explain the merits and demerits of these measures of dispersion
4.5 Explain bivariate data.
4.6 Explain the concept of covariance and correlation between two variables.
4.7 Calculate Pearson’s correlation coefficient between two variables.
4.8 Find Spearman’s rank correlation coefficient.
4.9 Explain predictor variables, outcome variables and simple linear regression.
4.10 Calculate the regression coefficients and regression equations with simple problems.
Syllabus for Unit test-II completed
C-23 CM-301
Engineering Mathematics – II
CO/PO – Mapping
CO1 3 2 2 2 3 2 2
112
CO2 3 2 2 2 3 2 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Avg. 3 2.5 2.5 2.5 3 2.5 2.5
3 =Strongly mapped (High), 2 = Moderately mapped (Medium), 1 = Slightly mapped (Low)
Note: The gaps in CO/PO mapping will be met with appropriate activities as follows:
For PO5: Appropriate quiz programmes may be conducted at intervals and duration as
decided by concerned faculty.
For PO6: Seminars on applications of mathematics in various engineering disciplines are to
be planned and conducted.
For PO7: Plan activities in such a way that students can visit the Library to refer standard
books on Mathematics and access the latest updates in reputed national and
international journals. Additionally, encourage them to attend seminars and learn
mathematical software tools.
C-23 CM-301
PO - CO – Mapping strength
CO periods addressing PO in
Mapped with CO Level
PO no column I Remarks
no (1,2 or 3)
Number %
CO1, CO2, 60
1 100% 3
CO3,CO4 (22+8+17+13) >40% Level 3
CO1, CO2, 38 Highly addressed
2 63% 3
CO3,CO4 (8+3+17+10)
CO1, CO2, 38 25% to 40%
3 63% 3
CO3,CO4 (8+3+17+10) Level 2
CO1, CO2, 38 Moderately
4 63% 3
CO3,CO4 (8+3+17+10) addressed
5
6 5% to 25% Level
7 1 Low addressed
CO1, CO2, 60
PSO 1 100% 3 <5% Not
CO3,CO4 (22+8+17+13)
CO1, CO2, 38 addressed
PSO 2 63% 3
CO3,CO4 (8+3+17+10)
CO1, CO2, 38
PSO 3 63% 3
CO3,CO4 (8+3+17+10)
95
113
C-23 CM-301
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – II
COURSE CONTENTS
Unit-I
Indefinite Integration:
1. Integration regarded as anti-derivative – Indefinite integrals of standard functions -
Properties of indefinite integrals - Integration by substitution or change of variable -
Integrals of tan x, cot x, sec x, cosec x.
Evaluation of integrals which are of the following forms:
1 1 1
i) , , 2 2
a x a x x a
2 2 2 2
1 1 1
ii) , ,
a2 x2 a2 x2 x2 a2
iii) a2 x2 , a2 x2 , x2 a2
Integration by decomposition of the integrand into simple rational, algebraic functions -
Integration by parts, Bernoulli’s rule and integrals of the form ³ex [f(x) + f c(x)] dx.
Definite integral-fundamental theorem of integral calculus, properties of definite
integrals,
evaluation of simple definite integrals.
Unit -II
Differential Equations:
2. Definition of a differential equation, order and degree of a differential equation,
formation of differential equations - Solutions of differential equations of first order and
first degree using variables separable method and linear differential equation of the type
dy
Py Q.
dx
Unit-III
Graph Theory and Probability
3. Definition of a graph, terminology of a graph, significance in computer science
applications - Incidence and degree, relationship between degree and edges - Various
types of graphs, null graph, trivial graph, simple graph, multigraph, directed graph, non-
directed graph and cyclic graph - Walk, path, circuit, length of a graph, distance between
two vertices - Formation of adjacency matrix.
Permutations and Combinations - Addition theorem of probability, conditional
probability, dependent and independent events with multiplication theorem - Priori and
posteriori probability, Baye’s theorem.
Unit III
Statistics
4. Measures of dispersion, range, mean deviation and standard deviation of ungrouped
data, merits and demerits - Bivariate data, correlation, Pearson’s correlation coefficient,
Spearman’s rank correlation coefficient - Predictor and outcome variables, simple linear
regression coefficients and regression equations.
Textbook:
114
Engineering Mathematics-II, a textbook for second year third semester diploma courses,
prepared & prescribed by SBTET, AP.
Reference Books:
1. B.S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers.
2. Schaum’s Outlines Differential Equations, Richard Bronson & Gabriel B. Costa
3. Trembley and Manohar, Discrete Mathematical Structures with Applications to Computer
Science, Tata-McGraw-Hill.
4. Narsing Deo, Graph Theory, PHI India.
5. Schaum's Outline: Introduction to Probability and Statistics, Seymour Lipschutz & John J.
Schiller.
C- 23 Engineering Mathematics – II
Subject Title : Engineering Mathematics – II

Subject Code : CM/AIML/AMG/AMT/CAI/CCB/CCN/WD-301
Periods/Week : 04
Periods/Semester : 60
TIME SCHEDULE
Chapter. Chapter/Unit title No. of Marks Short Essay COs

No Periods Allotted Type Type mapped
Unit – I: Integral Calculus
1 Indefinite integration 17 26 2 2 CO1
2 Definite integrals 5 16 2 1 CO1
Unit – II: Differential Equations
3 Introduction to 2 3 1 0 CO2
Differential
equations
4 Solutions of 6 10 0 1 CO2
Differential
equations of first
order
Unit – III: Graph Theory and Probability
5 Graph theory 5 6 2 0 CO3
6 Probability 12 26 2 2 CO3
Unit – IV : Statistics
6 Measures of Central 1 0 0 0 CO4
Tendency
7 Measures of 3 3 1 0 CO4
Dispersion
8 Correlation 4 10 0 1 CO4
9 Simple linear 5 10 0 1 CO4
regression
Total 60 110 10 8
Marks 30 80
115
C-23 CM-301
Unit Test Syllabus

Unit Test Syllabus
Unit Test-I From L.O 1.1 to L.O 2.5
Unit Test-II
From L.O 3.1 to L.O 4.10
116
Course
No. of Periods/ Total No. of Marks Marks for
Code Course Title
Weeks periods for FA SA
CM-302 Digital Electronics 5 75 20 80
Time Schedule
Chapter Chapter/Unit Title No.of No. of Short No. of CO’s
No. Periods Marks Answer Essay Type Mapped
Questions Questions
1. Number systems 15 16 2 1 CO1

2. Logic Gates ,Boolean
Algebra and basic 17 26 2 2 CO2
Combinational circuits
3. Flip-Flops 15 26 2 2 CO3
4. Counters and registers 17 26 2 2 CO4
5. Additional 11 16 2 1 CO5
Combinational circuits
Total 75 110 10 8
Course Upon completion of the course the student shall be able

Objectives i) To acquire the basic knowledge of digital logic levels and apply of
knowledge to understand digital logic circuits.
ii) To prepare students to perform the analysis and design of
various digital electronic circuits.
Course Outcomes

CO1 CM-302.1 Explain the structure of various number systems.
CO2 CM-302.2 Describe fundamental concepts and techniques used in

digital electronics, the switching algebra theorems and logic
gates and apply them to design logic circuits using K-Maps
CO3 CM-302.3 Explain operation of flip flops
CO4 CM-302.4 Design the counting circuits, Registers using flip flop
operations.
CO5 CM-302.5 Explain design and implement various sequential circuits,
combinational circuits and PLD
117
CO-PO/PSO Matrix:
CM-302.1 3 3 3 2 3 2 3
CM-302.2 3 3 3 2 1 1 3 2 2
CM-302.3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 3
CM-302.4 2 2 3 1 2 1 2 2 1
CM-302.5 2 2 3 1 1 1 2 3 1
Average 2.4 2.2 2.6 2.25 1.3 1.3 1.3 2.4 1.75 2
Learning Outcomes:
1.0 Number systems
1.1 List the various number systems used in digital Computer.
1.2 Explain Decimal number system
1.3 Explain Binary number system
1.4 Explain octal number system
1.5 Explain Hexadecimal number system
1.6 Convert decimal number to other base conversion.
1.6.1 Decimal to Binary
1.6.2 Decimal to Octal
1.6.3 Decimal to Hexadecimal
1.7 Convert binary number to other base conversion.
1.7.1 Binary to Decimal
1.7.2 Binary to octal
1.7.3 Binary to Hexadecimal
1.8 Convert octal number to other base conversion.
1.8.1 Octal to Decimal
1.8.2 Octal to Binary
1.8.3 Octal to Hexadecimal
1.9 Convert hexadecimal other base conversion.
1.9.1 Hexadecimal to Decimal
1.9.2 Hexadecimal to Binary
1.9.3 Hexadecimal to Octal
1.10 Binary numbers representation.
1.10.1 Define Binary numbers representation.
1.10.2 List the types of Binary numbers representation.
1.10.3 Explain Unsigned binary number representation.
1.10.4 Explain Signed binary number representation.
1.11 Signed binary arithmetic.
1.11.1 Illustrate addition of two signed binary numbers.
118
1.11.2 Illustrate subtraction of two signed binary numbers.
1.11.3 Illustrate binary multiplication.
1.11.4 Illustrate Binary division.
1.12 Binary coded decimal (BCD) coding scheme.
1.12.1 Define Binary coded decimal (BCD) coding scheme.
1.12.2 List the types of Binary coded decimal (BCD)
1.12.3 Draw and explain 8421 code.
1.12.4 Draw and explain 2421 code.
1.12.5 Draw and explain 8 4-2-1 code.
1.12.6 Draw and explain Excess 3 code.
1.13 Character representation
1.13.1 List character representation codes
1.13.2 Explain the ASCII coding scheme.
1.13.3 Explain the EBCDIC coding scheme.
2.0 Boolean algebra , Logic gates and Basic Combinational Circuits
2.1 Boolean algebra
2.1.1 Define Boolean algebra
2.1.2 Explain AND, OR, NOT operations with truth tables.
2.1.3 Explain the working of EX-OR and EX-NOR operations with truth tables.
2.1.4 List the different postulates in Boolean algebra.
2.1.5 State De-Morgan‘s theorems.
2.1.6 Prove De-Morgan‘s theorems using truth tables.
2.1.7 Apply De-Morgan‘s theorems and other postulates of Boolean algebra to simplify
the given Boolean expression.
2.1.8 Generate Boolean expression for given truth table.
2.1.9 Using Sum-Of-Products(SOP) method
2.1.10 Using Product-Of-Sums(POS)method
2.1.11 Use K – map to simplify Boolean expression (up to 4 variables).
2.1.12 Using Two variable K-Map
2.1.13 Using Three variable K-Map
2.1.14 Using Four variable K-Map
2.2 Logic Gates
2.2.1 Define Logic gate
2.2.2 List basic gates
2.2.3 Define OR gate
2.2.4 Explain OR gate with logic symbol and truth table.
2.2.5 Define AND gate
2.2.6 Explain AND gate with logic symbol and truth table.
2.2.7 Define NOT gate
2.2.8 Explain NOT gate with logic symbol and truth table.
2.2.9 What is universal gate? List universal gates
2.2.10 Define NOR gate
2.2.11 Explain NOR gate with logic symbol and truth table.
2.2.12 Define NAND gate
2.2.13 Explain NAND gate with logic symbol and truth table.
2.2.14 Define EX-OR and EX-NOR gates
2.2.15 Explain the working of EX-OR and EX-NOR gates with truth tables.
2.2.16 Implement AND, OR, NOT gates using NAND gates only
2.2.17 Implement AND, OR, NOT gates using NOR gate only.
2.3 Basic Combinational Circuits
2.3.1 Define the Half Adder.
2.3.2 Explain the function of Half Adder.
2.3.3 Draw Half-Adder circuit using an exclusive OR and an AND gate.
2.3.4 Draw a Half–Adder using only NAND gates or only NOR gates.
119
2.3.5 Define the Full Adder.
2.3.6 Explain the function of Full Adder.
2.3.7 Construct Full Adder using two Half-Adder and an OR gate
2.3.8 Define the parallel Adder
2.3.9 Explain the function of parallel Adder using logic symbol.
2.3.10 Draw and explain 4-bit parallel adder using full adders.
2.3.11 Draw and explain 4-bit parallel adder/ 2‘s complement subtractor circuit.
2.3.12 Explain the working of a serial adder with a block diagram.
2.3.13 List the advantage and disadvantages of a serial adder
2.3.14 List the advantage and disadvantages of a parallel adder.
2.3.15 Distinguish between serial adder and parallel adder.
2.3.16 Explain the operation of a digital comparator circuit for two 4-bitwords.
2.4 Flip-flops
2.5 List the details of different logic families.
2.6 Define positive and negative logic levels.
2.7 Define Flip flop
2.8 Draw and explain the basic principle of operation of a Flip-flop.
2.9 Define Latch.
2.10 Explain the working of a NAND latch circuit with truth table and Timing diagram
2.11 Explain the working of a NOR latch circuit with truth table and Timing diagram
2.12 Differentiate between Latch and Flip-flop.
2.13 Define Triggering
2.14 List the types of Triggering
2.15 Draw and explain the concept of edge triggering(positive, negative)
2.16 Draw and explain the concept of level triggering. (positive, negative)
2.17 Explain with block diagram, waveforms and truth tables the working of RS Flip-flop.
2.18 Explain with block diagram, waveforms and truth tables the working of RS T Flip-flop.
2.19 Explain with block diagram, waveforms and truth tables the working of D Flip-flop.
2.20 Explain with block diagram, waveforms and truth tables the working of JK Flip-flop.
2.21 Explain with block diagram, waveforms and truth tables the working of T Flip-flop.
2.22 Distinguish between synchronous and asynchronous inputs of a flip- flop
2.23 State the need for a Master-Slave flip-flop.
2.24 Explain the working of a Master-Slave flip-flop using suitable circuit diagram and truth table.
3.0 Counters and Registers
3.1 Counters
3.1.1 Define Counter
3.1.2 List the types of counters.
3.1.3 Define terms Synchronous counter, Asynchronous counter
3.1.4 Distinguish between asynchronous and synchronous counters.
3.1.5 Draw and explain module-8 ripple counter circuit diagram with waveforms and
truth tables
3.1.6 Draw and explain module-16 ripple counter circuit diagram with waveforms and
truth tables
3.1.7 Draw and explain module-10 (decade) Asynchronous counter circuit diagram with
waveforms and truth tables
3.1.8 Draw and explain module-8 synchronous counter circuit diagram with
3.1.9 Draw and explain module-16 synchronous counter circuit diagram with
3.1.10 List the draw backs of ripple counters.
3.1.11 List the advantages of synchronous counters
3.1.12 Explain the operation of a up/down counter circuit diagram with waveforms and
truth tables
120
3.1.13 State the need of Programmable counter
3.1.14 Draw and explain Programmable counter
3.1.15 Draw and explain the operation of a 4-bit ring counter.
3.1.16 List the applications of counter.
3.2 Register
3.2.1 Define Register
3.2.2 State the need of Register.
3.2.3 List the methods of data transfer in register.
3.2.4 List the types of Registers
3.2.5 Define Serial in – Serial out register
3.2.6 Define Serial in – Parallel out register
3.2.7 Define Parallel in – Serial out register
3.2.8 Define Parallel in – Parallel out register
3.2.9 Explain the working of serial in – serial out register with circuit diagram.
3.2.10 Explain the working of serial in – parallel out register with circuit diagram.
3.2.11 Explain the working of shift left Register with circuit diagram.
3.2.12 Explain the working of shift right registers with circuit diagram.
3.2.13 Explain the working of universal shift register.
3.2.14 Draw and explain the use of shift register as memory.
4.0 Additional Combinational Circuits
4.1 Define data selector and state its importance.
4.2 Define data distributor and state its importance.
4.3 Define the terms Multiplexer and De multiplexer
4.4 Draw and explain the operation of a Multiplexer circuit diagram with truth table.
4.5 Draw and explain the operation of De multiplexer circuit diagram with truth table.
4.6 List the applications of Multiplexers.
4.7 List the applications of De multiplexers.
4.8 Define the terms Encoder and Decoder.
4.9 Draw and explain the operation of a 4 to 10 line decoder circuit diagram with truth table.
4.10 Draw and explain the operation of a 8 to 3 encoder circuit diagram with truth table.
4.11 List applications of Decoders.
4.12 List applications of Encoders.
4.13 Define Programmable logic Devices.
4.14 List the types of Programmable logic Devices.
4.15 Draw and explain the Programmable Logic Array(PLA).
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Number Systems: Number Systems, Decimal, Binary, Hexadecimal and Octal codes,
Conversion from one number system to another number system, Binary numbers
representation ,Binary Arithmetic, BCD ,Character representation-ASCII and EBCDIC
code for characters.
2. Boolean algebra and Logical Gates :AND, OR, NAND, NOT, NOR & EX-OR gates. Logical
definitions – Symbols – truth tables. Boolean theorems, Boolean simplifications of
Boolean expressions, Using De-Morgan‘s theorems, Formation and implementation of
Logic expressions, Karnaugh‘s mapping, Applications involving developing of
combinational logic circuits. Half-Adder, Full-adder, Subtractor series – Parallel Binary
adder – Parallel adder/sub tractor circuits.
3. FLIP FLOP: Different logic families, Basic principles of Flip Flop operation ( with help of
wave form & truth tables ) of RS,T,D,JK and Master Slave JK flip flop concept of Edge
Triggering and Level Triggering , Synchronous and Asynchronous device.
4. Counters: Basic Asynchronous, Synchronous Binary and Decade counter and the
Ripple counter, their use Decade counter, Up and Down counters, Ring counter
121
Registers : Shift registers, Serial, Parallel register, Serial-in Parallel out, Parallel-in–
serial out devices, Universal shift registers, Applications.
5. Additional Combinational Circuits: Multiplexers, De multiplexers and Encoders,
Decoders-operation of a multiplexer with a circuit diagram - operation of a de
multiplexer with a circuit diagram - applications of multiplexers and de multiplexers-
operation of a 4 to 10 line decoder - operation of an 8 to 3 line encoder –
programmable logic array.
REFERENCE:
1. Digital principles and applications … Malvino and Leach
2. Digital Electronics…. Bignell – Thomson
3. Modern Digital Electronics…. R.P. JAIN
4. https://www.javatpoint.com/number-system-in-digital-electronics
5. https://www.electronics-tutorials.ws/binary/binary-coded-decimal.html
6. https://www.javatpoint.com/excess-3-code-in-digital-electronics
7. https://www.tutorialspoint.com/conversion-of-binary-to-gray-code
8. https://atozmath.com/example/NumToBaseConv.aspx?he=e&b1=111&b2=2

122
No. of Total No. of
Operating
CM-303 4 60 20 80
Systems
Time Schedule
No. of No. of
Questions Questions
1. Introduction to Operating 16 2 1 CO1

12
system
2. Process management 12 16 2 1 CO2
3. Synchronization & Deadlocks 12 26 2 2 CO3
4. Memory management 12 26 2 2 CO4
5. Disk scheduling and File

12 26 2 2 CO5
management
Total 60 110 10 8
Course Objectives i) To know about the basics of Operating Systems

ii) To familiarize with process management, Scheduling algorithms,
Synchronization and deadlock techniques
iii) To understand various Memory management techniques
iv)To familiarize with File management
CO1 CM-303.1 Explain basic concepts of Operating System

CO2 CM-303.2 Explain process scheduling algorithm
Course CO3 CM-303.3 Describe Semaphores, synchronization and Deadlock handling
techniques
Out comes
CO4 CM-303.4 Use memory management techniques and page replacement
algorithms
123
CO5 CM-303.5 Use Disk scheduling algorithms and File allocation methods
with respect to different operating systems
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
CM-303.1 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 2 2
CM-303.2 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 2 2 2
CM-303.3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 2 3
CM-303.4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CM-303.5 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3
Average 3 3 2.5 2 2.5 3 3 3 2.5 2.5
Learning Outcomes:
1.0 Introduction to operating systems

1.1 Define an operating system
1.2 Discuss history of operating system
1.3 Discuss about various types of operating systems
1.4 Distinguish spooling and buffering
1.5 Explain the concepts multiprogramming and timesharing
1.6 Differentiate between distributed and real time systems
1.7 Describe multiprocessor systems
1.8 Describe the operating system components
1.9 Discuss operating system services
1.10 Define system call with an example
1.11 List and explain different types of system calls
1.12 Define single user, multi user operating system structure
2.0 Process management
2.1 Define process and process control block
2.2 Explain process state diagram
2.3 Describe process creation and termination
2.4 Discuss the relation between processes
2.5 Define Thread and describe multithreading
2.6 Explain scheduling concepts
2.7 Describe scheduling queues and schedulers
2.8 Explain CPU scheduling and scheduling criteria
2.9 Explain various scheduling algorithms
2.9.1 FCFS
2.9.2 SJF
2.9.3 Round Robin
124
2.9.4 Priority
2.9.5 Multilevel Scheduling
3.0 Synchronization & Deadlocks

3.1 Describe semaphores
3.2 Explain inter process communication
3.3 Define Deadlock
3.4 State the necessary conditions for arising deadlocks
3.5 State various techniques for deadlock prevention
3.6 Discuss Deadlock avoidance and detection
3.7 Describe the process of recovering from deadlock
4.0 Memory management
4.1 Describe briefly address binding, dynamic loading, dynamic linking
4.2 Define overlays
4.3 Describe briefly on swapping
4.4 Explain single partition allocation
4.5 Explain multiple partition allocation
4.6 Explain the concept of fragmentation
4.7 Explain paging concept
4.8 Explain how logical address is translated into physical address
4.9 Explain segmentation and segmentation with paging
4.10 Define virtual memory techniques
4.11 Describe demand paging
4.12 Describe page replacement
4.13 Discuss on page replacement algorithms
4.13.1 FIFO
4.13.2 LRU
4.13.3 Optimal
4.14 Explain the concept of thrashing
4.15 Explain working set model and page fault frequency
5.0 Disk scheduling and File management
5.1 List out various disk performance parameters
5.2 Disk scheduling policies
5.2.1 FIFO
5.2.2 SSTF
5.2.3 SCAN
5.3 Define file management
5.4 List and explain various file operations
5.5 List and explain various access methods
5.6 List and explain various allocation methods
5.6 List and explain directory structure
5.7 Explain disk organization and structure
125
COURSE CONTENT
1.0 Introduction to operating systems

Operating System –Evolution of operating system-Types of Operating Systems - Multi
Programming and Time Sharing - Distributed and Real time Systems - spooling and buffering -
Multi processor systems-Components of Operating Systems - operating System Services -
system Calls - single User and Multi user operating System Structure.
2. Process management
Processes - Sequential Processes - Process State Diagram - Process Control Block - Process
Creation and Termination - Relations between Processes - Threads and Multi Threading -
Scheduling Concepts • Schedulers - CPU scheduling and Scheduling criteria - scheduling
algorithms.
3. Synchronization & Deadlocks
Inter Process Communications - semaphores – monitors
Deadlocks - principal of deadlock - deadlock prevention - deadlock detection - deadlock
avoidance.
4. Memory management
Address binding -Dynamic Loading- dynamic linking-overlays-swapping• memory allocation-
fragmentation-paging-segmentation- segmentation with paging-
Benefits of virtual memory - virtual memory techniques - demand paging - page
replacements - page replacement algorithms – thrashing.
5. Disk scheduling and File management
Disk performance parameters - Disk scheduling policies – Introduction to file systems - File
management-File Operations - Access methods - Directory structure organization - File
Protection.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Operating Systems -- Silber Schatz and Galvin

2. Operating Systems -- William Stallings, PHI
3. Operating Systems -- Dietel and Dietel
4. Operating Systems -- Dhamdhere (TMH)
5. Advanced Operating Systems -- Tanenbaum

126
No. of Total No. of
Data
CM-304 Structures 5 75 20 80
Through C
Time Schedule
No. of No. of
Questions Questions
1. Introduction to Data
Structures Sequential Storage 23 16 2 1 CO1
Representation
2. Linked Storage 16 2 1 CO2
15
Representation-Linked Lists
3. Linear Data Structures-Stacks 12 26 2 2 CO3
4. Linear Data Structures- 26 2 2 CO4

10
Queues
5. Non Linear Data Structures- 26 2 2 CO5
15
Trees
Total 75 110 10 8

i) To know the various types of Data Structures
Course Objectives ii) To familiarize with the representation of Data Structures
iii)To use various Data structures in organizing data
iv)To reinforce theoretical concepts by writing relevant programs
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 CM-304.1 Illustrate various techniques of sorting and searching
CO2 CM-304.2 Explain the operations on Various Linked Lists
CO3 CM-304.3 Apply the operations of Stack.
CO4 CM-304.4 Explain the operations of different types of Queue.
127
CO5 CM-304.5 Apply Binary tree traversal techniques.
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
CM-304.1 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 2 2
CM-304.2 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 2 3 2
CM-304.3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 2
CM-304.4 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 2
CM-304.5 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 3
Average 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 2.5 3
Learning Outcomes:
1. Introduction to Data Structures

1.1 Understand various types of Data Structures
1.1.1. Define Data Structure and classify them
1.1.2. Explain Linear Data Structures
1.1.3. Describe Non-Linear Data Structures
1.1.4. Explain Data Types and Abstract Data Types
1.1.5. Explain about Space and Time Complexities
1.2 Sequential Storage Representation
1.2.1 Various Sorting Techniques
1.2.1.1 Define Sorting
1.2.1.2 State the need of Sorting
1.2.1.3 List the methods of Sorting
1.2.1.4 Explain the following for Bubble Sort, Selection Sort, Insertion Sort, Quick Sort,
Merge Sort
1.2.1.4.1 Sorting technique,
1.2.1.4.2 Algorithm and complexity
1.2.1.4.3 Program
1.2.2 Various Searching Techniques
1.2.2.1 Define searching
1.2.2.2 State the need of searching
1.2.2.3 List two types of searching
1.2.2.4 Explain the following for Linear Search, Binary Search with Recursion and with-out
Recursion
1.2.2.4.1 Searching technique.
1.2.2.4.2 Algorithm and complexity
1.2.2.4.3 Program
128
2. Linked Storage Representation –Linked Lists
2.1 List the advantages & disadvantages of Linked Lists over Arrays
2.2 State the purpose of Dummy Header
2.3 Explain the following for Singly Linked List, Doubly Linked List
2.3.1. Structure
2.3.2. Creation
2.3.3. How to represent a node using ‘C’ Structure
2.3.4. Perform insertion, deletion, traverse and sort operations
2.3.5. Perform search and replace an element
2.3.6. C Program with all operations.
2.4 Singly circular list
2.4.1 Definition
2.4.2 Structure
2.4.3 Advantages of a Singly Circular Linked List over a Singly Linked List
2.4.4 The changes require in a singly linked list program to make it the Singly Circular List.
2.5 Doubly circular list
2.5.1 Definition
2.5.2 Structurer
2.5.3 Advantages of a Doubly Circular Linked List over a Doubly Linked List
2.5.4 The changes require in a Doubly Linked List program to make it the
Doubly Circular List.
3. Linear Data Structures-Stacks
3.1 Define Stack
3.2 Explain the push, pop and display operations of a Stack
3.3 Explain array implementation of a Stack with various operations.
3.4 Explain the program for Array implementation of a Stack with various operations.
3.5 Explain Linked List implementation of a Stack with various operations.
3.6 Explain the program for Linked List implementation of a Stack with various operations.
3.7 List the applications of Stacks
3.8 Convert Infix expression to Postfix expression
3.9 Explain the program for Conversion of Infix expression to Postfix expression
3.10 Evaluate Postfix expression
3.11 Explain the program for Evaluating Post fix expression
4. Linear Data Structures-Queues
4.1 Define Queue
4.2 Explain the insertion, deletion and display operations on Queues
4.3 Explain array implementation of a Queue with various operations.
4.4 Explain the program for Array implementation of a Queue with various operations.
4.5 Explain Linked List implementation of a Queue with various operations.
4.6 Explain the program for Linked List implementation of a Queue with various operations.
4.7 Know about Circular Queues
4.8 Explain array implementation of a Circular Queue with various operations
4.9 Explain the program for Array implementation of a Circular Queue with various operations
4.10 Explain Linked List implementation of a Circular Queue with various operations.
129
4.11 Explain the program for Linked List implementation of a Circular Queue with various
operations.
4.12 List the application of Queues
4.13 Know about Priority Queues
5. Non Linear Data Structures-Trees

5.1 Define a Tree
5.2 State importance of various terminologies related to Tree:
5.2.1 Root, Edge, Parent, Child, Siblings, Leaf, Internal nodes, Degree, Level, Height,
Depth, Path, Sub tree, Forest.
5.3 Define Binary Tree
5.4 Differences between General Tree and Binary Tree.
5.5 Conversion of General Trees to Binary Trees
5.6 Explain the linear representation and linked list representation of a Binary Tree
5.7 Define Binary Search Tree
5.8 Differences between Binary Search Tree and Binary Tree
5.9 Perform various traversals on Binary Search Trees
5.10 Construct a Binary Tree using In-order and Preorder Traversals
5.11 Construct a Binary Tree using In-order and Post-order Traversals
5.12 Know the importance of Binary Search Trees over General Trees
5.13 Perform insertion, deletion, search and various traversal operations on a Binary Search
Tree.
5.14 Explain the program of Binary Search Tree with all operations.
5.15 List the Applications of trees
COURSE CONTENT
1. Introduction to Data Structures

Data structures – Linear &non linear, data types and abstract data types, algorithm analysis
for time and space requirements.
Sequential Storage Representation – Sorting - Introduction to different sorting techniques –
Bubble, Selection, Insertion, Quick & Merge. Searching – Introduction to different searching
techniques – Linear and Binary.
2. Linear data structures-Linked Lists
Linked Lists – Types - Singly Linked Lists – Create, insert, delete, sort, search and replace
an element in a linked list – - Doubly Linked Lists – Create, insert, delete, sort, search and
replace an element in a linked list – Define terms Singly circular and doubly circular linked
lists
3. Linear data structures-Stacks
Stacks- Implementation of stacks, application of stacks, converting infix to postfix expression
and postfix expression evaluation.
4. Linear data structures-Queues
Queues–Implementation of queues- Application of queues- know about Circular queues, and
Priority queue.
5. Non Linear data structures-Trees
Trees- Trees- Trees Terminology–Binary trees –Representation – Linear and Linked list
representation-Binary Search Tree-various operations-Tree traversals-Tree Conversions&
Applications
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Data Structures: A Pseudocode Approach with C - Gilberg / Forouzan
130
2. Data Structures using ‘C’ - Tanenbaumlangsam and Augonstein(PHI).
3. Data structures through C - Yashwanth Kanetkar
4. An Introduction to data structures with applications - Tremblay & Sorenson

131
No. of Total No. of
CM-305 DBMS 5 75 20 80
Time Schedule
No. of No. of
Questions Questions
1. Concepts of DBMS & RDBMS 18 29 3 2 CO1

2. Concepts of SQL 22 26 2 2 CO2
3. Basics of PL/ SQL 15 26 2 2 CO3
4. Advance PL/SQL 10 16 2 1 CO4
5. Concepts of No SQL & Mongo 10 1 1 CO5
DB. 13
Total 75 110 10 8
i) To know the fundamentals of DBMS

Course Objectives ii) To familiarize insert, retrieve, update, delete data in database
iii) To familiarize programming skills for insert, retrieve, update, delete
data in database
Course outcome:
CO1 CM-305.1 Describe fundamentals, types and Overall structure of DBMS
CO2 CM-305.2 Apply SQL commands to create, retrieve, update, delete data from
the Relational data bases.
CO3 CM-305.3 Describe PL/SQL programming constructs, control statements and
sub programs.
CO4 CM-305.4 Apply cursors, triggers and Exception handling concepts
CO5 CM-305.5 Use NOSQL database concepts and MongoDB data base concepts
in designing database Schema.
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
CM-305.1 3 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 3 1
CM-305.2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 1 2
CM-305.3 3 2 2 2 1 3 2 2 3 1
C2M-3 05.4
2 1 32 3 2 2 32 13 3 3 3
CM-305.5 3 1 3 1 3 3 2 2 2 3
Average 2.4 2.2 2.6 2 2.2 3 2.8 2 2 2
132
Learning Outcomes:
1.0 Concepts of DBMS &RDBMS

1.1 Define Database Management System(DBMS)
1.2 List the advantages of DBMS
1.3 Explain Database Abstraction, Data Independence
1.4 Define Instances and schemas
1.5 Explain Data Models.
1.6 Define Database languages DDL, DML, TCL
1.7 Explain Database Administrator, Users and Database System Architecture with diagram.
1.8 Define Entity, Entity sets, Relationship, Relationship sets, Super Key , Candidate Key and
Primary Key, Foreign Key
1.9 Explain Mapping Cardinalities.
1.10 List the symbols used in ER model.
1.11 Know The Entity-Relationship Model.
1.12 Reduce the ER-diagrams to tables
1.13 Explain Generalization, Specialization & Aggregation.
1.14 Explain Functional Dependencies, Normalizations– 1 NF, 2 NF and 3NF
2.0 Concepts of SQL
2.1 Explain SQL and benefits of SQL.
2.2 Describe about Embedded SQL and Lexical conventions
2.3 Describe Naming of the Objects and parts and how to refer them.
2.4 Explain literals & different data types like character, number, long, date, raw and long raw
etc.
2.5 Illustrate the comments within SQL Statement
2.6 Explain SQL Operators
2.7 Describe Data Definition Language commands CREATE, ALTER and DROP.
2.8 Explain integrity constraints through creating a table and altering table.
2.9 Describe Data Manipulation Language commands INSERT, UPDATE and DELETE
2.10 Explain SELECT statement with WHERE, ORDER BY, GROUP BY and HAVING clauses with
examples
2.11 List and explain single row (Number, character, date and conversion) functions
2.12 List and Explain group functions
2.13 Explain Transaction Control Commands COMMIT, SAVEPOINT, ROLLBACK, GRANT, and
REVOKE.
2.14 Explain Sub queries with examples
2.15 Explain Joins (Equi Join, Non-Equi Joins, Inner Join, Outer Join, cross join and Self join) with
syntax and examples.
3.0 PL/SQL
3.1 Explain PL/SQL Block structure.
3.2 List the features of PL/SQL
3.3 Explain the data types of PL/SQL
3.4 Declaration of variables
3.5 Explain PL/SQL tables and user defined records.
3.6 Explain Input / Output statements
3.7 Explain decision making statements and illustrate
3.8 Explain looping statements and illustrate
3.9 Define procedure and function
3.10 Describe the advantages of subprograms.
3.11 Explain handling procedures and functions with example programs.
3.12 Explain the parameter modes in PL/SQL with examples (in , out and in out)
133
4.0 Advanced PL/SQL
4.1 Define cursor.
4.2 Classify cursors
4.3 Explain implicit cursor with example
4.4 Explain explicit cursors with example
4.5 Define trigger
4.6 List Advantages of triggers
4.7 Explain database triggers.
5.0 Concepts of No SQL & Mongo DB.
5.1 No SQL
5.1.1 List features of NOSQL
5.1.2 Compare RDBMS and No SQL
5.1.3 List the Advantages and Disadvantages of No SQL
5.1.4 Know about the ACID and BASE system.
5.1.5 Compare ACID and BASE properties
5.1.6 No SQL
5.1.6.1 Key-value stores,
5.1.6.2 Column-oriented,
5.1.6.3 Graph oriented Databases
5.1.6.4 Document oriented Databases.
5.2 Mongo DB
5.2.1 What is Mongo DB
5.2.2 List the advantages of Mongo DB
5.2.3 Explain the Creation, Dropping, Creation of Collection
5.2.4 Dropping of Collection of Database in Mongo DB
5.2.5 Explain the Data types of Mongo DB.
5.2.6 Explain Inserting Document, Query Document, Update Document, Deleting Document &
Sorting Document.
COURSE CONTENT
1. Concepts of DBMS & RDBMS

Define DBMS –Purpose of DBMS - Data Abstraction – Data Models – Instances and
Schemas – Data Independence – Data Definition Language - Data Manipulation Language –
Database Administrator - Database Users – Database system Structure.
Entities – Relationships and Relationship sets – Mapping constraints – Entity – Relationship
Diagram – Super key , Candidate key and Primary key - Reducing E- R Diagrams to tables –
Generalization and Specialization – Aggregation – Functional Dependencies - Normal forms
1NF , 2 NF , 3 NF
2. Concepts of SQL
Benefits of SQL – Embedded SQL – Lexical conventions – Naming objects and parts –
Referring objects and parts – Literals – Text –Integer – Number – Data types – Character
data types – Number data type – Long data type –Raw and Long Raw data types –Pseudo
columns – comments within SQL statements – comments on schema objects.
Operators – Unary and Binary operators – Precedence- Arithmetic operators – character
operators – comparison operators – logical operators- set operators – other operators –
DDL Commands – Integrity Constraints – DML Commands - functions – single row functions
– numeric functions – character functions – date functions – conversion functions – other
functions- Group functions. Transaction control commands-Sub queries - Joins.
1
134
3. Basics of PL/SQL
Main features – architecture – advantage of PL/SQL – fundamentals – character set –
Lexical units – Data types – data type conversion – Declaration - scope and visibility –
assignments – expressions and comparisons – PL/SQL tables – user defined records.
Conditional control- IF statement – sequential control- GOTO and NULL statements. SQL
support – national language support – Remote Access
Advantages of subprograms – procedures – Functions RETURN statement – forward
declarations – actual versus formal parameters – positional and named notation -
parameter modes
4. Advanced PL/SQL
Cursors – Implicit cursor – Explicit cursor – Triggers – Advantages - creating trigger – raising
trigger -
5. No SQL & Basics of Mongo DB
Classification of Databases : RDBMS, OLAP, No SQL.-Introduction to No SQL- need for No
SQL – Comparison of RDBMS and No SQL- Advantages and Disadvantages of No SQL - BASE
system – ACID System – Comparison of ACID and BASE properties – Classification of No SQL
as Key-value stores, Column-oriented, Graph and Document oriented Databases
Introduction to Mongo DB - advantages of Mongo DB - applications of Mongo DB -
Installation of Mongo DB - Creation of Database - Dropping of Database - Creation of
Collection - Dropping of Collection - Data types of Mongo DB - different Commands of
Mongo DB - Inserting Document - Query Document - Updating Document – Deleting
Documents - Sorting Documents
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Database System Concepts -- Silber schatz, Henry F. Korth, S. Sudarshan

2. Oracle Database 11g :The Complete Reference - Kevin Loney
3. Understanding ORACLE -- James T. Peary & Joseph G. Laseer.
4. RDBMS with ORACLE -- Rolland.
5. ORACLE series books of ORACLE Press – TMH.
6. Starting out with Oracle – Covering Databases- John Day &CraigVan
7. PL/SQL, Developer Tools & DBA -- Slyke, Dreamtech
8. www.nosql-database.org
9. www.mongodb.org
10. https://www.guru99.com/nosql-tutorial.html#5

Unit test-2 From 3.6 to 5.2.5
135
No of Total no of Marks Marks
Course Code Course title
periods/week periods for FA for SA
Digital Electronics
CM-306 3 45 40 60
Lab
No. of
Periods
1 Logic Gates 10 CO1
CO2
2 Combinational logic circuits 10
3 Sequential Logic Circuits 15 CO3
CO4
4 Additional combination circuits 10
TOTAL 45
Course Objectives 1. To construct different combinational, sequential logic circuits

and obtain truth tables..
2. To simulate combinational and sequential logic circuits using
simulation software
3. To learn the practical importance of Digital Electronic Circuits.
COURSE OUTCOMES:
At the end of the course the student able to learn following
CO1 CM-306.1 Demonstrate the truth tables of logic gates
CO2 CM-306.2 Design combinational logic circuits and verify truth tables.
CO3 CM-306.3 Design Sequential logic circuits and verify with truth tables
CO4 CM-306.4 Construction of Additional combination circuits
136
CO-PO/PSO Matrix:
CM-306.1 2 2 3 3 1 2 1 2 3 1
CM-306.2 2 2 3 3 2 2 1 2 3 1
CM-306.3 2 2 3 3 2 2 1 2 3 1
CM-306.4 2 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 2
Average 2 2 3 3 1.75 2 1.25 2 3 1.25
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
Logic Gates
1. Identification of Digital ICs and noting down pin details from data sheets.
Identify the given digital ICs and draw the pin diagrams. (use TTL and CMOS
ICs of AND, OR, NOT, NAND, NOR and XOR gates with two and three inputs)
2. Verify the truth tables of AND, OR,NOT, NAND, NOR, XOR Gates.
3. Realize AND, OR, NOT, XOR gates using 2 input NAND and NOR Gates.
4. Verify Demorgan‘s Laws using given digital trainer kit and given TTL gates.
Combinational logic circuits
5. Implement Half adder circuit using TTL/CMOS gates, and verify the truth tables
6. Implement Full adder circuits using TTL/CMOS gates, and verify the truth tables
7. Verify parallel adder using Digital Trainer kit/simulator software
8. Verify the function of 4-bit magnitude comparator 7485 IC
Sequential Logic Circuits
9. Verify the truth tables RS, JK, T and D Flip-flops
10. Construct a ripple counter using JK-FFs and obtain its timing waveforms
11. Verify the function of 7490 as decade and modulus counter, obtain timing waveforms.
12. verify the function of up/down counter using 74190/ 74193, change the modulus of the
counter and verify its truth table
13. To construct and verify the function of mod-16 Synchronous counters
14. Verify the function of shift register (ICs like 7495, 74194 etc.)
Additional Combinational logic circuits

15. Verify the truth table of Multiplexer IC 74153
16. Verify the truth table of Demultiplexer ICIC 74138
17. Verify the truth table of BCD to 7 segment Decoder 7448 IC
18. Verify the Truth table of 74148 Encoder & 74138 Decoder IC
137
Time Schedule
Sno Experiment Name Allotted

Periods
1 Identification of Digital ICs and noting down pin details from data sheets.
Identify the given digital ICs and draw the pin diagrams. (Use TTL and
CMOS ICs of AND, OR, NOT, NAND, NOR and XOR gates with two and
three inputs).
2 Verify the truth tables of AND, OR, NOT, NAND, NOR, XOR Gates. 3
3 Realize AND, OR, NOT, XOR gates using 2 input NAND and NOR Gates. 3
4 Verify DE Morgan’s Laws using given digital trainer kit and given TTL gates 3
5 Implement Half adder circuit using TTL/CMOS gates, and verify the truth 3
tables.
6 Implement Full adder circuits using TTL/CMOS gates, and verify the truth
tables.
7 Verify parallel adder using simulator software. 3
8 Verify the function of 4-bit magnitude comparator 7485 IC. 3
9 Verify the truth tables RS, JK, T and D Flip-flops. 3

10 Construct a ripple counter using JK-FFs and obtain its timing waveforms. 3
11 Verify the function of 7490 as decade and modulus counter, obtain timing 3
waveforms.
12 verify the function of up/down counter using 74190/ 74193, change the 3
modulus of the counter and verify.
13 To construct and verify the function of mod-16 Synchronous counters. 3
14 Verify the function of shift register (ICs like 7495, 74194 etc.) 3
15 Verify the truth table of Multiplexer IC 74153 3
16 Verify the truth table of Demultiplexer ICIC 74138
17 Verify the truth table of BCD to 7 segment Decoder 7448 IC. 3
18 Verify the Truth table of 74148 Encoder & 74138 Decoder IC. 3
138
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS LAB OBJECTIVES AND KEY COMPETENCIES
SNO Name of the Objectives Key competencies

experiment
1 Identification of Identify various ICs and Familiarization of ICs
Digital their
ICs and noting down specification
pin details from data a. OR gate
sheets. Identify the b. AND gate
given digital ICs and c. NAND gate
draw the pin d. NOR gate
diagrams. e. XOR gate
(Use TTL and CMOS
ICs
of AND, OR, NOT,
NAND, NOR and XOR
gates with two and
three inputs).
2 Verify the truth tables Use various inputs and Verification of outputs as
of identify the per
AND, OR, NOT, NAND, outputs of various gates the designated inputs for
NOR, XOR Gates. a. OR gate various gates
b. AND gate Familiarization of ICs
c. NAND gate Usage of Bread boards
d. NOR gate Usage of connectors
e. XOR gate Usage of simulator software
(or) Digital trainer kits
3 Realize AND, OR, NOT, Use NAND and NOR gates Verification of outputs as
XOR gates using 2 (known as per
input the universal gate) the designated inputs for
NAND and NOR Gates. implementation combinatorial circuits.
of : Familiarization of IC
a. AND using NAND Usage of Bread boards
b. AND using NOR Usage of connectors
c. OR using NAND Usage of simulator software
d. OR using NOR (or) Digital trainer kits
e. NOT using NAND
f. NOT using NOR
4 Verify DE Morgan’s I. Make the connections Verification outputs as per
Laws according the
using given digital to the circuit diagram. designated inputs for
trainer II. Verify De-Morgan’s Demorgan’s theorem
kit and given TTL theorem for To verify POS and SOP
gates. two variables To verify truth tables.
139
III. Realize sum of Usage of Bread boards
product(SOP) and Usage of connectors
product of sum (POS) Usage of simulator
expressions software(or) Digital trainer kit
IV. Verify the truth table
for
different values.
5 Implement Half adder I. Design, realize and Verification of outputs as
circuit using verify the per
TTL/CMOS gates, and adder circuits using basic the designated inputs for Half
verify the truth gates and universal gates. adder circuits as per truth table
tables. II. Verify the truth table. Understand TTL , CMOS
families.
Usage of Bread boards
Usage of connectors
Usage of simulator software
6 Implement Full adder I. Design, realize and Verification of outputs as
circuits using verify the per
TTL/CMOS adder circuits using basic the designated inputs for Full
gates, and verify the gates adder circuits as per truth table
truth and universal gates. Understand TTL , CMOS
tables. II. Design, realize and families.
verify full Usage of Bread boards
adder using two half Usage of connectors
adders. Usage of simulator software
III. Verify the truth table. (or) Digital trainer kit
7 Verify parallel adder I. Make the connections Verification of outputs as

using as per per
simulator software. the logic diagram. the designated inputs for
II. Connect +5v and Parallel adder circuits as per
ground truth table
according to pin Familiarization of IC 7483
configuration. Usage of Bread boards
III. Apply diff Usage of connectors
combinations of inputs Usage of simulator software
to the i/p terminals. (or) Digital trainer kits
IV. Note o/p for
summation.
V. Verify the truth table.
8 Verify the function of I. Make the connections Verification of outputs as
4- according per
bit magnitude to the circuit diagram. the designated inputs for 4-bit
140
comparator II. The output is high if magnitude comparator circuits
7485 IC. both the as per truth table
inputs are equal. Familiarization of IC 7485
III. Verify the truth table Usage of Bread boards
for Usage of connectors
different values. Usage of simulator software
9 Verify the truth tables I. Connect the circuit Usage of various flipflops
RS, II. Apply VCC & ground Usage of Bread boards
JK, T and D Flip-flops. signal to Usage of connectors
every IC. Usage of simulator software
III. Observe the input & or) Digital trainer kits
output
according to the truth
table
10 Construct a ripple I. Connect the circuit Verification of outputs of
counter II. Apply VCC & ground Ripple
using JK-FFs and signal to clunter
obtain its every IC. Usage of JK FFs
timing waveforms. III. Observe the input & Usage of Bread boards
output Usage of connectors
according to the truth Usage of simulator software
table. (or) Digital trainer kits
IV. Obtain the timing
waveform
11 Verify the function of I. Make the connections Familiarization of IC 7490
7490 as decade and according to the circuit Usage of Bread boards
modulus counter, diagram. Usage of connectors
obtain II. Verify the truth table Usage of simulator software
timing waveforms. for (or) Digital trainer kits
different values.
III. Obtain the Timing
waveform
12 verify the function of I. Connect the circuit. Usage of IC 74190/74193
up/down counter II. Apply VCC & ground Usage of Bread boards
using signal to Usage of connectors
74190/ 74193, change every IC. Usage of simulator software
the III. Observe the input & (or) Digital trainer kits
modulus of the output
counter according to the truth
and verify. table
13 To construct and I. Make the connections Implement mod-16
verify the as per the synchronous counter
141
function of mod-16 logic diagram. Understanding the propose
Synchronous II. Connect VCC and of
counters. ground VCC and Ground.
according to pin Usage of Bread boards
configuration. Usage of connectors
III. Apply diff Usage of simulator software
combinations of inputs (or) Digital trainer kits
to the i/p terminals.
IV. Note o/p for
summation.
V. Verify the truth table.
14 Verify the function of I. Make the connections Implement shift register.
shift according Demonstration usage d of
register (ICs like 7495, to the circuit diagram. ICs 7495,74194
74194 etc.). II. Verify the truth table Usage of Bread boards
for Usage of connectors
different values. Usage of simulator
software
(Or) Digital trainer kits
15 Verify the truth table I. Fix the IC's on the bread Implementing Multiplexers.
of board Familiarization of IC 74153
Multiplexer IC 74153. &give the input supply. Usage of Bread boards
II. Make connection Usage of connectors (or)
according to Digital
the circuit. trainer kits
III. Give select signal and
strobe
signal at respective pins.
IV. Connect +5 v VCC
supply at pin no
24 & GND at pin no 12.
V. Verify the truth table
for various inputs.
16 Verify the truth table I. Fix the IC's on the bread Implementing Multiplexers.
of board Familiarization of IC 74138
De multiplexer IC &give the input supply. Usage of Bread boards
74138 II. Make connection Usage of connectors (or)
according to Digital trainer kits
the circuit.
III. Give select signal and
strobe
signal at respective pins.
IV. Connect +5 v VCC
supply at pin no
142
24 & GND at pin no 12.
V. Verify the truth table
for various
inputs.
17 Verify the truth table III. Make the connections Implementing BCD 7
of according segment
BCD to 7 segment to the circuit diagram. Decoder.
Decoder IV. Verify the truth table Familiarization of IC 7448
7448 IC. for Usage of Bread boards
different values. Usage of connectors
(Or) Digital trainer kits
18 Verify the Truth table I. Make the connections Implementing Encoder and
of according Decoder.
74148 Encoder & to the circuit diagram. Familiarization of IC 74148
74138 II. Verify the truth table &74138
Decoder IC. for Usage of Bread boards
different values. Usage of connectors
NOTE: The student can implement above experiments either by using hardware components
or by simulators to get acquaintance to various digital electronic experiments
143
Course Code Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for FA Marks for SA
periods/week periods
Data
Structures
CM-307 6 90 40 60
Through C
Lab
Chapter Chapter/Unit Title No.of Periods CO’s Mapped

No.
1. Introduction to Data structures CO1

24
Sequential Storage Representation
2. Linked Storage Representation- CO2

18
Linked Lists
3. Linear Data Structures-Stacks 18 CO3
4. Linear Data Structures-Queues 21 CO4
5. Non Linear Data Structures-Trees 9 CO5
Total Periods 90

i) To know the various types of Data Structures
Course Objectives ii) To familiarize with the representation of Data Structures
iii)To use various Data structures in organizing data
iv)To reinforce theoretical concepts by writing relevant programs
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 CM-307.1 Execute C programs on sorting and searching techniques
CO2 CM-307.2 Develop C programs on the various Linked Lists operations.
CO3 CM-307.3 Design C programs on the operations of Stack data structure
CO4 CM-307.4 Execute C programs on the operations of Queue data structure
CO5 CM-307.5 Write C programs on the operations of Binary Trees
144
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
CO NO.
CM-307.1 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 2
CM-307.2 3 3 3 1 2 2 2 1 1 1
CM-307.3 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 3 3
CM-307.4 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 2
CM-307.5 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 2 2
Average 3 3 3 1.8 2.8 2.6 2.4 2 2 2
Learning out comes:
Write C Program to Implement
1. BUBBLE SORTING using Functions.

2. SELECTION SORTING using Functions.
3. INSERTION SORTING using Functions.
4. MERGE SORTING on two sorted list using Functions.
5. QUICK SORTING using Functions.
6. LINEAR SEARCHING using Functions.
7. BINARY SEARCHING with-out RECURSION.
8. BINARY SEARCHING with RECURSION.
9. SINGLY LINKED LIST with insert, delete, display, sort, find and replace operations.
10. DOUBLY LINKED LIST with insert, delete, display, sort, find and replace operations.
11. STACK with insertion, deletion and display operations using arrays.
12. STACK with insertion, deletion and display operations using linked lists.
13. Conversion of arithmetic expression to post-fix expression using STACKS.
14. Evaluation of post-fix expression using STACKS.
15. QUEUES with insertion, deletion and display operations using arrays.
16. QUEUES with insertion, deletion and display operations using linked lists.
17. CIRCULAR QUEUE with insertion, deletion and display operations using arrays.
18. CIRCULAR QUEUE with insertion, deletion and display operations using Linked List.
19. BINARY SEARCH TREE with insertion, deletion, various traversals and search operations.
145
Time Schedule:
Sno Experiment Name Allotted

Periods
1 BUBBLE SORTING using Functions. 3
2 SELECTION SORTING using Functions. 3
3 INSERTION SORTING using Functions. 3
4 MERGE SORTING on two sorted list using Functions. 3

5 QUICK SORTING using Functions. 3
6 LINEAR SEARCHING using Functions. 3
7 BINARY SEARCHING with-out RECURSION. 3
8 BINARY SEARCHING with RECURSION. 3

9 SINGLY LINKED LIST with insert, delete, display, sort, find and replace 6
operations.
10 DOUBLY LINKED LIST with insert, delete, display, sort, find and replace 6
operations.
11 STACK with insertion, deletion and display operations using arrays. 3

12 STACK with insertion, deletion and display operations using linked lists. 6
13 Conversion of arithmetic expression to post-fix expression using STACKS. 6
14 Evaluation of post-fix expression using STACKS. 3

15 QUEUES with insertion, deletion and display operations using arrays. 3
16 QUEUES with insertion, deletion and display operations using linked lists. 6
17 CIRCULAR QUEUE with insertion, deletion and display operations using arrays. 6
18 CIRCULAR QUEUE with insertion, deletion and display operations using Linked 6
List.
19 BINARY SEARCH TREE with insertion, deletion, various traversals and search 9
operations.
146
DATA STRUCTURES LAB OBJECTIVES AND KEY COMPETENCIES
Sl.No Name of the Objectives Key Competencies

Experiment
1 Exercise on bubble Write a C program for Correct syntactical errors

sort Debug logical errors
i. Implementing Bubble sort Observe whether Bubble sort
ii. Printing the list after every pass algorithm is properly
iii. Printing the list after Bubble sort is implemented
performed Check whether the sorted list is
generated after the Bubble sort
is performed for the given
unordered list
Check the efficiency of the
program if the given list is almost
sorted
2 Exercise on Selection Write a C program for Correct syntactical errors
i. Implementing selection sort Observe whether selection sort
iii. Printing the list after selection sort implemented
is performed Check whether the sorted list is
generated after the selection
sort is performed for the given
unordered list
3 Exercise on insertion Write a C program for Correct syntactical errors
i. Implementing insertion sort Observe whether insertion sort
iii. Printing the list after insertion sort implemented
is performed Check whether the sorted list is
generated after the insertion
sort is performed for the given
unordered list
4 Implement a Write a C program for Correct syntactical errors

program for merge Debug logical errors
sort on two sorted i. Implementing merge sort Check whether two separate
ii. Printing the list after every pass sorted lists are properly stored in
lists of elements
iii. Printing the list after merge sort is separate arrays
performed Observe whether Merge sort
algorithm is properly
implemented
Check whether the sorted list is
generated after the Merge sort is
performed for the given two
separate lists
147

Experiment
5 Exercise on Quick Write a C program for Correct syntactical errors

i. Implementing Quick sort Observe whether Quick sort
iii. Printing the list after Quick sort is implemented
performed Check whether the sorted list is
generated after the Quick sort is
performed for the given
unordered list
Check the efficiency of the
program if the given list is almost
sorted
6 Exercises on linear Write a C program for Correct syntactical errors

search Debug logical errors
i. Implementing Linear Search Check whether Linear Search
ii. Print the proper result for algorithm is properly
successful and unsuccessful search implemented
Observe the result for the search
element is present in the list
element is not present in the list
7 Exercise on binary Write a C program for Correct syntactical errors
search with-out i. Implementing Binary Search Debug logical errors
Recursion ii. Print the proper result for Check whether Binary Search
successful and unsuccessful Binary algorithm is properly
search implemented
8 Exercise on binary Write a C program for Correct syntactical errors
search with I. Implementing Binary Search Debug logical errors
Recursion II. Print the proper result for Check whether Binary Search
successful and unsuccessful Binary algorithm is properly
search implemented
Observe the Base Condition
Observe the intermediate results
in stack
148

Experiment
9 Exercises on Write a C program for Rectify syntactical errors

creation, insertion, Debug logical errors
deletion, display,
i. Creation of linked list Study node structure
ii. Inserting an element in Linked list Validate whether the memory
sorting, find and
iii. Check for deletion of a node if no allocation is done for the node
replace of elements element is present and print error Confirm whether the addition of
in a singly linked message node is done at the end
lists iv. Delete an element from the Linked Correct if deletion of an element
list in an empty list
v. Display all the elements from the Confirm whether deletion of
linked list required node is done
vi. Sorting of elements Observe whether all the
vii. Find and Replace of element elements of the linked list are
displayed in proper order
Observe whether all the
elements of the linked list are
sorted in proper order
Observe whether find and
replace of element in the linked
list
10 Exercises on Write a C program for Rectify syntactical errors
creation, insertion, Debug logical errors
deletion, display,
iii. Creation of linked list Study node structure
ix. Inserting an element in Linked list Validate whether the memory
sorting, find and
x. Check for deletion of a node if no allocation is done for the node
replace of elements element is present and print error Confirm whether the addition of
in a Double linked message node is done at the end
lists xi. Delete an element from the Linked Correct if deletion of an element
list in an empty list
xii. Display all the elements from the Confirm whether deletion of
linked list required node is done
iii. Sorting of elements Observe whether all the
iv. Find and Replace of element elements of the linked list are
displayed in proper order
Observe whether all the
elements of the linked list are
sorted in proper order
Observe whether find and
replace of element in the linked
list
11 Writea program to Write a C program for Correct syntactical errors
Implement a stack Debug logical errors
using Arrays
i. Creation of Stack consisting of Observe declaration of stack
elements using arrays using arrays
ii. Insertion of new element is done Validate whether a new element
149

Experiment
by push() function call is inserted at the top by push()

iii. Deletion of last element is done by function call
pop() function call Check whether only the top
iv. Print error message for ‘empty element is deleted by pop()
stack’ if no elements are present function call
for pop() function call Verify for empty stack condition
v. Print error message for ‘stack full’ if in pop()
number of elements exceed size of Verify for stack full condition in
Stack array push()
12 Write a program to Write a C program for Correct syntactical errors

Implement a stack Debug logical errors
i. Creation of Stack consisting of Study node structure
using Linked List
elements using Linked List Validate whether the memory
ii. Insertion of new element is done allocation is done for the node
by push() function call Observe declaration of stack
iii. Deletion of last element is done by using Linked List
pop() function call Validate whether a new element
iv. Print error message for ‘empty is inserted at the top by push()
stack’ if no elements are present function call
for pop() function call Check whether only the top
element is deleted by pop()
function call
Verify for empty stack condition
in pop()
13 Writea program for Write a C program for Correct syntactical errors
conversion of given Debug logical errors
infix arithmetic I. Conversion of infix expression into Observe declaration of stack
postfix expression using stacks using arrays
expression
concept Check whether the final
intopostfix II. Printing the postfix expression expression is postfix expression
expression or not.
14 Write a program for Write a C program for Correct syntactical errors

Evaluation of post- Debug logical errors
fix expression using i. Evaluation of post-fix expression Observe declaration of stack
STACKS. using STACKS using arrays
ii. Printing the evaluated result Check whether the result is
correctly evaluated or not.
implement a queue Debug logical errors
using arrays
i. Creation of Queue consisting of Observe declaration of Queue
elements using arrays using arrays
ii. Insertion of new element is done Validate whether a new element
by add_Queue() is inserted at the end of the
150

Experiment
iii. Print error message for ‘empty array by add_Queue()

queue’ if no elements are present Verify for empty Queue
for deletion of an empty queue. condition for deletion of an
iv. Print error message for ‘queue full’ element
if number of elements exceed size Verify for Queue full condition
of Queue array upon insertion of upon insertion of a new element
new element. Check whether only the first
v. Deletion of first element is done by element is deleted by
delete_Queue() delete_Queue()

implement a queue Debug logical errors
using linkedlist
i. Creation of Queue consisting of Study node structure
elements using Linked List Validate whether the memory
ii. Insertion of new element is done allocation is done for the node
by add_Queue() Validate whether a new element
iii. Print error message for ‘empty is inserted at the end of the
queue’ if no elements are present Linked List by add_Queue()
for deletion of an empty queue. Verify for empty Queue
iv. Deletion of first element is done by condition for deletion of an
delete_Queue() element
Check whether only the first
element is deleted by
delete_Queue()
implement a circular Debug logical errors
queue using arrays
vi. Creation of circular Queue Observe declaration of circular
consisting of elements using arrays Queue using arrays
vii. Insertion of new element is done Validate whether a new element
by add_Queue() is inserted at the rear end of the
iii. Print error message for ‘empty array by add_Queue()
queue’ if no elements are present Verify for empty Queue
for deletion of an empty queue. condition for deletion of an
ix. Print error message for ‘queue full’ element
if number of elements exceed size Verify for Queue full condition
of Queue array upon insertion of upon insertion of a new element
new element. Check whether only the first
x. Deletion of first element is done by element is deleted by
delete_Queue() at the front end delete_Queue() at the front end

implement a circular Debug logical errors
xi. Creation of circular Queue Study node structure
queue using LInked
consisting of elements using Linked Validate whether the memory
List allocation is done for the node
151

Experiment
Lists xii. Insertion of new element is done Observe declaration of circular

by add_Queue() Queue using Linked List
iii. Print error message for ‘empty Validate whether a new element
queue’ if no elements are present is inserted at the rear end of the
for deletion of an empty queue. Linked List by add_Queue()
iv. Deletion of first element is done by Verify for empty Queue
delete_Queue() at the front end condition for deletion of an
element
Check whether only the first
element is deleted by
delete_Queue() at the front end
19f Write a C program Write a C program for Correct syntactical errors
to BINARY SEARCH i. Creation of Binary Trees Debug logical errors
TREE with insertion, ii. Insertion of a node Observe proper definition of
deletion, various iii. Deletion of a node elements in a Binary Search Tree
traversals and iv. Perform In-order Traversal of Check whether the node is
search operations. the binary tree properly inserted in the Binary
v. Perform Pre-order Traversal Tree
of the binary tree Check whether the node is
vi. Perform Post-order Traversal properly deleted in the Binary
of the binary tree Tree
Observe the root node after
deleting root node element
Validate whether the Tree in-
order traversal is properly done
Validate whether the Tree pre-
Validate whether the Tree post-
152
No. of Total No. of
Course Code Course Title Marks for FA Marks for SA
CM-308 DBMS Lab 4 60 40 60
Sno UNIT TITLE NO. OF PERIODS COS
1 Concepts of DBMS & RDBMS 8 CO1

2 Concepts of SQL 16 CO2
3 Basics of PL/ SQL 12 CO3
4 Advance PL/SQL 16 CO4
5 Concepts of No SQL & Mongo DB. 8 CO5

60
Upon completion of the course the student shall able to learn
COURSE OBJECTIVES Insert, update, delete and select data into/from Relation Database
Develop PL/SQL programs
Insert, update, delete and select data from Mongo DB
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 CM-308.1 Develop SQL Queries to Create, modify and drop tables and
Queries to Insert, update, delete data from tables.

CO2 CM-308.2 Execute SQL Queries to display data on different conditions from
different tables
CO3 CM-308.3
Execute PL/SQL Programs
CO4 CM-308.4
Demonstrate the usage of cursors and triggers
CO5 CM-308.5 Execute commands to Insert, update, delete and select data in
NOSQL and Mongo DB databases
153
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
CM-308.1 2 3 2 3 3 2
CM-308.2 2 2 1 2 2
CM-308.3 2 1 2 2
CM-308.4 2 2 3 3 3 3 2 2 2
CM-308.5 2 3 3 3 3 2 2
Average 2 2.3 2 3 3 2.6 3 2.3 2 2
LEARNING OUTCOMES
1 Know installation of Oracle
2 Exercise on creating tables.
3 Exercise on inserting records
4 Exercise on updating records
5 Exercise on modifying the structure of the table
6 Exercise on Select command
7 Exercise on querying the table using clauses like WHERE, ORDER BY, IN, AND, OR,NOT, IS
NULL
8 Exercise on GROUP BY, HAVING
9 Exercise on Number functions, character functions, conversion functions and date
functions, group functions
10 Exercise on set operators
11 Exercise on sub queries
12 Exercise on Joins
13 Exercise on various date and number format models
14 Exercise on creating tables with integrity constraints
15 Write programs using PL/SQL control statements
16 Exercise on Procedures
17 Exercise on Functions
18 Exercise on Cursors
19 Exercise on Triggers
20 Exercise on Installation of Mongo DB
21 Exercise on Creation and Dropping of Database
22 Exercise on Creation and Dropping of Collections.
23 Exercise on Commands of Mongo DB- Insert, update , find, delete and sorting of
Documents.
Mini Project : Student has to develop a Mini project applying the skills acquired from the
learning outcomes of this course.
154
Time Schedule:
Sl.No Name of the Experiment Periods

1 Know installation of Oracle 1
2 Exercise on creating tables. 1
3 Exercise on inserting records 2
4 Exercise on updating records 2
5 Exercise on modifying the structure of the table 1
6 Exercise on SELECT command 2
7 Exercise on querying the table using clauses like WHERE, ORDER, 18

IN,AND, OR,NOT, IS NULL
8 Exercise on GROUP BY, HAVING 2
9 Exercise on Number functions, character functions, conversion functions 3

and date functions, group functions
10 Exercise on SET operators 2
11 Exercise on sub queries 3
12 Exercise on Joins 3
13 Exercise on various date and number format models 1
14 Exercise on creating tables with integrity constraints 2
15 Write programs using PL/SQL control statements 6
16 Exercise on Procedures 2
17 Exercise on Functions 1
18 Exercise on Cursors 2
19 Exercise on Triggers 2
20 Exercise on Installation of Mongo DB 1
21 Exercise on Creation and Dropping of Database 1
22 Exercise on Creation and Dropping of Collections 1
23 Exercises on commands of Mongo DB 1
Total 60
155
KEY COMPETENCIES

Experiment
1 Know installation Perform the following:
i. To identify the version of Observe Oracle version

Oracle being installed being installed
ii. To understand the RAM Observe the RAM &
and HDD requirements for HDD requirements
Oracle installation Rectify for any Oracle
iii. To comprehend the installation errors
installation steps correctly Able to login as
iv. Setting up of Oracle Administrator and as
Administrative Password Oracle user account
v. Configuring the Oracle
database after post-
installation steps of Oracle
viz configuring
administrative rights for
performing
vi. To login to Oracle as
administrator account and
Oracle user account
2 Exercise on Perform the following: Correct Table creation
creating syntax errors
tables. i. To login with Oracle user Correct the wrong data
account types and inappropriate
ii. To give correct syntax for sizes for the respective
table creation fields
iii. To give correct data type for Check for displaying the
the required fields with structure of the table
appropriate size
iv. To display the structure of
the table
3 Exercise on Perform the following: Correct syntax errors for
inserting records Insertion of record
i. Check for the required table Check for insertion of
present already proper values for the
ii. To insert the records required fields
correctly Verify the correct values
iii. To display the pertaining to the record
records correctly are inserted in the
required table
Check for displaying of
the records correctly
156
Experiment
4 Exercise on Perform the following: Correct syntax errors for

updating updation ofrecord
records i. Check for the required table Check for updation
present already Check for displaying of
ii. To update the the updated records
records correctly correctly
iii. To display the
updated records
5 Exercise on modifying Perform the following Correct syntax errors in
the structure of the modifying the structure
table i. To identify the required of the table
table present in the Check whether required
system already field is newly added to
ii. To add newcolumn the existing table
iii. To display the Check for displaying of
records correctly the modified table
correctly
6 Exercise on Perform the following Check for syntax error in
SELECT usage of Select
command i. To identify the required command
table present already Check whether Select
ii. To display the records in command is given
the required table correctly to display all
the records
7 Exercise on querying Perform the following: Check for syntax error in
the table using clauses usage of Select
like WHERE, ORDER, i. To use the Select command command with
IN,AND, OR,NOT, IS ii. To use the clauses WHERE, appropriate clauses
NULL ORDER, IN,AND, OR, NOT, IS Check whether Select
NULL along with Select command along with
command on the given appropriate clause is
records in the table given correctly for the
required condition
Check the usage of
clauses WHERE, ORDER,
IN,AND, OR, NOT along
with Select command
appropriately
8 Exercise on GROUP BY, Perform the following: Check for syntax error in
HAVING the usage GROUP BY,
i. To use the Select command HAVING
To use the clauses GROUP BY, Check for usage of
HAVING along with Select GROUP BY, HAVING
command on the given records Verify output values
in the table based on certain
condition on few
records
157
Experiment
9 Exercise on Number Perform the following Check for syntax error of

functions, character various functions
functions, conversion i. To use functions Check for usage of
functions and date ii. To use set command along various functions
functions, group with WHERE condition, Verify output values
functions GROUP BY, HAVING based on certain
condition on few
records
10 Exercise on SET Perform the following Check for syntax error in
operators the usage of SET
iii. To use set command command
iv. To use set command along Check for usage of SET
with WHERE condition command for updating
values based on certain
condition on few
records
11 Exercise on sub Perform the following Check for the syntax
queries error in usage of sub
queries
Check for the
i. To use Select command correctness of the usage
ii. To use appropriate Operators
IN of appropriate
operators used
12 Exercise on Joins Perform the following Check for the
correctness of the
i. To create two tables syntax used for joining
ii. To use the common field Check if the join is
if two tables aroused created between two
iii. To know different types of tables
Join Check if self join is
created
13 Exercise on various Perform the following: Check for the syntax of
date and number the date formats
format models i. To use date formats Check for the syntax of
correctly the number formats
ii. To use number
formats correctly
14 Exercise on creating Perform the following Check for the syntax
tables with integrity errors in usage of all
constraints i. Create Primary key types of Integrity
ii. Create Foreign key or constraints
referential integrity Check whether different
constraint types of Integrity
iii. Create NOT NULL constraint constraints are used
iv. Create UNIQUE Key constraint
v. Create CHECK constraint
158
Experiment
15 Write programs using Perform the following Check for the syntax of
PL/SQL control IF.. ELSE statements
statements i. To use IF .. Check for the syntax of
ELSE all iterative statements
statements
ii. To use iterative statements
– Simple loop, While Loop, For
Loop
16 Exercise on Perform the following Check for
Procedures proper declaration of
i. To know the procedures
concept of stored Check for syntax
procedures Check for proper calling
ii. To declare procedures of procedures
iii. The type of parameters
IN,IN OUT,OUT
iv. To call procedures from
other procedures
17 Exercise on Functions Perform the following Check for proper
declaration of function
i. To know the Check for syntax of
concept of stored parameters and its data
functions type
ii. To declare function Check for proper return
iii. To call functions from other data type from the
functions functions
Check for variable
assignment to get the
returned value from the
function
18 Exercise on Cursors Perform the following Check for the syntax of
cursor
i. To know the concept cursors Check for open cursor,
ii. To know the fetch data from fetch data, close cursor
database Check for the result
19 Exercise on Triggers Perform the following Check for the syntax of

trigger
i. To know the concept of Write a trigger which
triggers raises before insert data
ii. Validation before and after Raise trigger
insert, before and after Repeat the procedure
update and , before and for remaining
after delete data Check for the result
159
Experiment
20 Exercise on Perform the following

Installation of Mongo Observe Mongo DB
DB i. To download and install version being installed
Mongo DB Observe the RAM &
HDD requirements
Rectify for any Mongo
DB installation errors
Able to login as
Administrator
21 Exercise on Creation Perform the following
and Dropping of Know the use of create
Database i. Create the Database Database() and drop
ii. Drop the Database Database()
Correct Database
creation syntax errors
Check for displaying the

database name
22 Exercise on Creation Perform the following
and Dropping of Know the use of create
Collections i. Create the Collection Collection() and drop()
ii. Drop the Collection
Correct Database
creation syntax errors
Check for collection

name
Check for the collection

dropped
23 Exercises on Execute the following
commands of Mongo commands of Mongo DB Know the syntax of
DB insert(), update(), find(),
i. Insert the Document remove(), sort()
ii. update the functions.
Document
iii. find the Document Correct syntax errors.
iv. Delete the
Document Check out for different
v. sort the Documents input values.
160
No. of Total No. of
Course Code Course Title Marks for FA Marks for SA
CM-309 Multimedia 3 45 40 60
Lab
NO. OF CO’s mapped

S.NO MAJOR TOPICS
PERIODS
1 MS Access - create Database, create table with and without 10 CO1

constraints, Insert, delete, update records, implement
queries, create relationship between two tables
2 PageMaker - Creation of publication using tools, text, 20 CO2

shapes, etc, Custom template, colors, text block, Objects,
Styles, Page elements, Printing the documents
4 Photoshop – Different tools, Working with Layers, Working 15 CO3

with painting tools, Colors, Brushes
TOTAL 45
Course (i) Familiarize with the features of MS Access.

(ii) Familiarize with the features of Adobe PageMaker
Objectives (iii) Familiarize with the features of Adobe Photoshop
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 CM-309.1 Working with databases, tables, manipulating records, queries and
establishing relationship among tables.
CO2 CM-309.2 Create and print publication files such as Textbooks, Visiting Cards,
Invitation Cards, etc. using Adobe Page maker
CO3 CM-309.3 Design and enhance the quality all types of picture files using Adobe
Photoshop
161
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
CO NO.
CM-309.1 3 2 3 1 3 3 2 2
CM-309.2 2 2 3 2 2 2
CM-309.3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2
Average 2 2 2.8 2 2 2.5 2.3 2 2.5 2
Learning Outcomes:
Practice with MS-Access
1. To create Database
2. To Create table with and without constraints
3. To Insert, delete, update records
4. To implement queries
5. To create relationship between two table
Practice with Adobe Page Maker
6. Exercise on Installation, invoking and familiarizing Adobe Page Maker.
7. Exercise on Page Maker Tools.
8. Exercise on pallets and formatting pages
9. Exercise on text formatting
10. Exercise on Advanced text formatting
11. Exercise on Graphics tools
12. Exercise on object transformations.
13. Exercise on color options.
14. Exercise on graphics with layers using photoshop plug-ins
15. Exercise on import and export options.
16. Exercise on creating visiting card
17. Exercise on creating book cover page
18. Exercise on creating hotel menu card
19. Exercise on creating invitation card
20. Exercise on creating brochure
Practice with Adobe Photoshop
21. Exercise on Installation, invoking and familiarizing Adobe Photoshop
22. Exercise on Images
23. Exercise on Resizing & Cropping Images
24. Exercise on Working With Basic Selections
25. Exercise on Layers
26. Exercise on Painting In Photoshop
27. Exercise on Photo Retouching
28. Exercise on Colour Correction
29. Exercise on Quick Mask Mode
30. Exercise on Pen Tool
31. Exercise on Creating Special Effects
162
32. Exercise on Exporting Your Work
33. Exercise on Logo Creation
Mini Project : Student has to develop a Mini project applying the skills acquired from the
learning outcomes of this course.
KEY COMPETENCIES
Exp Name of the Experiment Objectives Key Competencies

No
1 To create database c. Open MS Access Database creatIon

d. Create database
e. save
2 To create table e. Open MS Access Table creation
f. Create database
g. Create table
h. Use primary key
3 To insert/delete/update records g. Open MS Access Able to
into table h. Create database insert/update/delete and
i. Crate table delete and update
j. Insert/delete/update records into the table
records
4 To implement queries f. Open MS Access Able to display contents
g. Create database of the table based on the
Crate table user requirement
h. Use Select command
5 Create relationships between h. Create table Able to link tables
tables i. Create one more tables
j. Insert records
k. Use relationship option
6 Exercise on Installation, Installation, invoking and Installing page maker
invoking and familiarizing familiarizing Adobe Page Maker. Familiarize with pagemaker
Adobe Page Maker. environment
7 Exercise on Page Maker Tools. Page Maker Tools. Using Tool box, zero
position, pointer tool, text
tool, rotate tool, crop tool,
oblique line tool,
constrained line tool, box
tool, rectangle frame, circle
tool, circular frame,
polygon tool, polygon
frame, hand tool and zoom
tool,
8 Exercise on pallets and pallets and formatting pages Use of paper size, page
formatting pages size, control pallet, color
pallet, styles pallet, layers
pallet, master page pallet,
163
hyperlink pallet and
measurement system,
grids, rulers and guides,
insert pages.
9 Exercise on text formatting text formatting Know the purpose of
master pages, placing a
text, Formatting text(size,
styles), Paragraph setting,
tab setting, bullets,
numbering, hyphenation
setting, setting and
creating styles, rotating
text and color to text and
save the document.
10 Exercise on Advanced text Advanced text formatting use spell check, divide the
formatting text into columns, work
with indexes and
pagenation, use the find
feature and save the
document.
11 Exercise on Graphics tools Graphics tools Create a document to
work with graphics with
the help of line tool, box
tool, ellipse tool, polygon
tool, rounded corners, fill,
stroke and to place various
graphics(at least 2 for each
graphic tool) and save the
document.
12 Exercise on object object transformations. Transform the objects such
transformations. as transforming a
rectangle, resizing an
ellipse, inserting cropping
an image.
13 Exercise on color options. color options. Adding color to a graphic
shape, creating own colors
with RGB, editing, copying,
removing and replacing
colors, grouping and un
grouping objects, linking
objects, masking objects
and save the document.
14 Exercise on graphics with layers graphics with layers using Create a document of five
using photoshop plug-ins photoshop plug-ins pages containing text and
graphics and work with
layers, moving objects
between layers using layer
options, using stacking
164
order, using photoshop
plug-ins
15 Exercise on import and export import and export options. Create a new document
options. and import text from
HTML, MS word,
spreadsheet, photo CD,
acquiring tif image,
managing linked files, to
use export options to
export text and graphics to
jpeg format and to print
the document, to publish
the document in internet
and save it,
16 Exercise on creating visiting card creating visiting card Create visiting card with
text and graphics on both
sides with proper
formatting.
17 Exercise on creating book cover creating book cover page Create front and back
page cover page of a book with
text and graphics with
proper formatting.
18 Exercise on creating hotel menu creating hotel menu card Create a hotel menu card
card with text and graphics with
proper formatting.
19 Exercise on creating invitation creating invitation card Create a invitation card
card with text and graphics with
proper formatting for
required no. of pages.
20 Exercise on creating brochure creating brochure Create a brochure for the
firms like real estate
companies, hospitals,
educational institutions
etc..,
21 Exercise on Installation, Installation, invoking and Exploring the Toolbox
invoking and familiarizing familiarizing Adobe Photoshop The New CS4 Applications
Adobe Photoshop Bar & the Options Bar
Exploring Panels & Menus
Creating & Viewing a New
Document
Customizing the Interface
Setting Preferences
22 Exercise on Images Working with Images Zooming & Panning an

Image
Working with Multiple
Images, Rulers, Guides &
Grids
165
Undoing Steps with History
Adjusting Color with the
New Adjustments Panel
The New Masks Panel &
Vibrance Color Correction
Command
The New Note Tool & the
Save for Web & Devices
Interface
The New Auto-Blend &
Auto-Align Layers
Commands
The New 3D Commands
23 Exercise on RESIZING & RESIZING & CROPPING IMAGES Understanding Pixels &
CROPPING IMAGES Resolution
The Image Size Command
Interpolation Options
Resizing for Print & Web
Cropping & Straightening
an Image
Adjusting Canvas Size &
Canvas Rotation
24 Exercise on WORKING WITH WORKING WITH BASIC Selecting with the Elliptical
BASIC SELECTIONS SELECTIONS Marquee Tool
Using the Magic Wand &
Free Transform Tool
Selecting with the Regular
& Polygonal Lasso Tools
Combining Selections
Using the Magnetic Lasso
Tool
Using the Quick Selection
Tool & Refine Edge
Modifying Selections
25 Exercise on LAYERS Working on Layers Understanding the
Background Layer
Creating, Selecting, Linking
& Deleting Layers
Locking & Merging Layers
Copying Layers, Using
Perspective & Layer Styles
Filling & Grouping Layers
Introduction to Blending
Modes
Blending Modes, Opacity &
Fill
Creating & Modifying Text
26 Exercise on PAINTING IN PAINTING IN PHOTOSHOP Using the Brush Tool
PHOTOSHOP Working with Colors &
Swatches
166
Creating & Using Gradients
Creating & Working with
Brushes
Using the Pencil & Eraser
Tools
Painting with Selections
27 Exercise on PHOTO PHOTO RETOUCHING Using The Red Eye Tool
RETOUCHING The Clone Stamp Tool
The Patch Tool & the
Healing Brush Tool
The Spot Healing Brush
Tool
The Color Replacement
Tool
The Toning & Focus Tools
Painting with History
28 Exercise on COLOR CORRECTION COLOR CORRECTION Using Color Spaces & Color
Modes
The Variations Command
The Auto Commands
Adjusting Levels
Adjust Curves, Non-
Destructively, with
Adjustment Layers
29 Exercise on QUICK MASK MODE Using QUICK MASK MODE Using Quick Mask Options
Painting a Selection
Saving & Removing a
Selection from the
Background
30 Exercise on PEN TOOL Working with the PEN TOOL Understanding Paths & the
Pen Tool
Creating Straight & Curved
Paths
Creating Combo Paths
Creating a Clipping Path
31 Exercise on CREATING SPECIAL CREATING SPECIAL EFFECTS Getting Started with
EFFECTS Photoshop Filters
Smart Filters
Creating Text Effects
Applying Gradients to Text
32 Exercise on Photo Shop Credits EXPORTING YOUR WORK Saving with Different File
Formats
Saving for Web & Devices
Printing Options
Photo shop Credits
33 Exercise on Logo Creation Logo Creation To apply all the tools
Prepare college logo
Prepare logo for industry
167
*74FNFTUFS
168
CURRICULUM-2023
(IV Semester)
Instruction
Periods/Week Scheme Of Examinations
Total
Periods
Sub Code Name of the Subject End
Per
Practicals
Exam
Theory
Semester (hrs) Marks Marks
Marks
THEORY SUBJECTS
CM-401 Software Engineering 5 - 75 3 20 80 100

Web Technologies
CM-402 5 75 3 20 80 100
-
Computer Organization
CM-403 And Microprocessors 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
OOP through Java

CM-404 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
Computer Networks
CM-405 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
&Cyber Security
PRACTICAL SUBJECTS
CM-406 Web Technologies Lab 4 60

- 3 40 60 100
Java Lab
CM-407 4 60 3 40 60 100
-
CM-408 - 3 45 3 40 60 100

CM-409 - 3 45 3 40 60 100
Cyber Security Lab
ACTIVITIES - 3 45
Total 25 17 630 - 260 640 900

401 common with DAIML
402 common with DAIML,DCAI, DCBD,DCCN,DIOT
405 common with DCCN,DWD
406 common with DAIML,DCAI,DCCN
407 common with DAIML,DCCN
408 common with All branches & 409 common with DAIML,DCCN,DWD
169
Course No. of Total No. Marks for
Course Title Marks for SA
code Periods/Weeks of periods FA
CM-401 Software Engineering 5 75 20 80
Time Schedule
No. of No. of
Questions Questions
1. Basics of Software
Engineering Designs & Life 10 16 2 1 CO1
Cycle Models
2. Software Project
18 16 2 1 CO2
Management
3. Requirement Analysis &

10 13 1 1 CO3
Specifications
4. Software Design, Coding 22 39 3 3 CO4
5. Software testing, Debugging,

Reliability, Quality 15 26 2 2 CO5
Management & Maintenance
Total 75 110 10 8
i)To know the fundamentals of software engineering & life cycle modes
Course ii)To familiarize project managements

Objectives iii)To design software projects with the help of software engineering principles
and UML models
COURSE OUTCOMES:
CO1 CM-401.1 Explain Software life cycle models and basics of software
engineering.
170
CO2 CM-401.2 Describe Software Project Management
CO3 CM-401.3 Prepare SRS document
CO4 CM-401.4 Apply Design, coding techniques.
CO5 CM-401.5 Apply Testing Techniques, Quality and reliability metrics
CO-PO/PSO Matrix:
CM-401.1 3 2 3 2 2 1 1 2 2 2
CM-401.2 3 3 3 3 1 3 2 2 2 3
CM-401.3 3 3 1 3 1 2 2 3
CM-401.4 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 3
CM-401.5 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 3
Average 3 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.75 2 1.8 2 2.2 2.8
3=strongly mapped, 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped
Learning Outcomes:
1.0 Basics of Software Engineering Designs & Life Cycle Models

1.1 Know the Evolution and Impact of the Software Engineering
1.1.1 Evolution of an Art to an Engineering Discipline
1.1.2 A Solution to the Software Crisis?
1.2 Know the difference between Programs and Software Products
1.3 Understand the evolution of Software Engineering Design
1.3.1 Early Computer Programming
1.3.2 High Level Language Programming
1.3.3 Control Flow-Based Design
1.3.4 Data Structure-Oriented Design
1.3.5 Data Flow-Oriented Design
1.3.6 Object Oriented Design
1.3.7 Other Developments
1.4 Explain the Software Life Cycle Models
1.4.1 Classical Waterfall Model
1.4.2 Iterative Water fall Model
1.4.3 Prototyping Model
1.4.4 Evolutionary Model
1.4.5 Spiral Model
171
1.4.6 AGILE Model
1.4.7 Comparison of Different Life Cycle Models
2.0 Software Project Management
2.1 Software Project Manager
2.1.1 Job Responsibilities of a Software Project Manager
2.1.2 Skills Necessary for Software Project Management
2.2 Know about Software Project Planning
2.3 The SPMP Document
2.4 Metrics for Project Size Estimation
2.4.1 Lines of Code
2.4.2 Function Point Metric
2.5 Project Estimation Techniques
2.5.1 Empirical Estimation Technique
2.5.2 Heuristic Technique
2.6 Staffing Level Estimations
2.6.1 Nordens Work
2.6.2 Putnam’s Work
2.7 Scheduling
2.7.1 Work Break Down Structure
2.7.2 Activity Networks
2.7.3 Gantt Charts
2.7.4 PERT Charts
2.8 Learn how to do Staffing
2.9 Who is a Good Software Engineer?
2.10 Risk Management
2.10.1 Risk Identification
2.10.2 Risk Assessment
2.10.3 Risk Containment
3.0 Requirement Analysis & Specifications
3.1 Requirements Gathering and Analysis
3.2 Software Requirement Specifications
3.2.1 List Contents of the SRS Document
3.2.2 Explain Functional Requirements
3.2.3 Describe Procedure to identify the Functional Requirements
3.3 How to Document the Functional Requirements
3.4 Explain requirements Traceability
3.5 List Characteristics of a Good SRS Document
3.6 Give Examples of Bad SRS Document
3.7 Explain Organization of the SRS Document
4.0 Software Design, Coding
4.1 What is a good Software Design?
4.2 Cohesion and Coupling
4.2.1 Define Terms Cohesion, Coupling
4.2.2 Classification of Cohesiveness
172
4.2.3 Classification of Coupling
4.3 Approaches of Software Design
4.3.1 Function-Oriented Design
4.3.2 Object-Oriented Design
4.3.3 Function-Oriented vs Object-Oriented Design
4.4 User Interface Design
4.4.1 List the Characteristics of a good User Interface
4.4.2 Understand the Basic Concepts
4.4.2.1 User Guidance and Online Help
4.4.2.2 Mode Based vs Modeless Interface
4.4.2.3 Graphical User Interface (GUI) vs Text-Based User Interface
4.4.3 Types of User Interface
4.4.3.1 Command Language Based Interface
4.4.3.2 Menu Based Interface
4.4.3.3 Direct Manipulation Interfaces
4.4.4 Component Based GUI Development Window System and Types of
Widgets.
4.5 Unified Modeling Language
4.5.1 List the goals of UML
4.5.2 Role of UML in Object oriented Design
4.5.3 List Building blocks of UML
4.5.4 Explain Building blocks of UML
4.5.5 List different symbols used in UML notation
4.5.6 Classify and list standard UML diagrams
4.5.7 State the purpose of Class diagram
4.5.8 Draw simple class diagrams
4.5.9 Use case diagram
4.5.9.1 Define the term Use case
4.5.9.2 Know the purposes of Use case diagram
4.5.9.3 Learn to draw the Use case diagram
4.5.10 Interaction diagram
4.5.10.1 State the purpose of Interaction diagram
4.5.10.2 Interaction diagrams
4.5.10.3 List interaction diagrams(sequence & collaboration)
4.5.10.4 Learn to draw the Interaction diagrams
4.6 Concept of Software Coding
4.6.1 Coding Standards
4.6.2 Coding Guidelines
4.6.3 Code Review
4.6.4 Code Walk Throughs
4.6.5 Code Inspection
4.6.6 Clean Room Testing
4.6.7 Software Documentation
4.6.8 Software Testing
173
5.0 Testing, Debugging, Reliability, Quality Management & Maintenance
5.1 Understand Testing
5.1.1 What is Testing?
5.1.2 Differentiate Verification and Validation
5.1.3 List 3Designs of Test Cases
5.1.4 Compare Testing in the Large vs Testing in the Small
5.1.5 Explain Unit Testing
5.1.6 Explain Black box Testing
5.1.7 Explain White Box Testing.
5.1.8 Explain Open source software testing tools : Selenium, Bugzilla
5.2 Debugging
5.2.1 Explain Debugging Approaches.
5.2.2 List the Debugging Guidelines.
5.3 Explain Program Analysis Tools
5.3.1 Static Analysis Tools
5.3.2 Dynamic Analysis Tools
5.4 List and Explain Integration Testing
5.5 Explain System Testing
5.6 Explain Performance Testing.
5.7 Understand the concept of Software Reliability
5.7.1 Differentiate Hardware Reliability and Software Reliability
5.7.2 List the different Reliability Metrics
5.7.3 Understand the Reliability Growth Modeling
5.8 State the importance of Statistical Testing
5.9 Explain Software Quality Management systems
5.10 Explain SEI Capability Maturity Model
COURSE CONTENT
1. Introduction to Software Engineering- Life Cycle Models.
2. Software Project Management- Responsibilities of a Software Project
Manager- Project planning – Metrics-Project Estimation Techniques- Staffing Level
Estimation - Scheduling – Risk Management
3. Requirement Analysis and Specification: Requirement Gathering and Analysis - SRS
document
4. Software Design , Coding : Good software design, Cohesion and Coupling, Software Design
Approaches, User interface Design, Software Coding and
Goals of UML - Role of UML in Object oriented Design - Building blocks of UML : Things,
Relationships, and Diagrams - Symbols used in UML notation - Classify and list standard UML
diagrams - Class diagram, purposes of class diagram, draw the class diagram - Use case
diagram, define the term Use case, purposes of Use case diagram, draw the Use case
diagram - Interaction diagram, purposes of Interaction diagram, the types of interaction
diagrams : Sequence diagram and Collaboration diagram, draw the Interaction diagrams.
5. Software Testing, Debugging, Reliability, Quality Management and maintenance – Testing,
Debugging software Reliability- Statistical Testing, Software Quality, Software Quality
Management System, SEI capability Maturity Model
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Fundamentals of Software Engineering – Rajib Mall ( PHI)Second Edition.
2. Software Engineering - Jawadekar (TMH)
3. Software Engineering Concepts - Fairley (TMH)
174
4. Pankaj Jalote international approach to software engineering “:2nd edition
Narosal publishing house 1997
5. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/uml/
6. The Unified Modelling Language User guide…Grady Booch

175
WEB TECHNOLOGIES
Course No. of Total No. of

Course Title Marks for FA Marks for SA
code Periods/Weeks periods
CM-402 Web 5 75 20 80
Technologies
Time Schedule
No. of No. of
Questions Questions
1. Principles of Web Designing 11 21 2 1.5 CO1

and HTML Introduction.
2. Understand various HTML 14
tags and usage of style 21 2 1.5 CO1,CO2
sheets.
3. Understand XML and Client 18
side scripting using Java 26 2 2 CO2
Script.
4. J Query 10 13 1 1 CO3
5. Web servers and 22

Server side scripting using 29 3 2 CO4
PHP
Total 75 110 10 8
Course Objectives i) Understand the basic elements of web page

ii) Know the working with HTML, CSS
iii) To familiarize the various Technologies like Java Script, J Query, PHP.
iv)To understand Database connectivity Using PHP
CO1 Implement interactive web page(s) using HTML and CSS
CO2 Know how to format and validate Web page elements using
JavaScript and describe data in a web page using XML.
Course Outcomes
CO3 To know the Usage of J Query
CO4 Build Dynamic web site using server side PHP Programming and
database connectivity using PHP.
176
LEARNING OUTCOMES:
1. Principles of Web Designing and HTML Introduction.
1.1 Understand the principles of Web Designing

1.1.1 Basic web Terminology.
1.1.2 Describe Anatomy of web page.
1.1.3 Understand different Web page elements.
1.1.4 Navigate through web pages
1.1.5 Narrate steps in building web site
1.1.6 Narrate steps in launching
1.1.7 Narrate maintaining web site.
1.2 HTML Introduction
1.2.1 Introduction and Overview of HTML
1.2.2 Discuss the rules for designing a HTML document.
1.2.3 Explain the structure of HTML document.
1.2.4 Define HTML element and Attribute.
1.2.5 Study the basic tags in HTML <html>, <head>, <title>, <body>.
1.2.6 Study the header tags <h1> to <h6>
1.2.7 Discuss the Physical formatting tags <b>, <i>, <u>, <strike>, <sub>, <sup>, big>,
<small>, <tt>
1.2.8 Discuss the Logical formatting tags <q>, <strong>, <cite>, <<ins>, <del>,<em>
1.2.9 Discuss the <marquee> with attributes.
1.2.10 List Character entities.
1.2.11 Explain the List tags like <ul>, <ol>, <li>, <dl>, <menu> with attributes.
1.3 Describe the setting of tables.
1.3.1 Describe the tags <table>, <tr>, <td>, <th>,<tbody>, <thead>, <tfoot>
2. Understand various HTML tags and usage of style sheets.
2.1 Explain the link and imaging tags <a>, <img> with attributes.
2.2 Explain<object> tag with attributes.
2.2.1 Explain the tags, <form>, <input>, <button>, <label>, <select>, <options>,
<textarea>, <legend> with attributes.
2.3 Explain the tags, <frame>, <frameset>, <noframe>, <iframe> with attributes.
2.4 Illustrate about cascading style sheets
2.4.1 Under stand the level of styles inline, internal and external style sheets.
2.4.2 Explain ID and Class selectors in CSS
2.4.3 Explain about Color and background properties
2.4.4 Explain about Box properties like Border, position, margin, padding of elements.
3. Understand XML and Java Script.

3.1 Understand XML
3.1.1 Describe how to organize data in the form of XML.
3.1.2 Explain the rules for designing XML document.
3.1.3 Understand the significance of Namespace.
3.1.4 List the various applications of XML.
3.2 Types of scripting-JavaScript
3.2.1 Differentiate between Client-side and Server-side scripting.
3.2.2 List Client side and server side scripting languages.
3.2.3 Describe the features of Java Script.
177
3.2.4 Placing JavaScript code in HTML.
3.2.5 Understand functions
3.2.5.1 Know how to define and call a function.
3.2.5.2 Know how to pass parameters.
3.2.5.3 Understand the purpose of GetElementBId method
3.2.5.4 Describe the global functions provided by JavaScript.
3.2.6 Form Handling in Java Script
3.2.7 Illustrate Arrays
3.2.7.1 Understand single and multi dimensional arrays.
3.2.7.2 Design small programs using arrays.
3.2.8 Various Objects provided by JavaScript
3.2.8.1 Math object
3.2.8.2 String object
3.2.8.3 Date object
3.2.8.4 Boolean and Number object
3.2.9 Describe events in java script.
4. J Query
4.1. Define J Query
4.2. List the features of J Query
4.3. List J Query plug ins
4.4. Explain the steps for to include j Query in Web Pages
4.5. Explain J Query Syntax with example program
4.6. Describe the j Query Selectors
4.7. Accessing HTML elements by using Element Selectors, ID, Class Selectors
4.8. Explain the J Query Document Ready Event
4.9. Describe the J Query Event handling methods
4.9.1. Mouse Events
4.9.2. Keyboard Events
4.9.3. Form Events,
4.9.4. Document/Window events
4.10. Explain effects of J Query like hide, show, fade In, fadeout, fade Toggle ,fade To,
slide Down, Slide Up, Slide Toggle
4.11. Explain Functions in J Query like text(),html(), val(), attr(),css().
5 Web servers and Server-side scripting using PHP.
5.1 Web servers:
5.1.1 Understand the architecture of a Web server.
5.1.2 List various web servers.
5.1.3 Illustrate the various HTTP request types and their difference.
5.1.4 Compare the properties of IIS and Apache.
5.2 Fundamentals of PHP
5.2.1 State the importance of PHP
5.2.2 Explain how to combine HTML and PHP.
5.2.3 Explain how to access HTML, PHP documents from web servers.
5.3 Data types, Variables and Constants
5.3.1 List Data types
5.3.2 Explain Data types with examples
5.3.3 Explain how to declare Variables and Constants.
5.4 List and explain string manipulation functions.
5.5 Understand Arrays
5.5.1 Explain types of arrays.
178
5.5.2 Design small programs using arrays.
5.6 Explain form handling in PHP
5.6.1 Access elements of form using $_GET,$_POST
5.7 Know how to access My SQL Database
5.7.1 List and explain My SQL database functions in PHP.
5.7.2 Explain the steps of connecting to a Database.
5.7.3 Know about retrieving data from a table.
5.7.4 Know about inserting data into a table.
5.7.5 Know about updating the data in a table.
5.7.6 Know about deleting data from a table.
5.7.7 Design some simple programs to insert, delete, update and retrieve data from
database.
5.8 Cookies
5.8.1 Define Cookie.
5.8.2 Know how to create and delete a cookie.
5.8.3 Know the purpose of cookie.
5.9 Sessions
5.9.1 Define Session
5.9.2 Understand how to create a session.
5.9.3 Know how to destroy a session.
5.9.4 Know the purpose of session.
5.9.5 Differentiate Sessions and Cookies.
5.10 Passing data from one web page to other webpage using query string.
COs-POs Mapping Strength:
Course Course Title: Web Technologies No. of periods:75

Code CM- Number of course outcomes:04
402
POs Mapped with CO No. CO Periods Level Remarks
Addressing PO in
column1 (1,2,3)
No %
PO1 CO1 25 30 2 >40% Level3

Highly addressed
PO2 CO2,CO3,CO4 60 70 3
PO3 CO1,CO2,CO3,CO4 60 70 3 25% to 40% Level 2

Moderately Addressed
PO4
PO5 C01,CO2,CO3,CO4 50 60 3 5% to 25% Level1

Low addressed
PO6 <5% Not addressed
PO7 CO3 60 70 3
179
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Principles of Web Designing and HTML Introduction
Principles of Web Designing:

Anatomy of Web page, Format, Elements, Navigation, Building, Launching and maintaining
web site
HTML:
Introduction to HTML, Format of web page, Tags and attributes, Formatting text, Adding
images, Positioning. Lists, Colors, Tables.
2. HTML & CSS
Connecting to hyperlinks and Imaging, Forms, Frames, Frame
CSS: Introduction, Inline styles, Embedded style sheets, conflicting styles, Linking external
Style sheets, Positioning elements, Backgrounds, Element dimensions
3. XML & JavaScript
XML: Introduction, Structuring Data, XML Namespaces, Applications of XML
JAVA SCRIPT
Introduction to Scripting, Client-Side versus Server-Side Scripting, JavaScript features,
Functions – Function definitions, Use of Get Element By Id, Get Element By Name,Global
functions, Form handling.
Arrays – Declaring and allocating arrays, References and reference parameters, passing
arrays to functions, sorting and Searching arrays, Multiple-Subscripted arrays
Objects – Math object, String object, Date object, Boolean and Number object.
4. J Query
Introduction to J query, Features of J Query, Plugin used in J Query, steps for to include J
Query in Web Page, J Query Syntax, j Query Selectors- Element, Selectors, ID, Class,
Document Ready Event, J Query Event handling methods, effects of J Query, Functions in J
Query
5. Web servers and Server side scripting using PHP.
Web servers: Introduction, HTTP Request Types, System Architecture, Client-Side versus
Server-Side Scripting, Accessing Web Servers-IIS, Apache, Requesting HTML, PHP documents.
PHP: Fundamentals of PHP, Data types, String functions, Arrays, form handling, Databases,
Cookies, Sessions, Passing data from one web page to other web page.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1) Principles of Web Design, Sklar, TMH
2) HTML complete reference, Powell, TMH
3) Basics of Web Site Design, NIIT – PHI
4) WWW Design with HTML, Xavier (TMH)
5) Internet & World Wide Web, Dietel and Dietel, Pearson education Asia.
6) Complete Reference PHP, Steven Holzer-McGraw Hill
7) J Query Cook book, O' Reilly Media
8) www.w3schools.com
9) www.php.net
180
No. of Total No. of
Computer
Organization
CM-403 5 75 20 80
and
Microprocessors
Time Schedule
No. of No. of
Questions Questions
1. CPU Organization 12 16 2 1 CO1
Information representation
2. 22 26 2 2 CO2
and Arithmetic Operations
3. Memory Organization 14 26 2 2 CO3
4. I/O Organization 15 26 2 2 CO4
Introduction to 8086 and

5. 12 16 2 1 CO5
Advanced Processors
Total 75 110 10 8
i) To know about Processor organization

Course Objectives ii) To familiarize information Representation and arithmetic operations
iii)To understand how memory and i/o is organized in an effective way
iv)To study Advanced processor concepts
CO1 CM-403.1 Explain the Basic computer organization techniques
Course CO2 CM-403.2 Analyse various information representations

Outcomes
CO3 CM-403.3 Analyse various algorithms of Arithmetic operations
CO4 CM-403.4 Explain the peripheral organization
CO5 CM-403.5 Describe the Features of Microprocessors
181
CO-PO/PSO Matrix:
CM-403.1 3 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 1
CM-403.2 3 3 3 2 1 3 2 2
CM-403.3 3 3 3 2 1 3 2 3
CM-403.4 3 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 2
CM-403.5 3 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1
Average 3 2.5 2.5 1.6 1 1.6 1 2.5 1.5 2
Learning Outcomes:
1.0 CPU ORGANIZATION

1.1 Draw the functional block diagram of Digital computer and explain the
function of each unit.
1.2 Define Register
1.3 State the purpose of
1.3.1 Accumulator
1.3.2 Program counter
1.3.3 Instruction Register
1.3.4 Memory Buffer Register
1.3.5 Memory Address Register
1.4 Draw the block diagram of simple accumulator based CPU.
1.5 Explain the function of each unit.
1.6 Define the terms micro operation, macro operation,
1.7 Define instruction cycle, fetch cycle and execution cycle.
1.8 What is stored program concept
1.9 Describe the sequential execution of a program stored in memory by the CPU
1.10 Flynn's classification of Computers
1.10.1 Single instruction stream, single data stream (SISD)
1.10.2 Single instruction stream, multiple data stream (SIMD)
1.10.3 Multiple instruction stream, single data stream (MISD)
1.10.4 Multiple instruction stream, multiple data stream (MIMD)
2.0 Information representation and Arithmetic Operation
2.1 List and Explain basic types of information representation in a computer.
2.2 Define floating point representation and fixed point representation of numbers.
2.3 Illustrate the floating point and fixed point representations with example.
2.4 Distinguish between Fixed point and Floating point representations.
2.5 What is Instruction format
2.6 Define terms Op code, Operand and address.
2.7 Instruction formats with examples
2.7.1 Zero address instructions
2.7.2 One address instruction
2.7.3 Two address instructions
2.7.4 Three address instructions
2.8 Define addressing mode
182
2.9 List and explain various addressing modes.
2.10 Illustrate Fixed point operations with numerical examples
2.10.1 Addition operation
2.10.2 Subtraction operation
2.10.3 Multiplication operation
2.10.4 Division operation
2.11 Explain the fixed point addition and subtraction operations with flowchart.
2.12 Explain the Fixed point multiplication operation with flowchart.
2.13 Explain the Fixed point division operation with flowchart.
2.14 Illustrate floating point operations with numerical example
2.14.1 Addition operation
2.14.2 Subtraction operation
2.14.3 Multiplication operation
2.14.4 Division operation
2.15 Illustrate Floating point normalization with numerical example
2.16 Explain floating point addition, subtraction operations with flowchart
2.17 Explain floating point multiplication operation with flowchart
2.18 Explain floating division operation with flowchart.
3.0 Memory Organization
3.1 Describe types of Memories (Subtraction operation)
3.2 Distinguish between main and auxiliary memory.
3.3 State the need for memory hierarchy in a computer.
3.4 Explain memory hierarchy in a computer in detail
3.5 State the significance of various memory device characteristics: access time, access rate,
alterability, permanence of storage, cycle time.
3.6 Differentiate between RAM and CAM
3.7 Explain Associative Memory
3.8 Explain the principle of virtual memory organization in a computer system
3.9 Explain virtual address and physical address organization.
3.10 State the principle of locality of reference
3.11 Explain Cache memory organization.
3.12 Explain Multi level Cache Organization (L1,L2 & L3 cache)
3.13 Explain principle of memory interleaving in a computer.
3.14 List advantages of Memory Interleaving
4.0 I/O Organization
4.1 List peripheral devices that can be connected to a computer.
4.2 Define Interface.
4.3 Describe the need for an interface.
4.4 List modes of date transfer.
4.5 Explain synchronous and asynchronous data transfer.
4.6 Differentiate between synchronous and asynchronous data transfer.
4.7 Explain hand shaking procedure of data transfer.
4.8 Explain programmed I/O method of data transfer.
4.9 Explain interrupted initiated I/O.
4.10 Explain DMA controlled transfer.
4.11 Explain priority interrupt : polling and daisy chaining priority.
4.12 Describe about bus system
4.13 Differentiate between i/o bus and memory bus
5.0 Introduction to 8086 and Advanced Processors
5.1 Define Microprocessor
183
5.2 List different types of processors.
5.3 List characteristics of CISC and RISC processors
5.4 Differentiate Between CISC and RISC
5.5 List Features of 8086 microprocessor
5.6 Draw the pin diagram 8086 microprocessor and describe the Pins and signals of 8086.
5.7 Draw the functional block diagram of 8086 microprocessor and describe the function of
each block in 8086.
5.8 List Features of 80286, 80386, 80486 and Pentium processors.
5.9 Draw the functional block diagram of Intel Pentium processor and explain function of
each unit.
5.10 Distinguish between 8086,80286,80386,80486.
Course Contents
Processor Organization - functional block diagram of Digital computer -Simple accumulator-
based CPU and function of each unit. -Stored program concept – Flynn’s classification
Information representation and Arithmetic Operation- Basic types of information
representation - floating point representation and fixed-point representation of numbers,
Operand, Op code and address - zero address, one address, two address and three address
instructions - different addressing modes. -fixed point addition and subtraction,
multiplication and division operations - floating point addition, subtraction, multiplication
and division operations with flowcharts.
Organization of Computer Memory system - Main and auxiliary memory -Need for memory
hierarchy in a computer -Significance of various memory devices characteristics: access time,
access rate, alterability , permanence of storage, cycle time - Associative Memory-Virtual
memory organization in a computer system - Virtual address and physical address
organization.-Principle and advantage of cache memory organization- Principle of memory
interleaving in a computer – Differentiate between RAM and CAM – operations with
Input and output organization - Peripheral devices -Need for an interface-Three modes of
date transfer - Synchronous and asynchronous data transfer -Hand shaking procedure of
data transfer -Programmed I/O method of data transfer-Interrupted initiated I/O-DMA
controlled transfer-Priority interrupt, polling, and daisy chaining priority-Bus systems
Fundamentals of 8086 and Advanced Processors- Different types of processors. -CISC and
RISC processor - Features of 8086 microprocessor- pin diagram 8086 microprocessor -
Functional block diagram of 8086 microprocessor -Features of 80286, 80386, 80486 and
Pentium processors. Functional block diagram of Intel Pentium processor -Distinguish
between 8086,80286,80386,80486 -
Reference Books
1. Structured Computer Organization -- Andrews Tenenbaum.
2. Computer Organization -- Govindarajulu (TMH).
3. Computer Organization & Architecture -- William Stallings
4. Computer System Architecture -- Morris Mano
5. Computer Organization – Car Hamacher, Zvonks Vranesic, Safwat Zaky, V Edition, McGraw Hill,
2002.
6. Computer Architecture and Organization – John P. Hayes, Mc Graw Hill International
editions, 1998.
7. Computer architecture and organization , 4th edition , P Chakraborty , JAICO publishers
8. Microprocessors & Interfacing -- Douglas V.Hall
9. Multi Level cache organization --
https://www.geeksforgeeks.org/multilevel-cache-organisation/?ref=rp
184

185
No. of Total No. of
OOP through
CM-404 5 75 20 80
Java
Time Schedule
No. of No. of
Questions Questions
Object oriented programming

13 1 1
1. concepts and Basics of java, 13 CO1,CO2
Overloading
Concepts of inheritance,
26 2 2
2. overriding, Interfaces and 13 CO2
Packages
3. I/O Streams and Collections. 15 21 2 1.5 CO3
Exception handling and
21 2 1.5
4. Multi-threaded 14 CO4
programming.
Applets, AWT and Event 29 3 2
5. 20 CO4,CO5
Handling
Total 75 110 10 8
i) To know applying object oriented programming paradigm in problem solving

on the platform of Sun Microsystems.
Course
ii) Able to design multi tasking application with the knowledge of multi
Objectives threading.
iii) Familiarized to develop graphical user interface with event handling
mechanism.

Know the object oriented programming concepts in
CO1 CM-404.1 problem solving. Use syntaxes and semantics of object
oriented paradigm.
Design optimized definition for an application with
CO2 CM-404.2 reusability features and packages in project
Course development.
Outcomes Knows the usage of utilities in real time data
CO3 CM-404.3
structures.
Demonstrate multithreading concepts to implement
CO4 CM-404.4
multitasking and multi programming applications.
CO5 CM-404.5 Demonstrate to design effective dynamic user
186
interface for any front end applications using Applets
and events.
CO-PO/PSO Matrix:
CM-404.1 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 2
CM-404.2 1 3 3 3 1 3 1 1 3 1
CM-404.3 3 2 3 2 2 3 1 1 3 3
CM-404.4 1 1 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 2
CM-404.5 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 3 3
Average 2 2 2.5 2.4 1.6 3 1.5 1.6 3 2.2
Learning Outcomes:
1.0 Object oriented programming concepts and Basics of java and over loading
1.1 Know about object oriented programming
1.2 Compare procedure oriented programming and object oriented programming
1.3 List and explain features of object oriented programming
1.4 Importance of Java in Internet programming.
1.5 Explain features of Java. Define Byte codes of Java, JVM.
1.6 How to write and executing a Java program. List different keywords and comment
statements in Java.
1.7 Explain data types, scope and life time of variables.
1.8 Describe conversion and casting features.
1.9 Apply one-dimensional and two–dimensional arrays give example programs.
1.10 Illustrates usage of conditional and iteration statements of Java with an example programs.
1.12 Describe usage of jump statements, break, and continue statements.
1.13 Describe how to create classes and objects.
1.14 Demonstrate Usage of new operator and methods.
1.15 Explain usage of constructors with an example programs.
1.16 Apply method overloading and construction overloading in applications.
1.17 Describe usage of ‘this’ pointer with example.
1.18 Explain usage of static in variables, methods, and blocks.
1.19 Explain about string classes.
1.20 Usage of command-line arguments.
2.0 Concepts of in heritance, over riding, Inter faces and Packages
2.1 Explain implementation of inheritance with an example program.
2.2 Illustrate how to implement multilevel inheritance with an example program.
2.3 Explain method overriding and usage of super keyword.
2.4 Describe concept of Interfaces.
2.5 Define an Interface.
187
2.6 Differences between abstract classes and interface.
2.7 Explain how to implement interfaces with sample program.
2.8 Define a package.
2.9 Explain the concept of class path.
2.10 Describe concept of Access protection.
2.11 Illustrate the mechanism of importing packages.
2.12 Give simple application to design packages with sample programs.
3.0 I/O Streams and Collections.
3.1 List different types of I/O streams.
3.2 Explain how to read and write data through console input and output streams.
3.3 Explain various file access operation by using FileStreams.
3.4 Explain sample programs on above streams.
3.5 What is collection frame work and Hierarchy of collection frame work.
3.6 List Collection Interfaces and explain the following with examples
3.6.1 List
3.6.2 Set
3.6.3 Queue
3.6.4 Deque
3.7 List Collection classes and explain the following with examples
3.7.1 Array List
3.7.2 Linked List
3.7.3 Hash Set
3.8 How to access a Collection via an Iterator?
4.0 Exception handling and Multi threaded programming.
4.1 Describe sources of errors.
4.2 Give advantages of Exception handling.
4.3 Types of exceptions: Checked & Unchecked
4.4 Apply following key words to handling exceptions through sample programs
4.4.1 Try
4.4.2 Catch
4.4.3 Finally
4.4.4 Throw
4.4.5 Throws
4.5 Explain concept of Multi-catch statements with example.
4.6 Explain how to write nested try in exception handling with example.
4.7 Describe built in exceptions.
4.8 Describe multithreading.
4.9 Explain Thread life cycle and states
4.10 Explain how to Creating single thread with example program.
4.11 Explain how to Creating multi thread with example program.
4.12 Illustrate thread priorities in multiple threads with an example.
4.13 Describe the concept of synchronization with example program.
5.0 Applets, AWT, Event Handling.
5.1 Describe the basics of Applets – Life cycle of an applet.
5.2 Describe steps for design and execute sample applet program
5.3 Explain Graphics class methods
5.3.1 Update()
5.3.2 Paint()
5.3.3 Drawing Lines, Rectangle, circles, polygons
5.4 Working with Color Font classes.
188
5.5 Describe AWT classes
5.6 Explain how to design Frame window with example.
5.7 Describe Types of Events
5.8 List and explain sources of events.
5.9 List and explain different event classes.
5.10 List and explain event listener interfaces
5.11 Demonstrate event handling mechanism.
5.12 Demonstrate handling mouse events with sample program.
5.13 Demonstrate handling keyboard events with sample program.
5.14 Explain how to use AWT controls in applet programming
5.14.1 Labels.
5.14.2 Buttons.
5.14.3 Text Fields
5.14.4 Checkboxes.
5.14.5 Lists.
5.14.6 Choice
5.14.7 Scrollbars.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Basics of java and overloading: object oriented programming -Importance of Java to Internet
– Byte codes. Features of Java: OOPS concepts –Data types –type conversions – casting –
Arrays. Usage of classes – objects – new – methods – constructors – method overloading,
string classes – command line arguments-static members-this pointer
2. Concepts In heritance Over riding Interfaces and Package:-Usages of Inheritance:
inheritance super class, sub classes – Multi level inheritance – super keyword -overriding –
Abstract classes-Interfaces-Packages.
3. Concepts of I/O Streams and Collections :I/O streams-Accessing data through console input
and output-Collection Frame work- Collection Interfaces – Collection Classes-Iterator
4. Exception Handling and Multi threading: – Exception handling: Source of errors – error
handling – Exception handling-Multi catch statements- Define thread – life cycle of thread -
Multi threading –Synchronization- Inter thread communication – Dead locks – Thread
properties.
5. Applets, AWT and Event Handling : Basics of Applets – life cycle of an applet-Working with
Graphics-color-fonts-AWT classes-Event classes-Listener interfaces-keyboard and Mouse
events-AWT controls-Buttons-Text Fields-Check Box-List
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. The complete reference Java -- Pattrick Naughten, Herbert Schildt

TMH Company Limited, New Delhi.
2. Programming in JAVA -- P. Radhakrishna, University Press
3. Programming in Java -- Muthu - Thomson
4. Java Foundations of Programming – NIIT, PHI
5. Programming with Java -- Balagurusamy, TMH
189

190
No. of
Course Total No. of
Course Title Periods/ Marks for FA Marks for SA
code periods
Weeks
Computer Networks&
CM-405 5 75 20 80
Cyber Security
Time Schedule
No. of No. of
Questions Questions
1. Introduction to Networks 15 16 2 1 CO1,CO2

2. Network Addressing and
15 16 2 1 CO2
Management
3. Introduction to Cyber security 15 16 2 1 CO3
4. Encryption Techniques 20 36 2 3 CO4
5. System security 10 26 2 2 CO5
Total 75 110 10 8
i. To know the different types of networks

ii. To know the Network components, devices and topologies.
iii. To understand managing Network using IP addresses and protocols
Course iv. To design and able to build network
Objectives v. To familiarise network administration
vi. To know about Network & system security
vii. To understand Encryption techniques
At the end of the course, the student shall able to
CO1 CM-405.1 Explain types of networks, cables and connectors
Course CO2 CM-405.2 Compare ISO&TCP/IP model, Network components,

Outcomes tools and topologies, protocols.
CO3 CM-405.3 Explain Network security
CO4 CM-405.4 Explain encryption techniques
CO5 CM-405.5 Explain System Security
191
CO-PO/PSO Matrix:
CM-405.1 0 0 1 3 2 0 3 3 0 0
CM-405.2 0 0 1 3 2 0 3 3 0 0
CM-405.3 1 0 2 2 1 0 1 3 0 0
CM-405.4 2 3 1 2 0 0 1 3 1 3
CM-405.5 1 0 2 2 1 0 1 3 0 0
Average 0.8 0.6 1.4 2.4 1.2 0 1.8 3 0.2 0.6
3 = strongly mapped, 2=moderately mapped, 1=slightly mapped
Learning Outcomes:
1.0 Introduction to Networks.

1.1 State the Need and importance of Networking.
1.2 Classification of Networks–LAN,MAN,WAN
1.3 List Various Network Communication Standards.
1.4 Explain the OSI Reference Model with its architecture and layer functions.
1.5 Explain the functions of each layer of TCP/IP Reference Model
1.6 Compare TCP/IP and OSI reference models.
1.7 Transmission media Cables
1.7.1 Coaxial Cables
1.7.2 Twisted-Pair Cables(Shielded, Unshielded)
1.7.3 Optical Fiber Cables
1.8 LAN Devices
1.8.1 Repeaters
1.8.2 Hubs
1.8.3 Switches
1.8.4 Network Interface Cards(NICs)
1.8.5 Routers
1.8.6 Modem
1.8.7 Gateways.
1.9 Network Topologies
1.9.1 Bus
1.9.2 Ring
1.9.3 Star
1.9.4 Mesh
1.9.5 Hybrid
2.0 Network Addressing and Management
2.1 Introduction to Network Addressing.
2.2 State the importance of TCP/IP addressing scheme
2.3 Explain TCP/IP Addressing Scheme.
192
2.4 Describe types of IP Address Classes.
2.5 State the need of subnet and its importance
2.6 List the advantages of sub netting
2.7 List disadvantages of sub netting
2.8 State the need of protocols in computer networks
2.9 PROTOCOLS
2.9.1 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol(HTTP)
2.9.2 File Transfer Protocol(FTP)
2.9.3 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol(SMTP)
2.9.4 Address Resolution Protocol(ARP)
2.9.5 Reverse Address Resolution Protocol(RARP)
2.9.6 Telnet
2.10 State the importance of Simple Network Management Protocol(SNMP)
2.11 Internet Protocol Addressing formats
2.11.1 IPv4
2.11.2 IPv6
2.11.3 IPV4 VS IPV6
3.0 Introduction to Network security
3.1 Define terms security and network security.
3.2 Explain OSI security architecture.
3.3 List different security goals.
3.4 Define cryptography.
3.5 Explain crypto system.
3.6 Explain authentication, Confidentiality, integrity w.r.t data.
3.7 Define terms passive and active security threats
3.8 Differentiate between passive and active security threats.
3.9 List and explain categories of passive and active security attacks.
3.10 List and explain categories of security services.
3.11 List and explain categories of security mechanisms.
3.12 Explain the Model for network security and with block diagram.
4.0 Encryption Techniques
4.1 Define Encryption
4.2 Define Decryption
4.3 List essential ingredients of a symmetric cipher.
4.4 Describe two basic functions used in encryption algorithms.
4.5 List keys required for two people to communicate via a cipher.
4.6 State the importance of public key and private key
4.7 Describe general approaches to attack a cipher.
4.8 Describe Caesar cipher.
4.9 Describe the mono-alphabetic cipher.
4.10 Describe Play fair cipher and Hill ciphers.
4.11 Discuss One-Time-Pad.
4.12 List the problems with the one-time pad.
4.13 Differentiate mono and poly-alphabetic ciphers.
4.14 Explain a transposition cipher.
4.15 Explain RSA algorithm
4.16 Explain steganography.
4.17 Illustrate ciphers with examples.
5.0 System security
5.1 Define Intruders
193
5.2 Define Intrusion detection system
5.3 Explain intrusion detection system
5.4 State the need of password management
5.5 Explain password management
5.6 SECURITY THREATS
5.6.1. Malicious softwares
5.6.2. Backdoor
5.6.3. Logic Bomb
5.6.4. Trojan Horses
5.6.5. Mobile Code Threat
5.6.6. Multiple-Threat Malware
5.7 VIRUS AND WORMS
5.7.1. Define terms virus and worm
5.7.2. Virus Nature and its Classification
5.7.3. Macro Viruses and Virus Kits
5.7.4. E-Mail Viruses
5.7.5. Virus Counter measures
5.7.6. Antivirus Approaches
5.7.7. Morris worm
5.7.8. worm attacks
5.7.9. Explain worm technologies
5.7.10. Explain mobile phone worms
5.8. Define cyber crime
5.9. Define Hacking
5.10. Describe how a worm propagates.
5.11. Describe worm countermeasures.
COURSE CONTENTS
1. Introduction to Networks: Need for network - Network classification- network standards -

Network Components - ISO reference model - TCP/IP model - Transmission media Cables-
LAN Devices -Network Topologies
2 Network Addressing and Management: Introduction to Network Addressing - TCP/IP

Addressing Scheme - IP Address Classes - Need of subnet and its importance -Advantages
and Disadvantages of subletting - Need of protocols in computer networks – All protocols-
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) - Internet Protocol Addressing formats
3 Introduction to Network security: Define terms security and network security–OSI security
architecture – security goals – cryptography - crypto system- Authentication,
Confidentiality, integrity w.r.t. data. - passive and active security threats – Categories of
passive and active security attacks – categories of security services - categories of security
mechanisms - Model for network security and with block diagram.
4 Encryption Techniques: Definition of Encryption, Decryption - List the essential ingredients

of a symmetric cipher - Two basic functions used in encryption algorithms - Keys required
for two people to communicate via a cipher - General approaches to attack a cipher -
Caesar cipher - mono-alphabetic cipher – Play fair cipher. and Hill cipher - One-Time-Pad -
problems with the one-time pad - transposition cipher - RSA algorithm – steganography -
Illustrate ciphers with examples.
194
5 SYSTEM SECURITY: Intruder - intrusion detection - password management - malicious
softwares -Backdoor - Logic Bomb - Trojan Horses - Mobile Code - Multiple-Threat Malware
– Definitions of terms virus and warm - Virus Nature and its Classification -Define Macro
Viruses and Virus Kits and E-Mail Viruses - Virus Counter measures - Antivirus Approaches -
Advanced Antivirus Techniques - Morries worm - worm attacks - worm technologies -
mobile phone worms - worm propagates – cybercrime - hacking

195
Course No. of Total No. of Marks for
Course Title Marks for SA
code Periods/Weeks periods FA
CM- 406 Web Technologies 4 60 40 60

Lab

No.
1. Exercise on HTML, CSS&XML 15 CO1
2. Exercises on Java Script, J Query 20 CO2, CO3
3. Exercises on PHP web applications and 25 CO3,CO4
Database Applications
Total Periods 60
i) Understand the principles of creating an effective web page
ii) To Know the working with HTML, CSS
iii) To acquire knowledge and skills for creation of web site considering
Course Objectives
both client and server side
iv) To familiarize the various Technologies like Java Script, JQuery, PHP.
V)To understand Database connectivity Using PHP
CO1 CM-406.1 Implement interactive web page(s) using HTML, CSS

and JavaScript.
CO2 CM-406.2 To know the Usage of J Query
CO3 CM-406.3 Build Dynamic web site using server side PHP
Course Outcomes Programming
CO4 CM-406.4 To know database connectivity using PHP.
CO5 CM-406.5 Develop real world application with different web
designing tools.
196
CO-PO/PSO Matrix:
CM-406.1 2 2 3 2 2 1 2 3 2
CM-406.2 1 3 3 3 1 3 1 3 3 3
CM-406.3 2 3 2 1 3 1 2 3 3
CM-406.4 1 1 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 3
CM-406.5 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 3 3
Average 1.5 2.6 3 2.6 1.5 3 1.5 2 3 1.5
LEARNING OUTCOMES
HTML, CSS and XML:

1. Exercise on basic HTML tags.
2. Design a HTML page using suitable table tags and attributes.
3. Design a HTML page with a form containing various controls.
4. Design a HTML page on if rames.
5. Exercise on style.
6. Exercise on designing an XML document.
JavaScript, AJAX & J Query:
7. Exercise on JavaScript functions.
8. Exercise on JavaScript arrays.
9. Write a program on mouse events using J Query.
10. Design a webpage to apply the Effects of J Query to HTML elements.
11. Exercise on changing background color using css () function in J Query.
12. Write a JavaScript program using Responsive Slides J query plug in (download from
responsiveslides.com)
PHP:
13. Install the following on local machine:
x Apache Web server
x My SQL
x PHP and configure it to work with Apache Web server and MySQL.
14. Exercise on PHP arrays.
15. Design a form and access the elements of form using PHP.
16. Write PHP program to perform various operations on a database table using functions.
17. Write a PHP program to set a cookie.
197
KEY COMPETENCIES
Exp. Name of the

No. experiment Objectives Key Competencies
1) Identify the editor required for

Exercise on basic HTML Create the HTML page writing HTML
1 tags with a title, heading, 2) Add the tags with relevant content
formatting and list tags 3) Save the file
in the body. 4) Open the file in browser
5) Test the results
1) Identify the tags for creating the
Create the HTML page table
Design a HTML page using with a table and that table 2) Add header, body and footer
2 suitable table tags and to the table.
should have a header,
attributes 3) Put some content in each
body and footer.
section of table
4) Save the file
5) Open the file in browser
6) Test the results
1) Identify the tags to add a
Create the HTML page with form and controls
3 Design a HTML page a form and add some 2) Add the form and put some
with a form containing controls like textbox, label controls in it.
various controls to the form. 3) Save the file
4) Open the file in browser
5) Test the results
1) Identify the tags for creating
Design a HTML page Create the HTML page multiple frames
on frames with multiple if rames so 2) Add some content to the
4 that content in each frames and use different
frame will have different formats, colors for each frame.
format and colors. 3) Save the file
4) Open the file in a browser
5) Test the results
6) Identify the editor required for
Create a style sheet which creating CSS
Design a style sheet to
contains selectors to set 7) Add selectors to set the
set the background background color, position and
5 the background color,
color, position and dimensions of an element.
position and dimensions
dimensions of a HTML 8) Save the CSS file
of a HTML element. 9) Link the CSS file to a valid HTML page.
element
10) Save the HTML page
11) Open the HTML page in a browser
12) Test the results
198
Exp. Name of the
6 Exercise on designing an XML Create an XML Document on 1) Identify the editor required for
document Student data creating XML
2) Add required elements for
student data
3) Save the XML file as .xml extension
4) Open the XML document in browser
5)Test the results
Write a JavaScript program 1) Create a HTML file

7 Exercise on JavaScript using function which 2) Write a JavaScript function which
functions performs sum of two adds two numbers.
numbers and function should 3) Add HTML button tag and assign a
call when button is clicked. function to on click attribute.
4) Save the HTML file.
6) Test the results
Resolve the errors if any through
debugging
Write JavaScript code to 1) Create a HTML file
Exercise on JavaScript arrays implement sorting like 2) Add elements to read array and to
8 reading an array of ‗n‘ sort.
numbers and sorting them in 3) Write the logic for sorting using
ascending order. iterative and conditional
statements.
4) Save the HTML file.
6) Test the results
debugging
1) Create a HTML file
Write a JavaScript 2) Add a div tag with some content and
Write a program on mouse
9 events using J Query program using J Query border.
which displays different 3) Write a J Query functions which
messages for mouse displays different messages when
mouse enters in div tag, mouse
events like mouse enter, leaves div tag and clicks on div tag.
mouse leave, click, 4) Save the HTML file.
dblclick 5) Open the HTML page in a browser
6) Test the results by moving mouse
over the div tag.
7) Resolve the errors if any through
debugging
199
Exp. Name of the

Write a JavaScript 2) Add a div tag with some content and
10 Design a webpage to apply program using J Query border.
the Effects of J Query which performs effects 3) Add some buttons
like hide, show, slide up 4) Write a J Query functions which
performs some effect when click on
fade In, fadeout, slide respective button.
Down, Slide Up 5) Save the HTML file.
7) Test the results by click on the
button.
debugging
11 Write a JavaScript 2) Add a div tag with some content
Exercise on changing
background color using CSS program using J Query 3) Add some buttons
properties in J Query which changes CSS 4) Write a J Query functions which
properties like color, changes CSS properties like color,
border when click on respective
background-color, border button.
etc. 5) Save the HTML file.
button.
debugging
2) Add J Query script tag.
12 3) Add slider plug in, which can be
Write a JavaScript program downloaded from
using the results plug in http://responsiveslides.com
(download from 4) Add plug ins file
Write a JavaScript
responsiveslides.com) 5) Add images
program using J Query 6) Write J Query code for display
which displays date slideshow of images
picker. 7) Save the HTML file.
button.
debugging
1) Identify version compatible
Install a web server which to system
Install the following on local
13 machine: supports PHP 2) Download the software
x Apache Web server 3) Install the server software
x My SQL 4) Configure the server
x PHP and configure it to 5) Write simple PHP program
work with Apache Web 6) Test the result
server and My SQL.
200
Exp. Name of the
1) Create a Philie.
Write PHP program to 2) Add elements to read array and
14 Exercise on PHP arrays implement searching like to find the smallest number.
reading an array of ‗' n' 3) Write the logic for sorting using
numbers and finding iterative and conditional
smallest among them. statements.
4) Save and run the page.
Test the result
Write a PHP program 2)Add form with two textboxes for
Design a form and access the which displays sum of two enter two numbers
15 elements of form using PHP numbers submitted by 3)Write a PHP program, which adds
the form two numbers submitted
by form and display the sum.
4)Place the files in server
5)Open the HTML file in browser
6)Test the results
1) Understand the process of
Write PHP code to connecting to database and
Write PHP code to
16 perform retrieval, execute commands.
perform various
insertion, modification 2) Create a PHP file.
operations on a
and deletion of data in a 3) Add required elements to the page.
database table using
database table using 4) Write the logic to retrieve, insert,
functions. update and delete data in the table
functions
using functions.
6) Test the result
17 1) Understand the significance of
Write a PHP program to Write PHP code to create a cookies.
set a cookie. cookie and put some 2) Create a PHP file.
3) Write the logic to create and
information in it.
set a cookie
5) Test the result.
201
No. of Total No. of
Java
CM-407 Programming 4 60 40 60
Lab

No.
1. Basics, overloading, inheritance, 16 CO1,CO2

overriding
2. Streams, Interfaces and Packages 10 CO2,CO3
and Collections.
3. Exceptions and Multi threaded 14 CO3,CO4
programming.
4. Applets and Event Handling 20 CO5
Total Periods 60
i) Design object oriented programming paradigm

ii) Able to develop multi tasking application with the knowledge of multi
Course threading.
Objectives
iii) Familiarized to develop graphical user interface with event handling
mechanism.
CO1 Perform object oriented programming model application design.

CO2 Design optimized definition for an application with reusability features like
Course inheritance and polymorphism.
Outcomes CO3 Analyze modular design for real time applications by using packages
concept in projects. Able to design data structures used in applications.
CO4 Apply multi threading concepts to implement multitasking and multi
programming applications.
CO5 Develop effective dynamic user interface for any front end applications
using Applets and events.
CO-PO/PSO Matrix:
CM-407.1 2 1 3 2 2 1 2 3 3
CM-407.2 1 3 3 3 1 3 2 2 3 3
CM-407.3 1 2 3 2 2 3 1 2 3 3
CM-407.4 1 1 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 3
CM-407.5 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 2 3 3
Average 1.5 2.6 3 2.6 1.5 3 1.6 2 3 3
202
Learning Outcomes
1. Exercise programs on conditional statements and loop statements

2. Exercise programs on Strings.
3. Exercise program to create class and objects and adding methods.
4. Exercise programs using constructors and construction over loading.
5. Exercise programs on command line arguments.
i) Input as command line arguments and perform operation on that data.
ii) Input as command line arguments and update manipulated data in Files.
6. Exercise programs using concept of overloading methods.
7. Exercise programs on inheritance.
8. Write a program using the concept of method overriding.
9. Exercise on packages.
i) Creation of packages
ii) Design module to importing packages from other packages.
10. Exercise programs on interfaces.
11. Exercise programs on I/O Streams
i) Reading data through Keyboard
ii) Perform Reading and Writing operations on files using File Streams.
12. Exercise programs on Collections.
i) Write a java program to search a student mark percentage based on pin number using
Array list.
ii) Write a java program to create linked list to perform delete, insert, and update data in
linked list with any application.
13. Exercise on exception handling.
i) Programs on try, catch and finally.
ii) Programs on multiple catch statements
iii) Programs on nested try statements.
14. Exercise on multithreading
i) Programs on creation of single and multiple threads.
ii) Programs on adding priorities to multiple threads.
15. Exercise on applets
i) Programs on Graphics and colors.
ii) Simple animations using threads and graphics.
16. Exercise on AWT controls
i) Program to handle mouse events.
ii) Program to handle keyboard events.
iii) Programs to illustrate Text Fields and Button control.
iv) Programs to illustrate Check Box and List control.
v) Write an application program to illustrate multiple controls.
203
KEY COMPETENCIES
Exp. Name of the

Objectives Key Competencies
No. experiment
1 Exercise programs on (a) Write program using if (a) Know the usage of IF and switch
conditional statements statement and switch statements.
and loop statements. (b) Write program using while, (b) Compile the program and rectify the
do and for constructs. errors.
(c) Observe the output.
2 Exercise programs on (a) Write a programs to (a) Create String objects
Strings. manipulate Strings (b) Use string class methods
(b) Write a programs to Observe the output.
arrange array of strings in
ascending order
3 Exercise program to (a) Write a program to create (a) Create class.
create class and objects a class and create objects. (b) Declare methods.
and adding methods. (b) Write a program to create (c) Create objects.
class adding methods and (d) Write main method.
access class members. (e) Access class members.
4 Exercise programs (a) Write a program using (a) Declare and define constructor.
using constructors and default constructor. (b) Call default constructor.
construction over (b) Write a program using (c) Call parameterized constructor.
loading. parameterized constructor. (d) observe constructor overloading.
5 Exercise programs on (a) Write a program to (a) Use command line arguments.
command line illustrate usage of (b) Run the program.
arguments. command line arguments. (c) Understand usage of Files.
(b) Write a program to read (c) Observe the output.
data as command line
arguments and update it
into Files.
6 Exercise programs (a) Write a program to (a) Observe method overloading.
using concept of illustrate method (b) Overload constructor methods.
overloading methods. overloading.
(b) Write a program to
illustrate method
overloading using
constructors.
7 Exercise on (a) Write a program to (a) Create base class.
inheritance. illustrate single inheritance. (b) Write base class constructor.
(b) Write a program to (c) Create derived class.
illustrate multiple (d) Use extends keyword.
inheritance. (e) Use super keyword.
(f) Write derived class constructor.
8 Write a program using Write a program using the (a) Use method overriding.
the concept of method concept of method (b) Use this keyword.
overriding. overriding. (c) use super keyword
9 Exercise on importing Write a program to create and (a) Create package.
packages. importing package. (b) Use of access specifiers.
204
(b) Use package.
(c) Use import keyword.
10 Exercise on interfaces. Write a program to illustrate (a) Define interface.

multiple inheritance using (b) Use extends keyword.
interfaces. (c) Use implements keyword.
(d) Access interface variables.
11 Exercise programs on (a) Write a program to give (a) Use different data types.
I/O Streams values to variables (b) Use read Line() method.
interactively through the (c) Use print ln() method.
keyboard. (d)use File Streams
(b) Write program to read and Observe the output.
write primitive data types.
(c) Write programs to handle
Files.
12 Exercise programs on (a) Write a java program to (a) Define collection classes
Collections. search a student mark (b) use Array List, Linked List
percentage based on pin (c) apply List and Iterator Interface
number using Array list.
(b)Write a java program to
create linked list to
perform delete, insert, and
update data in linked list
with any application.
13 Exercise on exception (a) Write a program to (a) Use try – catch.
handling illustrate exception (b) Use multiple catch blocks.
handling. (c) Use finally statement.
(b) Write a program to (d) use Nested try
illustrate exception
handling using multiple
catch statements.
(c) Write a program to
illustrate exception
handling using nested try.
14 Exercise on (a) Write a program to create (a) Use extends, new.
multithreading single a thread by (b) Use run() and start() methods.
extending the thread class. (c) Observe thread execution.
(b) Write a program to create (d) Use implements runnable interface.
a single thread by (e) Use set Priority() and get Priority()
implementing the runnable methods.
interface. (f) use wait(),notify() methods
(c) Write a program to create
multiple threads.
(d) Write a program to
illustrate thread priorities.
15 Exercise on applets. Write a program to create (a) Use <applet>…</applet> tag.
simple applet to display (b) Add applet to html file.
different shapes with (c) Run the applet.
colors. (d) use graphics methods
Write an applet program to (e) use threads and graphics.
205
design simple animation.
16 Exercise on AWT (a) Write an applet program to (a) Use keyboard event methods
controls handle key events. (b) Use mouse event methods
(b) Write an applet program to (c) Use Text Field class methods
handle mouse events. (d) Use button class methods
(c) Write an applet program to (e) Use Check box and List class methods
illustrate Text Field and
button control.
(d) Write an applet program to
illustrate Check box and
List control.
(e )Write an applet program to
illustrate multiple controls.
206
C23-CM-408: English Communication Skills ( Lab Practice )
Course Title : English Communication Course code: C23-CM- 408

Skills ( Common to all Branches)
Year/ Semester : IV Semester Number of Periods : 45
( 3 periods per week)
Type of Course : Practical Max Marks : 100
( Internal 40 + External 60 )
Course - to communicate effectively in diverse academic, professional and

Objectives: everyday situations
- exhibit appropriate body language and etiquette at workplace
- be employable through preparing appropriate job applications and

attend interviews confidently with all necessary skills
CO No.
CO1 Listen and comprehend the listening inputs related to different genres
effectively
CO2 Communicate effectively in interpersonal interactions, interviews, group

discussions and presentations
CO3 Acquire employability skills: job hunting, resume writing, attending

interviews
CO4 Practise appropriate body language and professional etiquette
Course Delivery: Text book: “English Communication Skills”

by State Board of Technical Education and Training, AP
Chapter. Unit Teaching

No Hours
1 Listening Skills 6
2 Workplace Etiquette 3
3 Introducing Oneself 3
207
4 Short presentation (JAM) 6
5 Group Discussion 6
6 Resume Writing and Cover Letter 3
7 Interview Skills 9
8 Presentation Skills 9
Total 45
Course Content:
UNIT I: Listening Skills 6 periods

Pre – While- Post-listening activities- Listening to audio content ( dialogues/ speech/
narrations) - answering the questions and fill in the blanks- vocabulary
UNIT 2: Workplace Etiquette 3 periods

Basics of Etiquette- politeness/ courtesy, good manners- features of work place etiquette-
adaptability, positive attitude, body language.
UNIT 3: Introducing Oneself 3 periods

Speak about oneself - introduce oneself to a gathering/ formal & informal situations-
Know about others- filling in the grid- introducing oneself in interviews
UNIT 4: Short Presentation 6 periods

Dos and Don’ts in short presentation- speak for a minute without repetition, deviation &
hesitation - the techniques to speak fluently – defining and describing objects, people,
phenomena, events.- speaking on randomly chosen topics.
UNIT 5: Group Discussion 6 periods

Fundamentals of Group Discussion- Dos and Don’ts- filling the Grid- possible list of
topics- practice sessions- sample videos-Group activity
UNIT 6: Resume Writing and Cover Letter 3 periods

Pre activity: answer the questions- jotting down biographical information- sample
resumes- tips, Dos and Don’ts- model resumes- practice exercises on Resume writing
UNIT 7: Interview Skills 9 periods

Pre –while-post activities: - things to do at three stages – respond to notifications- know
the information about the organisation-practice FAQs - preparation of good/ suitable C V,
Body language, tips for success in interviews, model / mock interviews.
UNIT 8: Presentation Skills 9 periods
208
Preparatory work: observe pictures and answer questions- different kinds of presentations-
PPTs, Flash cards, Posters, Charts. - tips to prepare aids, slide show, model PPTs, -
checklist on pre, while and post presentations.
Mapping Course Outcomes with Program outcomes:
PO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CO POs 1 to 5 are applications of Engineering 1,2,3,4 1,2,3,4

Principles, can‟t be directly mapped to English
Unit wise Mapping of CO –PO
CO Course Outcome COs / POs mapping Cognitive levels as

Unit per Bloom‟s
Mapped Taxonomy
R/U/A/An
( Remembering /
Understanding /
Applying/
Analyising)
CO 1 Listen and comprehend 6,7 R/U/A

listening inputs related
Unit 1
to different genres
effectively
CO2 Communicate Units 6,7 R/U/A/An

effectively in
3,4,5,7,8
interpersonal
interactions, interviews,
209
group discussions and
presentations
CO3 Acquire employability 6,7 R/U/A/An

skills: job hunting,
Units
resume writing,
attending interviews 6,7
CO4 Practice appropriate Units 6,7 R/U/A

body language and
2, 3,
professional etiquette
4,5,7,8
210
Total no
No of Marks Marks
Course Code Course title of
periods
CM-409 03 45 40 60
Cyber Security Lab
No. of
Periods
1. Computer Hardware 10 CO1,CO2,CO3
2. Computer Networking 15 CO3.CO4.CO5
3. CYBER SECURITY 20 CO4,CO5,CO6
Total 45
1. Identify all the components of mother board.

2. Modify AIMOS settings as required
3. Install drives, NIC card, modem
4. Install network devices, design and develop network.
5. Understand IP address classes and sub netting
COURSE
6. Prepare cross and straight Ethernet cables
OBJECTIVES
7. Install and configure proxy server
8. To learn Different Cipher Techniques
9. To Implement the Symmetric key Algorithms
10. To Implement the Asymmetric key Algorithms
11. To use the network security tools and vulnerability assessment tools
CO1 CM-409.1 Assemble the PC with suitable components.
CO2 CM-409.2 Install network devices, design and develop network

Install any network device and configure
Course
CO3 CM-409.3 Develop the cipher techniques for encryption
Outcomes
CO4 CM-409.4 Implement symmetric key Algorithms
CO5 CM-409.5 Demonstrate Asymmetric key Algorithm
211
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
CM-409.1 1 0 1 2 1 0 2 3 0 0
CM-409.2 1 0 2 2 1 0 1 3 1 0
CM-409.3 1 0 2 1 0 0 1 2 2 1
CM-409.4 1 0 2 1 0 0 1 2 2 1
CM-409.5 1 0 2 1 0 0 1 2 2 1
Average 1 0 1.8 1.4 0.4 0 1.2 2.4 1.4 0.6
Learning Outcomes:
Computer Hardware
1. Identification of various Hardware components on Motherboard
2. Using various options of CMOS setup
3. Print the summary of your system Hardware and verify for correctness
4. Hard drive, optical drive installation.
5. How to recover lost data on hard drive.
Computer Networking
6. Preparing the Ethernet cable for cross and direct connections using crimping tool and test
using LAN tester.
7. Installation of a switch and connecting systems to a network switch.
8. Installation of a modem (internal, external or USB) and connecting to internet.
9. Using FTP for uploading and downloading files.
10. Installation and configuring the proxy server for internet access.
11. Setting of IP address to an existing terminal
CYBERSECURITY CONCEPTS:
SYMMETRIC KEY ENCRYPTION TECHNIQUES
12. perform encryption and decryption by using Caesar Cipher technique
13. Exercise encryption and decryption by using Play fair Cipher technique
14. Exercise encryption and decryption by using Hill Cipher technique
15. perform encryption and decryption by using Vigenere Cipher
ASYMMETRIC KEY ENCRYPTION TECHNIQUES
16. Perform encryption and decryption using RSA public and private key.
17. To perform the validation of the digital document using Digital signature standard encryption
and decryption
18. To perform the procedure of installation process of antivirus to detect threats.
19. Learn the procedure to ensure security basic firewalls can be enabled in the system.
212
The competencies and key competencies to be achieved by the student
S.N Name of the Objectives Key Competencies

o. experiment
1 Exercise on Identification and Identify and note down mother board ,

Identification and familiarization of various Components and Chips.
familiarization of components of computer Identify various Internal and External slots
in the mother board and clean them with
various system.
blower/ Brush.
components of
Practice Inserting and Removing RAM with
computer system. care.
Measure the Output voltages of SMPS.
2 Exercise on various Perform various operations Identify location of CMOS battery on

operations and and modifications required mother board.
modifications for CMOS setup. Know how to replace CMOS battery.
Identify keyboard key for entering BIOS
required for CMOS
setup.
setup. Setup CMOS settings
Check the status of CMOS settings after
replacement.
3 Exercise on Print Print the summary of your Know how to open system summary
the summary of system Hardware and window
verify for correctness Check whether all the hardware peripherals
your system
are working properly or not.
Hardware and
Know how to install device drivers
verify for Know how to enable and disable hardware
correctness peripherals.
Print the hardware summary page.
4 Exercise on Hard Hard drive, optical drive Hard drive:

drive, optical drive installation.
Identify the Hard drive slot.
installation.
Know how to remove power supply and
SATA cables from Hard drive.
Unscrew Hard drive from computer case
Replace new Hard drive and fix it in
computer case
Know how to connect power supply cable
and SATA cables to Hard drive
Check for the working condition of new
Hard Drive.
Optical drive:
Identify the Optical drive slot.

Know how to remove power supply and
SATA cables from Optical drive.
213
Unscrew Optical drive from computer case
Replace new Optical drive and fix it in
computer case
Know how to connect power supply cable
and SATA cables to Optical drive
Check for the working condition of Optical
drive.
SSD DRIVES:
Identify SSD slots

How to install SSD drives
5 Exercise on How to recover lost data Verify the available recovery tools of
recovery of lost on hard drive. Operating system.
data on hard drive. Know how to recover lost data on Hard
drive using Restore point.
Know how to recover lost data on Hard
drive using Recovery Image.
6 Exercise on Preparing the Ethernet Know the color pattern of Ethernet cable for
Preparing the cable for cross and direct direct connection.
Prepare UTP cable for direct connection
Ethernet cable for connections using crimping
using crimping tool.
cross and direct tool and test using cable
Check the working condition of cable using
connections using tester. LAN tester.
crimping tool and Know the color pattern of Ethernet cable for
test using LAN cross connection.
tester. Prepare UTP cable for cross connection
using crimping tool.
Check the working condition of cable using
LAN tester.
7 Switch Installation of switch and Install switch
connect systems Connect the systems
Check the validity of sharing of data in
between the systems
8 Exercise on Installation of a modem Internal modem
Installation of a (internal, external or USB)
Identify PCI slot for placing Internal modem
modem (internal, and connecting to internet.
Connect internal modem
external or USB) Install required modem driver
and connecting to Check for the working condition
internet. External modem
Connect External modem

Install required modem driver
Check for the working condition
USB modem
Connect USB modem

Install required modem driver
Check for the working condition
214
9 Exercise on Using Using FTP for uploading Know about FTP protocol
FTP for uploading and downloading files. Know how to upload file using FTP
Know how to download file using FTP
and downloading
files.
10 Exercise on Installation and configuring Know about proxy server.

Installation and the proxy server for Know how to install proxy server.
configuring the internet access Know how to configure proxy server.
proxy server for
internet access
11 Exercise on Setting Setting of particular IP Know about IP addresses

of particular IP address to an existing Know how to set IP addresses to the
computer systems in a LAN
address to an terminal system
existing terminal
system
12 To implement Learn to implement the Compile program

Transportation and Caesar Cipher Input key value
Substitution using Transportation Technique Input text to be encrypted
Caesar Cipher on information
We will get Encrypted text as output
Technique
13 To implement Learn to implement the Compile program

Transportation and Play fair Cipher Input key value
Substitution using Transportation Technique Input text to be encrypted
Play fair Cipher on information
We will get Encrypted text as output
Technique Check the output for correctness
14 To implement Learn to implement the Hill Input the plain text and key from the user.
Transportation and Cipher Transportation Split the plain text into groups of length
Technique on information three.
Substitution using
Arrange the keyword in a 3*3 matrix.
Hill Cipher the two matrices to obtain the cipher text of
Technique length three.
Combine all these groups to get the
complete cipher text.
15 To implement Learn to implement the Arrange the alphabets in row and column of
Vigenere Cipher Vigenère Cipher Technique a 26*26 matrix.
on information Circulate the alphabets in each row to
Technique
position left such that the first letter is
attached to last.
Repeat this process for all 26 rows and
construct the final key matrix.
The keyword and the plain text is read from
the user.
The characters in the keyword are repeated
215
sequentially so as to match with that of the
plaintext.
Pick the first letter of the plain text and that
of the keyword as the row indices and
column indices respectively.
The junction character where these two
meet forms the cipher character.
Repeat the above steps to generate the
entire cipher text.
16 To implement Learn to implement the By using RSA Public Key & Private key for
Encryption and RSA Public Key Encryption Encryption and Decryption of the message
Decryptions using Algorithm By using Public key message will be
ciphered
RSA algorithm
By using Private key message will be
deciphered
Both the keys are Asymmetric
17 Implementation of Learn the Digital signature Read the 256-bit key values.
Digital Signature Implementation and its Divide into five equal-sized blocks named A,
Standard usage B, C, D and E.
The blocks B, C and D are passed to the
function F.
The resultant value is permuted with block
E.
The block A is shifted right by ‘s’ times and
permuted with the result of step-4.
Then it is permuted with a weight value and
then with some other key pair and taken as
the first block.
Block A is taken as the second block and the
block B is shifted by ‘s’ times and taken as
the third block.
blocks C and D are taken as the block D and
E for the final output.
18 Study of any Learn to install the Choose the Appropriate Antivirus Software
Antivirus Antivirus Software in to install in the Computer System
Installation & Do the Appropriate settings to configure the
Computer System and
Antivirus software in the System.
Configurations know the configuration
Observing System Performance While using
Study/Demo Setting the Antivirus software
Study of Standard Observe the Viruses/Threats when attacked
Vulnerabilities. to Computer System
19 Setting firewall Study the implementation Choose The Appropriate System settings to
with Windows OS, of firewall Settings in implement Firewall
Observe the System performance while
its importance and Computer system and learn
having firewall
Problems. how it manage the System
Software requirements: Linux / Windows Operating System, C Compiler, JAVA compiler
216
96HPHVWHU
217
CURRICULUM-2023
(V Semester)
Instruction
Periods/Week Total Scheme Of Examinations
Periods
Sub Code Name of the Subject Sessio- End
Pract- Per Duration Total
Theory Semester nal Exam
icals (hrs) Marks
Marks Marks
THEORY SUBJECTS
Industrial Management
CM-501 and Entrepreneurship 5 - 75 3 20 80 100
Big Data & Cloud

CM-502 Computing 5 75 3 20 80 100
-
CM-503 Android Programming 4 60 3 20 80 100

-
CM-504 Internet Of Things 4 60 3 20 80 100

-
CM-505 Python programming 5 75 3 20 80 100

-
PRACTICAL SUBJECTS
Android Programming
CM-506 4 60 3 40 60 100
Lab -
Python Programming
CM-507 _ 3 45 3 40 60 100
Lab
CM-508 Life Skills - 3 45 3 40 60 100
CM-509 Project work - 6 90 3 40 60 100
ACTIVITIES - 3 45
Total 23 19 630 - 260 640 900
501,508 common to all branches
503 common with DWD,DIOT
504 common with DAIML,DAMT, DCBD,DCCN,DWD,DIOT
506 common with DAIML,DWD
218
Course No. of Total No. of Marks for Marks for
Course Title
code Periods/Weeks periods FA SA
Industrial
CM-501 Management & 5 75 20 80
Entrepreneurship
TIME SCHEDULE
No. of No. of
Questions Questions
Principles of 10 16 2 1 CO1
1.
Management.
Organization Structure & 18 26 2 2 CO2
2
Organizational Behaviour
18 26 2 2 CO3
3. Production Management.
Engineering Ethics & Safety 19 26 2 2 CO4
4.
and Labour Codes
10 16 2 1 CO5
5. Entrepreneurship & Start-ups.
Total 75 110 10 8
Course Objectives and Course Outcomes

(i) Familiarize the concepts of management, and
organization structures.
COURSE (ii) Exposure to organizational behavioural concepts, basics of
OBJECTIVES production management in industries.
(iii) Exposure to Engineering Ethics, Industrial Safety, Labour
codes and entrepreneurial start-ups programmes.
CO1 CM-501.1 Understand the principles of management as applied to
industry.
C02 CM-501.2 Explain types of the industrial organization structures and the
COURSE behaviour of an individual in an organization, motivational
OUTCOMES and leadership styles.
C03 CM-501.3 Explain the different aspects of production management.
CO4 CM-501.4 Explain Engineering Ethics, Industrial Safety and industrial
Labour Codes.
219
CO5 CM-501.5 Explain Entrepreneurial development programmes and Start-
ups.
CO and PO Mapping
CO1 1 1
CO2 1 2
CO3 3 2 2
CO4 3 1 2
CO5 2 1 2
3: High, 2: Moderate, 1: Low Note:
The gaps in CO and PO mapping will be achieved by one or more appropriate activities from the
following:
(i) Assignments (ii) Tutorials (iii) Seminars (iv) Guest Lectures (v) Group Discussions
(vi) Quiz (vii) Industry Visits (viii) Tech-Fest (ix) Mini Projects (x) Library Visits.
Learning Outcome
Understand the principles of management as applied to industry.
1.0 Principles of Management

1.1 Define industry, commerce (Trade) and business.
1.2 Know the need for management.
1.3 Understand functions of Management.
1.4 List the principle of scientific management by F.W.Taylor
1.5 List the principle of modern management by Henry Foyal.
1.6 Differentiate management, administration and organization
1.7 Differentiate Lower, Middle and Top level management
1.8 Explain the importance of Managerial skills (Technical, Human, Conceptual)
1.9 Know the objectives of Management Information Systems.
1.10 Know the Characteristics of Management Information Systems.
2.0 Organization Structure & Organizational Behaviour

2.1 Define organization structure.
2.2 Explain line, staff and line & staff organization structures with advantages, disadvantages and
applications.
2.3 List various Motivation theories.
2.4 Explain Maslow’s Hierarchy of needs.
2.5 Explain Different leadership styles.
220
2.6 Explain Trait theory of leadership
2.7 Explain Behavioral theory of Leadership.
2.8 Explain the Responsibility of human resource management.
2.9 Understand the process of recruitment, selection and training
2.10 State the Objectives of Job Analysis.
3.0 Production Management

3.1 Define Production, Planning and Control.
3.2 Explain Briefly Mass production, Batch production and Job order production.
3.3 Define the terms Routing, Scheduling and Dispatching.
3.4 List applications of network diagrams in production planning and control.
3.5 Draw PERT and CPM Network Diagrams – Simple Problems.
3.6 Know the functions of Materials Management.
3.7 Explain ABC analysis of Inventory.
3.8 Explain concept of Economic ordering quantity.
3.9 Explain meaning of Supply chain management.
3.10 Write processes of Supply Chain Management
3.11 List the Functions of Purchase Department.
3.12 Write functions of Stores Department.
4.0 Engineering Ethics & Safety and Labour Codes

4.1 Definition of Engineering Ethics.
4.2 Understand Core qualities of Professional Engineers.
4.3 Explain Different types of Ethics in Engineering.
4.4 State the meaning of Intellectual Property Rights
4.5 List common types of Intellectual Property Rights.
4.6 List Activities of Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR).
4.7 State the need of Human values in engineering fields.
4.8 Comprehend the importance of safety at Workplace.
4.9 List Different hazards in the industry.
4.10 State the causes of accidents costs of accidents and their prevention.
4.11 List Salient features of Code on Wages, 2019.
4.12 List Salient features of Industrial Relations Code, 2020,
4.13 List Salient features of Code on Social Security, 2020
4.14 List Salient features of Occupational Safety, Health and Working Conditions Code, 2020.
5. Entrepreneurship & Start-ups

5.1 Define the word Entrepreneur and Entrepreneurship.
5.2 Explain various self - employment schemes
5.3 List the Financial assistance programmes provided by the Governments.
5.4 Explain the concept of TQM and ISO 9000 series and BIS 14000 Series.
5.5 List the Advantages and Drawbacks of ISO 9000 series of standards.
5.6 Explain the Concept of Incubation center’s.
221
5.7 Explain Startup and its stages.
5.8 Explain Break Even Analysis to make or buy the products.
5.9 State the Importance of Branding.
5.10 State the significance of Business name, logo and tag line.
5.11 Explain the Concepts of Digital Marketing.
5.12 Know the Role of E-commerce and Social Media.
Course Content
1.0 Principles of Management

Introduction: Industry, Commerce and Trade; Definition of management; Functions of
management; Principles of Scientific Management: F.W. Taylor - Principles of Modern
Management: Henry Fayol; Administration organization and management; Levels of
management - Managerial skills - Management Information Systems: Objectives and
Characteristics.
2.0 Organization Structure & Organizational Behaviour
Organization Types: Line, Staff and Line & Staff Organizations – Maslow’s motivational
theory; Leadership Styles – Trait theory of leadership – Behavioural theory of Leadership.
Job Analysis - Responsibility of human resource management - Selection procedure –
Training of Workers: Apprentice Training – On job training.
3.0 Production Management.
Production, Planning and Control – Types of Production - Routing, Scheduling and

Dispatching - PERT and CPM Network Diagrams – Applications - –Calculate Project Duration
and identify the critical path of the Project – Simple Problems; Functions of Materials
Management - ABC analysis of Inventory. - Economic ordering quantity- Meaning of Supply
Chain Management – Processes of Supply Chain Management - Functions of Purchase
Department - Purchasing Procedure -Functions of Stores Department – Bin Card.
4.0 Engineering Ethics &Safety and Labour Codes
Engineering Ethics: Definition – Classification of Engineering Ethics - Personal and Business
ethics –Value based ethics - Environmental ethics – Meaning of Intellectual Property Rights –
Common types of Intellectual Property Rights - Activities of Corporate Social Responsibility
(CSR).
Human values : Morals – Values –Character- Caring –Courage - Cooperation – Commitments
–Empathy – Honesty- Integrity - Respect for others – Sharing–Service learning.
Industrial Safety: The importance of safety at Workplace -Hazard and accident - Different
hazards in the industry -The causes of accidents and prevention of accidents - Direct and
indirect cost of accidents.
Industrial Labour Codes: Meaning of Employer and Employee - Objectives of Industrial
Labour Codes – Salient features of Code on Wages, 2019 - Salient features of Industrial
Relations Code, 2020 - Salient features of Code on Social Security, 2020 - Salient features of
Occupational Safety, Health and Working Conditions Code, 2020.
5.0 Entrepreneurship & Start-ups
Entrepreneur - Entrepreneurship - Role of Entrepreneur - Qualities of an entrepreneur-
Requirements of an entrepreneur - Expectations of Entrepreneurship - Self-employment
schemes - Institutional support - Concept of TQM –Pillars of TQM- Importance of ISO 9000
certification - Concepts of ISO 9000 Series and BIS 14000 Series- Advantages and Drawbacks
of ISO 9000 series of standards - List the beneficiaries of ISO 9000.
222
Financial assistance programmes - Concept of Incubation center’s – Start-up and its stages ––
Make or Buy Decision – Break Even Analysis - Branding – Business name, logo and tag line –
Concepts of Digital Marketing - Role of E-commerce and Social Media.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Industrial Engineering and Management - by O.PKhanna
2. Production Management - by Buffa.
3. Engineering Economics and Management Science -` by Banga& Sharma.
4. Personnel Management - by Flippo.
5. Production and Operations Management – S.N.Chary
6. Converging Technologies for Smart Environments and Integrated
Ecosystems IERC Book Open Access 2013 pages-54-76.
Table specifying the scope of syllabus to be covered for Unit Test-I & Unit Test-II
CM-501 :: Industrial Management & Entrepreneurship
Unit Test Learning Outcomes to be covered

Unit Test – I From 1.1 to 3.12
From 4.1 to 5.12
Unit Test – II
223
Course Course Title No. of Total No. of Marks for Marks for
CM-502 Big Data & Cloud 5 75 20 80

Computing
Time Schedule
No. of No. of
Questions Questions
1. Over View of Data Mining 20 29 3 2 CO1
2. Over View Of Data Ware 10 CO2

13 1 1
Housing
3. Introduction to Big Data 10 16 2 1 CO3
4. Big Data Analytics 20 26 2 2 CO3,CO4
5. Cloud Computing 15 26 2 2 CO3,CO5
Total 75 110 10 8
i) To know the fundamentals of Data Mining

ii) To know the fundamentals of Data Ware Housing
Course iii) To familiarize with Big Data and Big Data Analytics
Objectives iv)To Know Big data Technologies
CO1 CM-502.1 Describe Data Mining
Course CO2 CM-502.2 Explain DATA WARE HOUSING

Outcomes
CO3 CM-502.3 Describe Big Data
CO4 CM-502.4 Analyse functioning of various Big data Analytical

techniques
CO5 CM-502.5 Explain Cloud computing
224
CO-PO/PSO Matrix:
CM-502.1 1 1 1 1 0 0 2 0 1 1
CM-502.2 1 0 1 2 1 0 2 2 2 0
CM-502.3 3 0 0 1 0 0 2 2 1 0
CM-502.4 2 2 1 1 0 0 1 2 1 3
CM-502.5 2 0 1 1 1 0 2 2 3 0
Average 1.8 0.6 0.8 1.2 0.5 0 1.8 1.6 1.6 0.8
Learning Outcomes:
1. OVER VIEW DATA MINING

1.1. Define Data Mining
1.2. List type of Data Mining
1.3. List Advantages of Data Mining
1.4. List Disadvantages of Data Mining
1.5. List Applications of Data Mining
1.6. List Challenges of Implementation in Data mining
1.7. Evolution of Data Mining
1.8. List and explain Data Mining Techniques
1.9. Explain Data Mining Implementation Process
1.10. Explaining Data Mining Architecture
1.11. Explain KDD- Knowledge Discovery in Databases of Data Mining
1.12. List and explain Data Mining tools
1.13. List Major Difference between Data mining and Machine learning
1.14. State the importance of Data Analytics
1.15. List and explain phases of Data Analytics
1.16. Differentiate between Data Mining and Data Analytics
1.17. List and explain types of Data mining techniques
1.18. Explain Text data mining
1.19. Differentiate between classification and clustering in data mining
2. OVER VIEW OF DATA WARE HOUSING
2.1. Define data ware housing
2.2. State the importance of Data Ware Housing
2.3. Differences between Database and Data Warehouse
2.4. Explain Data Warehouse Architecture
2.5. Explain Three-Tier Data Warehouse Architecture
2.6. State the importance of Operational Data Stores
225
2.7. Define ETL and ELT
2.8. List Types of Data Warehouses
2.9. Explain Data Ware Housing Model
2.10. Explain Data Warehouse Design approaches
2.11. Define terms Meta Data, Data Mart
2.12. Define OLAP
2.13. List characteristics of OLAP
2.14. Differentiate between OLTP and OLAP
2.15. List Types of OLAP
2.16. Differentiate between Data Mining and Data Warehousing
3. Introduction to Big Data
3.1. Define big data
3.2. Evolution of Big data
3.3. List Challenges of Traditional system
3.4. Describe three V‘s of big data
3.5. Describe Storing Big Data
3.6. How do you Select Big Data
3.7. Explain Processing of Big Data
3.8. Classify the structures of Big Data
3.9. State the Need of Big Data
3.10. List the sources of big data
3.11. Define Big Data Analytics
3.12. List the types of tools used in Big Data
3.13. List and explain the applications of big data
3.14. List various risks of Big Data
3.15. Describe Intelligent data analysis
3.16. Differentiate between Traditional and Big data approach
4. BIG DATA ANALYTICS
4.1. State the importance of big data analytics
4.2. Explain Big Data Life Cycle
4.3. State the Methodology in Big data Analytics
4.4. List Core Deliverables
4.5. List Key Stakeholders
4.6. List the responsibilities of Data Analyst
4.7. List the basic skills necessary for data analyst
4.8. State the importance of Data Scientist
4.9. Dealing with Big Data Analytic Project
4.9.1. How to manage a Big data Analytics Project
4.9.2. State Problem Definition
4.9.3. Data collection
4.9.4. Cleansing data
4.9.5. Summarizing
4.9.6. Data exploration
4.9.7. Data Visualization
4.10. Big data Analytic methods
4.10.1. Importance of SQL in Data Analytics
4.10.2. Importance of Charts & Graphs
4.10.3. Importance of Data Analysis Tools: R Programming, Python for data analysis,
Julia, SPSS, MATLAB, Octave.
226
4.11. ADVANCED METHODS
4.11.1. Role of Machine Learning for Data Analysis
4.11.2. List association rules
4.11.3. State importance of Decision trees
4.11.4. State importance of Text Analytics
4.12. BIG DATA TECHNOLOGIES
4.12.1. State the importance of NOSQL
4.12.2. List advantages of NOSQL
4.12.3. Sate the importance of NEWSQL
4.12.4. List advantages of NEWSQL
4.12.5. HADOOP
4.12.5.1. List advantages
4.12.5.2 List Features
4.12.5.3 List versions
4.12.5.4. Explain Hadoop components
4.12.5.5. Explain HADOOP Architecture
5. CLOUD COMPUTING
5.1. What is cloud computing
5.2. List Advantages of cloud computing
5.3. List disadvantages of cloud computing
5.4. Evolution of cloud computing
5.5. Draw and explain NIST Visual Model of Cloud Computing
5.6. List features of Cloud computing
5.7. List and explain components of cloud computing
5.8. List and explain Cloud computing technologies
5.9. List and explain different service models in cloud computing
5.10. Compare different service models
5.11. List and explain different deployment models or types of clouds
5.12. Differentiate between private cloud and public cloud
5.13. Compare traditional data center and Cloud storage
5.14. Describe how data is managed in cloud (DBaaS)
5.15. Explain security concepts in cloud
5.16. List different types of cloud simulator
5.17. State the importance of cloud simulator
COURSE CONTENT
DATA MINING: Data Mining - definition – Types- Advantages - Disadvantages - Applications

-challenges - Evolution – Techniques - Implementation Process – Architecture - KDD-
Knowledge Discovery - tools - Difference between Data mining and Machine learning –
phases Data Analytics - Text data Mining - classification and clustering in data mini
DATA WARE HOUSING: What is data ware housing - importance of Data Ware Housing –
differences between Datase and Data Warehouse - Data Warehouse Architecture - Three-
Tier Data Warehouse Architecture - Operational Data Stores? - Define ETL and ELT - Types
of Data Warehouses - Data Ware Housing Model - Data Warehouse Design approaches -
terms Meta Data, Data Mar - OLAP - Data Mining Vs Data Warehousing
227
Introduction to Big Data: Define bigdata & analytics - Evolution of data/bigdata -
Challenges of Traditional system - The three V‘s of big - Storing Big Dat - Selecting Big Data -
Processing of Big Data- structures of Big Data - Need Big Data tools used in Big Data -
applications of big data - risks of Big Data - importance of Intelligent data analysis -
Traditional vs. Big Data approach
BIG DATA ANALYTICS: Importance of big data analytics - Big Data Life Cycle - Methodology
in Big data Analytics - Core Deliverables - Key Stakeholder - responsibilities of Data Analysis
- basic skills necessary for data analyst - importance of Data Scientist- Big Data Analytic
Project- Big data Analytic methods - ADVANCED METHODS- BIG DATA TECHNOLOGIES -
NOSQL -NEWSQL - HADOOP
CLOUD COMPUTING: cloud computing - Advantages and disadvantages - Evolution of cloud

computing - Draw and explain NIST Visual Model of Cloud Computing - features of Cloud
computing- components of cloud computing- Cloud computing technologies - different
service models in cloud computing - Compare different service models- different
deployment models or types of clouds- Differentiate between private cloud and public
cloud - Compare traditional data centre and Cloud storage - how data is managed in cloud
(DBaaS)- security concepts in cloud- cloud simulator and List different types
TEXT BOOKS
1. H.Dunham,”Data mining: Introductory and Advanced Topics” Pearson Education.

2. Sam Anahory, Dennis Murray, “Data Warehousing in the Real World : A Practical
Guide for Building Decision Support Systems, Pearson Education.
3.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Jiawei Han, Micheline Kamber, ”Data Mining Concepts & Techniques” Elsevier.
2. Mallach,”Data Warehousing System”,McGraw –Hill.
Reference Websites:
https://www.javatpoint.com/aggregation-in-data-mining
https://www.javatpoint.com/data-warehouse
https://www.javatpoint.com/cloud-computing-technologies

Unit test-1 1.1 to 3.8
Unit test-2 3.9 to 5.6.9
228
No. of Total No. of
Android
CM-503 Programming 4 60 20 80
Time Schedule
No. of No. of
Questions Questions
1. Android Basics and Anatomy 10 16 2 1 CO1
2. Components, Activity Life

12 21 2 1.5 CO1,CO2
Cycle, Intents
3. Android – User Interface 15 26 2 2 CO2,CO3
4. Android Advanced Concepts 13 26 2 2 CO1,CO3,

CO4
5. Data Base connectivity in CO3,CO4,
10 21 2 1.5
Android CO5
Total 60 110 10 8
At the end of the course, the student shall be able to
i) To know the Basics of Android Application Development

ii) To familiarize with the Android Anatomy, Components, Activity Life Cycle,
Course Objectives
Intents
iii) To use various User Interface controls in Android Application
Development
iv) To reinforce theoretical concepts by creating relevant Android
applications.
Course Outcomes:
C01 Know the Basics structure of Android Programming
C02 Understand how to design Android apps with User Interface Controls.
C03 Analyse the Android Advanced Concepts in Android Programming
229
C04 Able to develop and deploy android application using database
Learning Outcomes:
1.0 Android Basics, Android Anatomy

1.1 List the mobile phone generations
1.2 Define Smart phone
1.3 Explain the Android Architecture
1.4 Describe Android versions
1.5 List Features of Android
1.6 Explain installation of Android SDK Tools
1.7 Explain creation of Android Virtual Devices(AVD)
1.8 Anatomy of Android Application
1.8.1 Main Activity File
1.8.2 Manifest File
1.8.3 R file
1.8.4 Strings File
1.8.5 The Layout File
1.8.6 Dalvik Virtual Machine
1.9 Explain Creation of “Hello World” Android Application.
1.10 Explain procedure for Deploying Android app on USB connected Android device
2.0 Components, Activity Life Cycle, Intents
2.1 Android application components
2.1.1 Activities
2.1.2 Services
2.1.3 Content providers
2.1.4 Broadcast Receivers
2.2 Describe Activity life cycle
2.3 Define intents
2.4 INTENTS
2.4.1 Exploring Intent objects
2.4.2 List the Intent types
2.4.3 Linking activities using intents
2.5 Explain the creation of Android application that switches between Activities
3.0 Android – User Interface
3.1 List types of User Interface layouts
3.2 Explain User Interface Designing Layouts
3.3 Define User Interface Controls
3.4 List User Interface Controls
3.5 Describe the need of Event Handling
3.6 Explain Android Event Handling
3.7 Explain the usage of User Interface Controls
3.7.1 Textbox
3.7.2 Edit Text
3.7.3 Button
3.7.4 Toast
3.7.5 Check box
3.7.6 Radio Button
230
3.7.7 Toggle Button
3.7.8 Spinner
3.7.9 Date Picker
3.7.10Time Picker
3.7.11List View
3.7.12Progress Bar
3.7.13Analog and Digital clock
3.8 Explain development of Android App using above user Interface Controls
4.0 Android Advanced Concepts
4.1 State the purpose of Menus
4.2 List various types of Menus
4.3 Explain Menus
4.3.1 Options Menus
4.3.2 Context Menus
4.3.3 Popup Menus
4.4 Explain Images
4.4.1 Image Button
4.4.2 Image Switcher
4.4.3 Image View
4.5 Describe Alert Dialog.
4.6 Explain Alarm Manager
4.7 Compose the procedure for SMS sending
4.8 List the methods in SMS Manager Class
4.9 Explain procedure for E-mail sending
4.10 Explain Media Player Class
4.11 List various methods in Media Player class
4.12 Explain the procedure for Running Media Player
4.13 Explain Telephony Manager
5.0 Database connectivity in Android
5.1 Define persistent data storage
5.2 Understanding of Android storage system
5.2.1 List different storage options
5.2.2 Explain Internal file Storage
5.2.3 Explain External file Storage
5.3 Content Providers
5.3.1 Importance of Content providers
5.3.2 Explain Content Providers
5.4 SQ Lite Database
5.4.1 Define Schema
5.4.2 Define Contract class
5.4.3 List the Database Operations
5.4.4 Explain SQ Lite Data Base
5.5 Explain the Database Operations with an example database
5.6 Explain the procedure for publishing of an Android Application.
5.7 Explain the procedure for Deploying APK files
231
COs-POs Mapping Strength:
CM-503.1 1.5 1.5 2 2 1 0.5 2 2 3 3
CM-503.2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 3 3
CM-503.3 2 3 3 3 1 0.5 2 2 3 3
CM-503.4 1.5 2 3 3 1 1 3 2 3 3
Average 1.5 2.4 2.5 2.2 1 1 2 2 3 3
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT 1: Android Basics

Types of mobile phone generations, Android Architecture, Android Versions, Features of
Android, Installing Android SDK Tools, Android Development Tools (ADT), Creating
Android Virtual Devices (AVD), Anatomy of android application, Deploying Android app on
USB connected Android device,
UNIT 2: Android Anatomy, Components, Activity Life Cycle, Intents
Creating first android application, Android application components, Activity life cycle,
understanding activities, Exploring Intent objects, Intent Types, linking activities using
intents
UNIT 3: Android – User Interface
Understanding the User Interface Layouts, User Interface Controls - Button, Toast, Toggle
Button, Checkbox, Radio Button, Spinner, Edit Text, Date Picker, Time Picker, List View,
Progress- Bar, Analog and Digital clock, Handling UI events, List fragment, Dialog fragment
UNIT 4: Android Advanced Concepts
Menus-Option, Context, Popup, Images- Image Button, Image Switcher, Image View, Alert
Dialog, Alarm manager, SMS, E-mail, Media Player, Handling Telephony Manager
UNIT 5: Database connectivity in Android
Storing the data persistently-Data Storage Options: preferences, Internal Storage,
External Storage, Content Provider, The SQLite database, connecting with SQLite
database and operations-Insert, Delete, Update, Fetch, Publishing and deploying android
applications.
Reference Books:
1. Wei-Meng Lee, Beginning Android 4 Application Development, Wiley Publishing, Inc.
2. Pradeep Kothari, “Android Application Development Black Book”, DreamTech Press
3. James C.Sheusi, “Android Application Development for Java Programmers”, Cengage
Learning
4. Mark L Murphy, “Beginning Android”, Wiley India Pvt Ltd
5. Sayed Y Hashimi and Satya Komatineni(2009), “Pro Android”, Wiley India Pvt Ltd
6. Reto Meier, Professional Android 4 Application Development, Wiley India Pvt Ltd Course
outcomes:
7. https://developer.android.com/docs
8. https://www.geeksforgeeks.org/introduction-to-android-development/
9. https://www.tutorialspoint.com/android/index.htm
232

233
No. of
Course Total No. of
Course Title Periods/ Marks for FA Marks for SA
code periods
Weeks
CM-504 Internet of Things 4 60 20 80
Time Schedule
No. of No. of
Questions Questions
1. Introduction of IOT 10 16 2 1 CO1
2. Data Protocols 14 26 2 2 CO2
3. Communication Technologies 14 26 2 2 CO3
4. Wireless Sensor Networks 14 29 3 2 CO4
5. Role Of IOT 8 13 1 1 CO5
Total 60 110 10 8
Course Objectives i) To assess the vision of IOT.
ii) To classify Real World IoT applications in various Domains.
iii)To understand design methodology for IoT platforms.
At the end of course student able to learn the following :
CM-504.1 CO1 Understand the basic concepts like usage of sensors,

components and frequently used technologies of IoT from a
global context
CM-504.2 CO2 Illustrate the application of Data protocols of IoT

Course
CM-504.3 CO3 Understand various communication technologies of IOT
Outcomes
CM-504.4 CO4 Illustrate the use of sensor networks in applications of various
domains
234
CM-504.5 CO5 Illustrate applications of IOT
CO-PO/PSO Matrix:
CM-504.1 3 1 1 2 2 3 2 2 2
CM-504.2 2 1 3 2 2 1 3 2 3 3
CM-504.3 3 1 1 2 2 3 2 3 3
CM-504.4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3
CM-504.5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3
Average 2.8 1.6 1.8 2.2 2.5 2.3 3 2.2 2.6 2.8
Learning Outcomes:
1 INTRODUCTIONOF IOT
1.1. INTRODUCTION:
1.1.1. Define IOT
1.1.2. List Features
1.1.3. Evolution of Connected Devices
1.1.4. List Advantages
1.1.5. List Disadvantages
1.1.6. List the components of IoT
1.1.7. List Applications IOT
1.1.8. List various connecting technologies
1.1.9. Sensors
1.1.9.1. Need of sensor
1.1.9.2. Features of Sensors
1.1.9.3. Classify Sensors based on output, on data types
1.1.10. Define actuator
1.1.11. List types of Actuators
1.1.12. Explain IoT Solutions Architecture
1.1.13. List IOT challenges
1.1.14. Explain IoT Ecosystem
1.2 Various Connectivity Technologies in IOT:
1.2.1 6LoWPANs Technologies
1.2.1.1 List Features
1.2.1.2 List Applications
1.2.1.3 List Advantages
1.2.1.4 List Addressing
1.2.1.5 List and explain different packet formats
235
1.2.1.6 Explain 6LoWPAN protocol stack architecture
1.2.2 Describe Routing protocols(RPL,CORPL,LOADng)
1.2.3 RFID Technologies
1.2.3.1 What is RFID
1.2.3.2 List features
1.2.3.3 List Applications
1.2.3.4 List Advantages
1.2.3.5 Explain Working principle
2. DATA PROTOCOLS
2.1. Message Queue Telemetry Transport(MQTT)
2.1.1. Define MQTT
2.1.2. List features of MQTT
2.1.3. Explain MQTT
2.1.4. List components
2.1.5. List Methods
2.1.6. List Applications
2.1.7. Define Secure MQTT
2.1.8. Explain Secure MQTT
2.2. Constrained Application Protocol (CoAP)
2.2.1. Define CoAP
2.2.2. List features
2.2.3. Explain CoAP
2.2.4. List CoAP message types
2.2.5. Explain CoAP message types
2.2.6. Differentiate between COAP and MQTT
2.3. Extensible Messaging and Presence Protocol(XMPP)
2.3.1. List Features of XMPP
2.3.2. History of XMPP
2.3.3. Explain XMPP
2.3.4. Describe core XMPP Technologies
2.3.5. List applications of XMPP
2.4. Advanced Message Queuing Protocol (AMQP)
2.4.1. List Features of AMQP
2.4.2. Explain AMQP in detail
2.4.3. List applications of XMPP
3. Communication Technologies
3.1. IEEE 802.15.4
3.1.1. List features of IEEE 802.15.4
3.1.2. Why 802.15.4 is preferred in IoT communication?
3.1.3. Explain IEEE 802.15.4
3.1.4. List IEEE 802.15.4 Variants
3.1.5. List and explain IEEE 802.15.4 Types
3.2. ZIGBEE
3.2.1. What is ZIGBEE
236
3.2.3. List components
3.2.4. List different topologies
3.2.5. List types
3.2.6. List Applications
3.2.7. Explain different topologies of ZIGBEE
3.2.8. Explain ZIGBEE types
3.3. Near field communication (NFC)
3.3.1. What is NFC
3.3.2. List types
3.3.3. List applications
3.3.4. Explain working principle
3.3.5. Describe modes of operation of NFC
3.4. Bluetooth
3.4.1. State the purpose of Bluetooth
3.4.3. List functions
3.4.4. List applications
3.4.5. Explain Bluetooth technology in detail
3.4.6. Describe Pico Net
4. Wireless Sensor Networks (WSN)
4.1. State the importance of Wireless Sensor Network
4.2. List Applications Wireless Sensor Network
4.3. List characteristics of Sensor Networks
4.4. What are the Requirements of WSN
4.5. List and explain WSN Network Topologies
4.6. Sensor networks
4.6.1. List and types of sensor networks
4.6.2. Single Source Single Object Detection
4.6.3. Single Source Multiple Object Detection
4.6.4. Multiple Source Single Object Detection
4.6.5. Multiple Source Multiple Object Detection
4.7. Describe Challenges in Wireless Sensor Networks
4.8. Define Node in WSN
4.9. Explain node Behavior in WSNs
4.10. List and explain Security Services in WSN
4.11. Explain Information theoretic self-management in WSN
4.12. Applications of WSN
4.13. State importance of Wireless Multimedia Sensor Networks
4.14. Explain Wireless Multimedia Sensor Networks (WMSN)
4.15. State importance of Stationary Wireless Sensor Networks
4.16. Explain Stationary Wireless Sensor Networks
4.17. State importance of Mobile Wireless Sensor Networks
4.18. Explain Mobile Wireless Sensor Networks
4.19. What is Machine to Machine Communications (M 2 M)
4.20. Lists applications and features of M2M
4.21. List and explain M2M sensor nodes
237
5. ROLE OF IOT
5.1. Role of IOT in automation
5.1.1. State the importance of automation in IOT.
5.1.2. List automation applications of IOT
5.1.3. List advantages of IOT in automation
5.1.4. List disadvantages of IOT in automation
5.1.5. What is the Impact Of IOT On Industrial Automation?
5.1.6. List Types of Industrial Automation
5.1.7. Explain Role of IOT in automation of following application:
5.1.7.1. Health care
5.1.7.2. Smart Home
5.1.7.3. Smart Cities
5.1.7.4. Smart class rooms
5.1.7.5. Smart Energy
5.1.7.6. Smart Transportation and Mobility
5.1.7.7. Smart Factory
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT-1: Introduction of IOT

INTRODUCTION to IOT – Definition – Applications – Technologies – Sensor features –
Types – Actuator list – Components – Challenges Connectivity technologies - 6LoWPAN
–Features – Addressing –Routing RFID – features – working principle – Applications
UNIT-2: DATA PROTOCOLS
MQTT – Definition – features – components – applications – MQTT – SMQTT CoAP-
Definition – message types XMPP – features – core technologies – applications
AMQP- Features-applications
UNIT-3 : Communication Technologies
IEEE 802.15.4 – features – variants – types
ZIGBEE –features – components – technologies – types – applications
NFC – types –modes – applications
Bluetooth - purpose –features - Technologies- applications
UNIT-4: Wireless Sensor Networks
Wireless Sensor Networks- Applications -Types-Challenges-node Behaviour-Information
theoretic self-management-Applications-WMSN-.
Stationary Wireless Sensor Networks-Mobile Wireless Sensor Networks-M 2 M-
applications -features-sensor nodes-
UNIT-5: ROLE OF IOT
Role of IOT in automation of applications - Health care -Smart Home-Smart Cities -
Smart class rooms - Smart Energy - Smart Transportation and Mobility - Smart Factory
REFERENCE BOOKS/WEB LINKS:
1) https://onlinecourses-archive.nptel.ac.in/
2) Vijay Madisetti, Arshdeep Bahga, “Internet of Things: A Hands-On Approach”, Orient
BlackswanPvt., Ltd., New Delhi, 2015.
3) WaltenegusDargie, Christian Poellabauer, "Fundamentals of Wireless Sensor Networks:
Theory and Practice", A John Wiley and Sons, Ltd., Publication, 2010.
4) Jeeva Jose, “Internet of Things”, (ISBN: 978-93-86173-591) KBP House,1st edition,2018.
238
5) Interconnecting Smart Objects with IP: The Next Internet, Jean-Philippe Vasseur, Adam
Dunkels, Morgan Kuffmann
6) Designing the Internet of Things , Adrian McEwen (Author), Hakim Cassimally
7) Internet of Things: Converging Technologies for Smart Environments and Integrated
Ecosystems, Dr.Ovidiu Vermesan, Dr. Peter Friess, River Publishers
8) Internet of Things (A Hands-on-Approach) , Vijay Madisetti , ArshdeepBahga
9) 6LoWPAN: The Wireless Embedded Internet, Zach Shelby, Carsten Bormann, Wiley
10) Building the internet of things with ipv6 and mipv6, The Evolving World of M2M
Communications, Daniel Minoli John Wiley & Sons
11) Recent research/white papers

Unit test-1 From 1.1 to3.2
239
No. of Total No. of
Python
CM-505 5 75 20 80
Programming
Time Schedule
No. of No. of
Questions Questions
Introduction to Python
1. 10 26 2 2 CO1
Programming
2. Control Flow and Loops 15 13 1 1 CO2
3. Functions and Arrays 15 26 2 2 CO3
4. Data Structures 15 26 2 2 CO4
Object Oriented
Programming in Python and
5. 20 19 3 1 CO5
File Handling and Exception
Handling
Total 75 110 10 8
Course i) To know the fundamentals of Python programming

Objectives ii) To understand fundamental syntactic information about ‘Python’
iii) To develop various python programs
CO1 CM-505.1 Explain Basic constructs like operators, expressions and

components of python programming as well as Editing and
Debugging
CO2 CM-505.2 Write Python programs using Control statements, Loops
Course CO3 CM-505.3 Write python programs using Functions and arrays
Outcomes CO4 CM-505.4 Develop Python programs using Data structures
CO5 CM-505.5 Develop Python application programs using OOP Concept,

FILES, Exceptions
240
CO-PO/PSO Matrix:
CM-505.1 3 1 2 1 1 1 2 1
CM-505.2 3 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
CM-505.3 3 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2
CM-505.4 3 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2
CM-505.5 3 1 2 1 2 3 2 2 2 2
Average 3 1.75 2 1 1.2 1.8 1.3 2 1.8 1.8
Learning Outcomes:
1.0 Introduction
1.1. History of Python.
1.2. List Python features
1.3. List and Explain Applications of Python
1.4. Explain Python Integrated Development and Learning Environment (IDLE)
1.5. Explain process of Running Python Scripts.
1.6. Explain Identifiers, Keywords, Indentation, Variables
1.7. List and Explain various data types
1.8. Explain declaration, initialization of variables.
1.9. Explain Input and Output statements.
1.10. Explain formatted input output.
1.11. State the usage of comments
1.12. List and Explain various Operators.
1.13. Explain Boolean values.
1.14. Explain Operator precedence rules.
1.15. State the purpose of modules.
1.16. Define functions.
1.17. List types of functions
1.18. List and Explain Built-in Functions.
1.19. Explain the Steps in Developing a simple python program and execution.
2.0 Control Flow and Loops
2.1. List and Explain various Control Flow constructs.
2.1.1. If
2.1.2. If-Else
2.1.3. if-elif-else
2.2. List and Explain various Loop Statements.
2.2.1. for Loop
2.2.2. while loop
2.2.3. break
2.2.4. continue
2.2.5. pass
3.0 Functions and Arrays
3.1. Introduction
3.2. Function Arguments: Default arguments, Variable Length arguments
3.3. Anonymous Functions
241
3.4. Return Statement
3.5. List and explain Scope of variables
3.6. Explain creation of modules.
3.7. Explain importing of modules.
3.8. Python Variable: Namespace and scoping
3.9. Explain Python Packages
3.10. List and Explain Strings: String slices, immutability
3.11. List and Explain String functions and methods.
3.12. Explain about String module.
3.13. Explain about Python Arrays.
3.14. Explain accessing of elements in an Array.
3.15. Explain Array methods.
4.0 Data Structures
4.1. Explain Python Lists.
4.2. Describe Basic List Operations.
4.3. Explain List Slices.
4.4. Explain List methods.
4.5. Explain List loop
4.6. Explain mutability.
4.7. Explain aliasing.
4.8. Explain Cloning lists.
4.9. Explain List parameters.
4.10. Explain List comprehension.
4.11. Tuples.
4.11.1. Explain Tuple assignment.
4.11.2. Explain Tuple as return value.
4.11.3. Explain Tuple Comprehension
4.12. Dictionaries
4.12.1. Explain creation of dictionary/assignment.
4.12.2. Explain Operations and methods.
4.12.3. Explain Dictionary Comprehension.
4.13. Explain Sets.
5.0 Object Oriented Programming in Python and File Handling and Exception Handling
5.1. Creating Classes
5.2. Creating Objects
5.3. Method Overloading and Overriding
5.4. Data Hiding
5.5. Data Abstraction
5.6. Opening files in different modes
5.7. Processing files
5.8. Closing a file
5.9. Exception Handling
242
COURSE CONTENT
UNIT – I:
Introduction: Introduction to Python and installation, data types: Int, float, Boolean, string,
and list; variables, Arithmetic Operators, Comparison (Relational) Operators, Assignment
Operators, Logical Operators, Bitwise Operators, Membership Operators, Identity Operators,
Boolean values, expressions, statements, precedence of operators, comments; modules,
functions--- function and its use, flow of execution, parameters and arguments.
UNIT – II:
Control Flow and Loops: Control Flow- if, if-elif-else, for, while, break, continue, pass
UNIT – III:
Functions and Arrays - Defining Functions, Calling Functions, Passing Arguments, Keyword
Arguments, Default Arguments, Variable-length arguments, Anonymous Functions, Fruitful
Functions(Function Returning Values), Scope of the Variables in a Function - Global and Local
Variables, Modules: Creating modules, import statement, from Import statement, name
spacing, Python packages, Introduction to PIP, Installing Packages via PIP, Using Python
Packages - Strings: string slices, immutability, string functions and methods, string module;
Python arrays, Access the Elements of an Array, array methods.
UNIT – IV:
Data Structures : Lists: list operations, list slices, list methods, list loop, mutability, aliasing,
cloning lists, list parameters, list comprehension; Tuples: tuple assignment, tuple as return
value, tuple comprehension; Dictionaries: operations and methods, comprehension-sets.
UNIT – V:
Object Oriented Programming OOP in Python: Classes, 'self variable', Methods, Constructor
Method, Inheritance, Overriding Methods, Data hiding,
File Handling: Open Files, File Processing and Closing a File
Error and Exceptions: Difference between an error and Exception, Handling Exception, try
except block, Raising Exceptions, User Defined Exceptions
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Python Programing by K. Nageswara Rao, Shaikh Akbar - Scitech Publications (India) Pvt.
Ltd.
2. Python Programming: A Modern Approach, Vamsi Kurama, Pearson
3. Learning Python, Mark Lutz, Orielly
4. Think Python, Allen Downey, Green Tea Press
5. Core Python Programming, W.Chun, Pearson.
6. Introduction to Python, Kenneth A. Lambert, Cengage

243
Course No. of Total No. of
Course Title Marks for FA Marks for SA
code Periods/Weeks periods
Android
Programming
CM-506 4 60 40 60
Lab

No.
1. Android Basics Activity Life Cycle 8 CO1,CO2
2. Android – User Interface 16 CO2,CO3
3. Android Advanced Concepts 16 CO3,CO4
4. DataBase connectivity in Android 12 CO4
5. Publish and Deploy Android CO5
8
applications
Total Periods 60

i) To know the Basics of Android Application Development
ii) To familiarize with the Android Anatomy, Components, Activity Life
Cycle, Intents
Course Objectives
iii) To use various User Interface controls in Android Application
Development
iv) To reinforce theoretical concepts by creating relevant Android
applications.

C01 Demonstrate the Basics of Android Programming for developing
Android Applications
C02 Observe the Anatomy, Components, Activity Life Cycle, Intents of
Course Android Applications
Outcomes C03 Incorporate the User Interface Controls in Android Programming
C04 Analyse the Android Advanced Concepts in Android Programming
C05 Integrate the DataBase with Android Applications, Publish Android
applications & Deploy APK files
244
CO-PO/PSO Matrix:
CM-506.1 2 1 3 2 1 2 1 2 3 3
CM-506.2 1 3 3 3 1 3 2 2 3 3
CM-506.3 1 2 3 2 2 3 1 2 3 3
CM-506.4 1 1 3 2 2 3 2 2 3 3
CM-506.5 1 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 3
Average 1.5 2 3 2.6 1.5 2.5 1.6 2 3 3
LIST OF EXCERCISES:
1. Create an Android Application To display “Hello World”

2. Create an Android Application To display a Toast Message
3. Create an Android app to accept a number in text field and display the factorial of it in a
Toast message on clicking a button
4. Create an Android app to illustrate the use of Check Box widget.
5. Create an Android app to illustrate the use of Spinner (Combo Box)widget.
6. Create an Android app to illustrate the use of Date picker widget and Time picker widget.
7. Create an Android app that uses multiple UI controls like Edit Text, Check Box, Spinner and
Buttons
8. Create an Android app to shift from one activity to another activity using a button.
9. Create an Android Application Using Image Effects
10. Create an Android Application Using Image Switcher
11. Create an Android Application Using Alert Dialog
12. Create an Android Application To Integrate Google Maps
13. Create an Android Application To send SMS
14. Create an Android Application To calling a number
15. Create an Android Application To send E-mail
16. Create an Android Application Using Database
17. Publish Android Application
18. Deploy Android Application
245
Android Programming Lab Objectives and Key Competencies
Name of the
Sl.No Objectives Key Competencies
Experiment
1 Create an Android Create an Android app to show “Hello Correct syntactical errors
Application To World” Debug logical errors
display “Hello Confirm whether the
required output generated
World”
properly or not
2 Create an Android Create an Android app to show Toast Correct syntactical errors
Application To Message as “Hello World” Debug logical errors
display Toast Study the Toast class and its
required methods
Message as “Hello
Confirm whether “Hello
World”
World” is displayed as Toast
Message or not
3 Create an Android Create an Android app to accept a Correct syntactical errors
app to accept a number in text field and display the Debug logical errors
number in text field factorial of it in a Toast message on Study the Edit Text and
Button classes and the
and display the clicking a button
required methods
factorial of it in a Confirm whether the
Toast message on factorial is computed and
clicking a button shown in the Toast or not
4 Exercise on Create an Android app to illustrate the Correct syntactical errors

Check box control use of checkbox control Debug logical errors
Study the Checkbox class
and its required methods
Confirm whether the
selected checkbox value is
shown on aToast
5 Exercise on Create an Android app to illustrate Correct syntactical errors
Spinner (Combo the use of Spinner(Combo Box) Debug logical errors
Box) Control control Study the Spinner class
Confirm whether the
selected Spinner value is
shown on a
Toast
6 Exercise on Date Create an Android app to illustrate Correct syntactical errors
picker and Time the use of Date picker widget and Debug logical errors
Study the Date picker class
picker Time picker widget.
Confirm whether the
selected date value is
shown on aToast
7 Exercise on Create an Android app that uses Correct syntactical errors
multiple UI multiple UI controls like text field, Debug logical errors
246
Name of the
Experiment
controls Checkbox, Spinner and Buttons Confirm whether the
required operations are
done properly
8 Exercise on Intent Create an Android app to shift from Correct syntactical errors
one activity to another activity using Debug logical errors
a button.
Know how to apply start
Activity () method using
intent
Confirm whether the c
moves from one
activity to
another activity.
9 Create an Android Create an Android Application Using Correct syntactical errors
Application Using Image Effects Debug logical errors
Image Effects Study the Bitmap class
Study Methods to
manipulate Images
Confirm whether the Image
Effects are done properly or
not
Application Using Image Switcher Debug logical errors
Image Switcher Study the Image Switcher
class
Study Image Switcher
Methods to manipulate
Images
Confirm whether the Image
was set using Image Switcher
methods or not
Application Using AlertDialog Debug logical errors
AlertDialog Study the Alert Dialog class
and its methods
Confirm whether the Dialogs
are triggered properly or not
12 Create an Android Create an Android Application To Correct syntactical errors
Application To Integrate Google Maps Debug logical errors
Integrate Google Study the Google Map class
and its methods
Maps
Confirm whether the Map
working properly or not
13 Create an Android Create an Android Application To send Correct syntactical errors
Application To send SMS Debug logical errors
247
Name of the
Experiment
SMS Study the Sms Manager class
and its methods
Confirm whether the
messages are sending
properly or not
14 Create an Android Create an Android Application To calling Correct syntactical errors
Application To a number Debug logical errors
calling a number Study the class and its
methods
Confirm whether the event
performed or not
15 Create an Android Create an Android Application To send Correct syntactical errors
Application To send E-mail Debug logical errors
E-mail Study the E-mail functionality
with Intents
Confirm whether the E-mails
are sending properly or not
Application Using Database Debug logical errors
Database Study the operations of
Database
Confirm whether the data is
properly inserted or not
properly deleted or not
properly updated or not
properly fetched or not
17 Publish Android Publish Android Application Correct syntactical errors
Application Debug logical errors
Publish an Android
Application
Confirm whether an Android
Application published or not
18 Deploy Android Deploy Android Application Correct syntactical errors
Application Debug logical errors
Deploy an Android
Application
Confirm whether an Android
Application Deployed or not
248
Python
CM-507 3 45 40 60
Programming Lab

No.
1. Exercises on basics, expressions and 9 CO1

operators.
2. Exercises on Functions, 12 CO2, CO3
packages
3. Exercises on Lists, sets 18 CO3, CO4
4. Exercise on Exceptions and debugging 6 CO5,CO6
Total Periods 45
Upon completion of the course the student shall able to learn

COURSE OBJECTIVES
12.Basics of Python programming
13.Decision Making and Functions in Python
14.Object Oriented Programming using Python.
CO COURSE OUTCOMES
CO 1 CM-507.1 Execute Simple python programs
CO 2 CM-507.2 Execute Python programs using expressions, operators
CO 3 CM-507.3 Execute python programming using Functions,
Packages
CO 4 CM-507.4 Demonstrate Python programs using Lists
CO 5 CM-507.5 Develop Python programs using OOP Concepts and
Exceptions
CO 6 CM-507.6 Demonstrate Debugging of Python Programs
249
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
CM-507.1 2 2 2 1 2 3 2
CM-507.2 2 3 2 2 2
CM-507.3 3 3 2 3 2 2 2
CM-507.4 2 2 2 2 3 1 2 3
CM-507.5 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
CM-507.6 2 1 3 3 1
Average 2.3 2.3 2 2.3 2 2.3 2 2 2.5 2
LEARNING OUTCOMES
1. Write and execute simple python Program.

2. Write /execute simple ‘Python’ program: Develop minimum 2 programs using different data
types (numbers, string, tuple, list, and dictionary).
3. Write /execute simple ‘Python’ program: Develop minimum 2 programs using Arithmetic
Operators, exhibiting data type conversion.
4. (i)Write simple programs to convert U.S. dollars to Indian rupees.
(ii) Write simple programs to convert bits to Megabytes, Gigabytes and Terabytes.
5. Write simple programs to calculate the area and perimeter of the square, and the volume
&perimeter of the cone.
6. Write program to: (i) determine whether a given number is odd or even. (ii) Find the greatest
of the three numbers using conditional operators.
7. Write a program to: i) Find factorial of a given number. ii) Generate multiplication table up to
10 for numbers 1 to 5.
8. Write a program to: i) Find factorial of a given number. ii) Generate multiplication table up to
10 for numbers 1 to 5 using functions.
9. Write a program to: i) Find factorial of a given number using recursion. ii) Generate Fibonacci
sequence up to 100 using recursion.
10. Write a program to: Create a list, add element to list, delete element from the lists.
11. Write a program to: Sort the list, reverse the list and counting elements in a list.
12. Write a program to: Create dictionary, add element to dictionary, delete element from the
dictionary.
13. Write a program to: To calculate average, mean, median, and standard deviation of numbers
in a list.
14. Write a program to: To print Factors of a given Number.
15. File Input/output: Write a program to: i) To create simple file and write “Hello World” in it.
ii) To open a file in write mode and append Hello world at the end of a file.
250
16. Write a program to: i) To open a file in read mode and write its contents to another file but
replace every occurrence of character ‘h’ ii) To open a file in read mode and print the
number of occurrences of a character ‘a’.
17. Write a Program to: Add two complex number using classes and objects.
18. Write a Program to: Subtract two complex number using classes and objects.
19. Write a Program to: Create a package and accessing a package.
KEY COMPETENCIES
.No. Name of the Experiment Objectives Key Competencies
1. Know the usage of Python IDLE

Write a simple python 2. Edit and save the program
Write and execute simple program to print Hello 3. Check for the syntax errors and clear
1.
python Program. World! and debug and the errors
execute 4. Run the program and check for the
output.
Write /execute simple 1. Identify different data types

‘Python’ program: 2. Write basic python program using data
Develop minimum 2 Write a Python program types
2. programs using different to identify different data 3. Evaluate arithmetic expression
data types (numbers, types. 4. Run the program
5. Rectify the syntactical errors
string, tuple, list,
6. Execute the program
dictionary). 7. Check the output for its correctness
Write /execute simple 1. Identify different arithmetic operators

2. Build arithmetic expressions
‘Python’ program: Develop Write a Python program 3. Identify the priorities of operators
minimum 2 programs using to identify arithmetic 4. Evaluate arithmetic expression
3. Arithmetic Operators, operators and data type 5. Run the program
exhibiting data type conversion 6. Rectify the syntactical errors
conversion. 7. Execute the program
251
1. Identify different arithmetic
(i) Write simple programs operators
to convert U.S. dollars to 2. Build arithmetic expressions
Indian rupees. Write a Python program 3. Identify the priorities of operators
to identify arithmetic 4. Evaluate arithmetic expression
4. (ii) Write simple programs
operators and data type 5. Run the program
to convert bits to 6. Rectify the syntactical errors
conversion
Megabytes, Gigabytes and 7. Execute the program
Terabytes. Check the output for its
correctness
1. Identify different arithmetic operators

Write simple programs to 2. Build arithmetic expressions
calculate the area and Write a Python program 3. Identify the priorities of operators
perimeter of the square, to identify arithmetic 4. Evaluate arithmetic expression
5.
operators and data type 5. Run the program
and the volume &
conversion 6. Rectify the syntactical errors
perimeter of the cone.
7. Execute the program
Write program to: (i)

Determine whether a given 1. Build a relational expression
number is odd or even. (ii) Write a Python program 2. Use the if statement for decision
6. Find the greatest of the to identify conditional making
3. Rectify the syntax errors
three numbers using statements in Python.
4. Check the output for correctness
conditional operators.
1. Build the termination condition for

looping
Write a program to: i) Find
2. Use while statement with correct
factorial of a given Write a Python program syntax
7. number. ii) Generate to identify loops 3. Check whether correct number of
multiplication table up to statements in Python. iterations are performed by the while
10 for numbers 1 to 5. loop
5. Debug logical errors
1. Build the termination condition for
looping
2. Use while statement with correct
Write a program to: To Write a Python program syntax
8. print Factors of a given to 3. Check whether correct number of
Number. make use of function. iterations are performed by the while
loop
252
1. Build the application
Write a program to: i) using recursion.
Find factorial of a given Write a Python program 2. Build the terminating
number using to condition for recursion.
9. recursion. ii) Generate make use of recursion. 3. Rectify the syntax
Fibonacci sequence up errors
to 100 using recursion. 4. Debug logical errors
1. Build the termination

condition for looping
5. Use while statement with
Write a program to: To correct syntax
Write a Python program
10. print Factors of a given 6. Check whether correct
to identify loops
Number. number of iterations are
statements in Python.
performed by the while loop
1. Create a one list with correct

syntax
2. Create a list
Write a program to: 3. Read elements from list
Write a Python program
Create a list, add 4. Add elements to list
to identify various lists
11. element to list, delete 5. Delete elements
and list manipulation
element from the lists. 6. Rectify the syntax errors
methods in Python.
8. Check for the correctness of
output for the given input
1. Create a one list with correct

syntax
Write a Python program 2. Create a list
Write a program to: to identify various lists 3. Read elements from list
Sort the list, reverse the and list manipulation 4. Add elements to list
12. list and counting methods in 5. Delete elements
elements in a list. Python. 6. Rectify the syntax errors
253
1. Create a one dictionary with
correct syntax
2. Create a dictionary
Write a program to: Write a Python program 3. Read elements from list
Create dictionary, add to identify various 4. Add elements to dictionary
13. element to dictionary, dictionary and 5. Delete elements from
delete element from the dictionary manipulation dictionary
dictionary. methods in Python. 6. Rectify the syntax errors
Write a program to: To Write a Python program
calculate average, mean, 1. Create a list
to identify various 2. add elements to list
14 median, and standard statistical
deviation of numbers in 3. perform statistical functions
functions. on that list
a list.
File Input/output: Write

a program to: i) To
create simple file and Write a Python program
15. write “Hello World” in it. to identify the steps to 1. Create a Python file
ii) To open a file in write create a file and append 2. Add contents to file
mode and append Hello to file.
world at the end of a
file.
Write a program to: i) To

open a file in read mode
1. Open a Python file in write
and write its contents to
mode
another file but replace Write a Python program
2. Add contents to the file
every occurrence of to identify the steps to
16 3. Open a Python file in Read
character ‘h’ ii) To open open a file in read/write
mode
a file in read mode and mode.
4. Print the file
print the number of
occurrences of a
character ‘a’.
1. Create a class using Python
Write a Program to: Add Write a Python program
2. Create an object in Python
two complex number to identify the steps to
17. 3. Debug the python program
using classes and create class and create
4. Check the correctness
objects. an object in Python.
Write a Program to: Write a Python program 1. Create a class using Python
18 Subtract two complexes to identify the steps to 2. Create an object in Python
number using classes create class and create 3. Debug the python program
and objects an object in Python. Check the correctness
254
Write a Python program 1. Create a package using
Write a Program to: to practice in creating Python
19 Create a package and packages 2. Access the package in Python
accessing a package. and accessing packages 3. Debug the python program
Check the correctness
255
C23- CM-508: Life Skills
Course Title : Life Skills Course code : C23- Common-508
( Common to all Branches)
Year/ Semester : V/ VI Semester Total periods : 45
Type of Course : Lab Practice Max Marks : 100
( Sessional 40 + External 60)
Course understand the relevance of life skills in both personal and professional lives
Objectives:
practise life skills complementarily in life-management to lead a happy and
successful life
Course Outcomes:
CO1 exhibit right attitude and be adaptable in adverse and diverse situations
CO2 set appropriate goals and achieve them through proper planning, time
management and self-motivation
CO3 solve diverse real-life and professional problems with critical thinking and
creativity for a stress-free life
CO4 be an ideal team player and manifest as a leader
Course Delivery:
Text book: “Life Skills” – by State Board of Technical Education and Training, AP
Chapter. Unit Teaching

No Hours
1 Attitude 4
2 Adaptability 4
3 Goal Setting 4
256
4 Motivation 4
5 Time Management 4
6 Critical Thinking 4
7 Creativity 4
8 Problem Solving 5
9 Team work 4
10 Leadership 4
11 Stress Management 4
Total 45
Course Content:
UNIT I: Attitude matters!

Preparatory activity-Role play; Generating word bank; Types of attitude. Read the passage
and answer the related questions, read the story and discuss issues raised; Express opinions
on the given topic and fill the grid with relevant words.
UNIT 2: Adaptability… makes life easy!

Pair work-Study the given pictures and understand adaptability -read the anecdote and
discuss, read the story and answer the questions, role play
UNIT 3: Goal Setting… life without a goal is a rudderless boat!

Short term goals and long term goals-SMART features, observe the pictures and answer
questions- matching- read the passage and answer questions-filling the grid.
UNIT 4: Motivation… triggers success!

Types of motivation-difference between motivation and inspiration- matching different
personalities with traits - dialogue followed by questions - writing a paragraph based on
the passage.
UNIT 5: Time Management … the need of the hour!
Effective Time Management- Time quadrant - Group task on management of time- Time
wasters-fill in the grid, read the story and answer the questions- prioritising tasks.
UNIT 6: Critical Thinking… Logic is the key!
257
Preparatory activity-read the passage and answer the questions- differentiate between facts
and assumptions- components of critical thinking- complete the sets of analogies- choose
the odd one out- true or false statements- decide which of the conclusions are logical.
UNIT 7: Creativity…. The essential YOU!!
Definition- Pre-activity-read the anecdote and answer the questions- matching celebrities
with their fields of specialisation- think of creative uses of objects- think creatively in the
given situations.
UNIT 8: Problem Solving… there is always a way out!
Preparatory activity-read the story and answer the questions- discuss the given problem
and come out with three alternative solutions- group activity to select the best solution
among available alternatives- discuss the problem and plan to analyse it.
UNIT 9: Team Work… Together we are better!
Advantages of team work- Characteristics of a team player- Activity-Observe the pictures

and classify them into two groups- team game - read the story and answer the questions-
fill in the grid.
UNIT 10 : Leadership… the making of a leader!
Characteristics of effective leadership- styles of leadership- Activity-read the dialogue and

answer the questions- identify the people in the picture and describe them- discuss
leadership qualities of the given leaders- filling the grid- read the quotes and write the
name of the leader.
UNIT 11: Stress Management … live life to the full !!
Types of stress- Strategies for Stress Management- Activity-read the passage and answer
the questions, read the situation and write a paragraph about how to manage stress.
Mapping COs with POs
POs 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Cos POs 1 to 5 are applications of Engineering Principles, 1,2,3,4 1,2,3,4

can‟t directly be mapped with Life Skills
Unit wise Mapping of COs- POs
258
CO Course Outcome CO Unit PO mapped Cognitive levels
Mapped as per Bloom‟s
Taxonomy
R/U/Ap/An/Ev/Cr
( Remembering /
Understanding/
Applying/Analysing/
Evaluating/ Creating )
CO 1 To exhibit right attitude All Units 6,7 U/Ap/ An

and be adaptable to
adverse and diverse ( 1 to 11)
situations
CO2 To set appropriate goals Units 6,7 U/Ap/An

and achieve them
through proper 3,4,5
planning, time
management and self-
motivation
CO3 To solve diverse real- Units 6,7 U/Ap/An/ Ev/ Cr.

life and professional
problems with critical 6,7,8,11
thinking and creativity
for a stress-free life
CO4 To be an ideal team Units 6,7 U/Ap/An/ Ev

player and manifest as a
leader 9,10
259
PROJECT
CM-509 6 90 40 60
WORK
Course i)To inculcate team spirit among students

Objectives
ii)To apply software life cycle models
iii) To design, develop, test and deploy project
At the end of course student able to learn the following:
CO1 CM-509.1 Identify hardware components and software

requirements.
CO2 CM-509.2 Prepare SRS document based on gathered and analysed

Course
Outcomes Requirements
CO3 CM-509.3 Design the plan document based on SRS
CO4 CM-509.4 Code and test the software based on the design
document
CO5 CM-509.5 Practice software maintenance skills and maintaining

quality
and reliability
CO6 CM-509.6 Calculate software metrics like cost, loc, scheduling,
manpower and other resources.
260
CO-PO/PSO Matrix:
CM-509.1 3 2 1 3 1 2 3
CM-509.2 3 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 2
CM-509.3 3 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 2
CM-509.4 3 2 3 3 3 1 2 3 2
CM-509.5 3 2 2 3 3 3 2 3 2
CM-509.6 3 2 2 1 3 3 2 3 2
Average 3 2 2.4 2 2.2 1.8 3 2 3 2
LEARNING OUTCOMES
1. Identify different works to be carried out in the Project

2. Collect data relevant to the project work
3. Carryout need survey and identify the problem(project)
4. Select the most efficient software life cycle from the available choices based on
preliminary investigation
5. Estimate the cost of project, technological need, computer skills, materials and
other equipment
6. Prepare the plan and schedule of starting time and sequence of operations to be
carried out at various stages of the project work in detail
7. Prepare SRS document
8. Design the required elements of the project work as per standard models such as
UML
9. Develop the working software modules required for the project work
10. Prepare critical activities at various stages of the project work
11. Test, Debug, verify and validate the project
12. Record the results
13. Preparation of project report (and user manual if necessary) to enable the client to
maintain the project
Key competencies (Guide lines)
THE PROJECT CAN BE CHOSEN FROM THE FOLLOWING DOMAINS:
1. SOFTWARE PROJECTS
a. Web site designing
b. Banking
261
c. Income tax calculation package
d. Examinations cell.
e. Student database management
f. Library management
g. Stores Management
h. Staff data management
i. Payrolls
j. Inventory Control
k. Hostel management
l. Tourism package
m. Institution management software
n. Anti-Virus software development.
o. Folder-locking.
p. Terminate stay resident systems.
q. Any S/W projects on latest technologies
2. HARDWARE and NETWORKING PROJECTS

a. QLAN establishing
b. Using interfacing devices
c. Voice synthesizer
d. Voice recognizer
e. Printer sharer
f. ADD ON cards or any relevant
3. SOFTWARE AND HARDWARE PROJECTS

b. Using interfaces, microcontrollers. Microprocessors and PCs
c. Inter-cum
d. Assembling computer along with peripherals.
e. Traffic light controller
f. Stepper motor related
g. Lift controllers
h. Level controllers
i. Temperature controllers
4. To develop above projects and deploy in cloud platform
5. To develop IOT based applications

6. To maintain the software products based on the ever-changing needs of and quality
measures required by the clients
262
Evaluation Scheme for the Project Work
Max. Marks Allotted for each

Tasks task INTERNAL /EXTERNAL
S. No. ( 40+60=100)
1. Feasibility study of the problem 4/6
2. Requirement Analysis of the problem, SRS 4/8

document preparation
3. Designing the problem 6/10
4. Implementation 8/10
5. Testing and verification 10 /16
6. Project report preparation and presentation 8/10
Total: 40/60 (100)
263
VI SEMESTER
264
CURRICULUM-2023
(VI Semester)
CM-601 Industrial Training(At Industry)

No. Max.
Item Nature
Marks
Assessment of
learning
1.First outcomes by
120
12 Weeks) training
mentor of the
industry
Assessment of
learning
2.Second
outcomes by
Assessment at
both the
the Industry 120
faculty and
(After 20
Industrial 6 months training
1 weeks))
industry
Final Training
20
Summative Report
30
the skills listed
in learning
outcomes
Viva Voce 10
TOTAL MARKS 300
265
INDUSTRIAL TRAINING(Online Certification)
LEARNING OUTCOMES – SCHEME OF EVALUATION (Two Online Certificate courses):
LEARNING
TRAINING
TOPIC OUTCOMES (In- MARKS
MODULE NO.
house training)
First 3 1) Registration and Training of the course at v) Learning 120

Months/ Nptel/ Swayam /Moocs/course era/ Lectera/cal
vi) Mini
tech/oxford/hackerrank/udemy/ AP Skill
12 weeks Development/NASSCOM courses… etc., Application
development
vii) Rep
ort
preparation
viii) 1st Assessment

Next 3 1) Registration and Training of the course at v) Learning 120
Months/ Nptel/Swayam/Moocs/course era/
vi) Mini
Lectera/caltech/oxford/hackerrank/udemy/APskil
12 Weeks Application
lDevelopment/NASSCOME courses… etc.,
development
vii) Rep
ort
preparation
viii) 2st Assessment

External Seminar on two reports/viva Evaluation by 60
Evaluation GUIDE/Co -
Examiner, HOD and
External Examiner
TOTAL 300
266
CURRICULUM-2023
(VI Semester)
CM-601 Industrial Training
No of Marks Marks
Course Code Course title Duration
INDUSTRIAL TRAINING
CM-601 (Online Certificate 42 6 months 240 60
courses / Industry)
LEARNING OUTCOMES (In Industry): The student shall be able to display the following skill sets
1. Apply knowledge and skill already learnt in the institution.

2. Acquire the required skills of analysis, design and development, testing, verification and
validation.
3. Acquire skills of deployment and distribution of the product.
4. Involve in product design, development, quality testing and maintenance production by
exhibiting the strength, teamwork spirit and self-confidence
5. Prepare product documents like user manual and installation guide and operational manuals.
6. Perform the activities of deploying product at customer site and training the end user.
7. Maintaining the system at user site (Post product services)
S No Unit Title Duration COs Mapped
1 Application of Knowledge acquired. 1 month CO1
2 Skill Acquirement. 2 months CO2
3 Participate in product development. 2 months CO3
4 Preform onsite service. 1 month CO4
Total 6 months
267
1. Expose to real time working environment
2. Enhance knowledge and skill already learnt in the institution
Course Objectives 3. Acquire the required skills in SDLC phases .
4. Instil the good qualities of integrity, responsibility and self
confidence.
At the end of course student able to:
CO1 CM-601.1 Apply knowledge and skill already learnt in the institution.
Acquire the required skills of analysis, design and development,

CO2 CM-601.2 testing, verification and validation, deployment and distribution of the
product.
Course
Involve in product design, development, quality testing and
Outcomes
CO3 CM-601.3 maintenance production by exhibiting the strength, teamwork spirit
and self-confidence
Prepare product document, gain the skills in deploying product at

CO4 CM-601.4
customer site , training the end user, maintaining the system.
CO-PO/PSO MATRIX
CO No PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CM-601.1 3 3 3 3
CM-601.2 3 2 3 3 3 3 3
CM-601.3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CM-601.4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Average 3 3 3 2.7 3 3 3 3 3 3
3=strongly mapped 2=moderately mapped 1=slightly mapped
268
LEARNING OUTCOMES – SCHEM OF EVALUATION (Two Online Certificate courses):
TRAINING LEARNING OUTCOMES

TOPIC MARKS
MODULE NO. (In-house training)
First 3 1) Registration and training at i) Learning 120

Months/12 Nptel/ Swayam/ Moocs/course
weeks- First era/lectern/caltech/oxford/hackerra
development
certificate nk/udemy… etc.,
iii) Report -1 preparation
for First certificate
iv) 1st Assessment
Next 3 1) Registration and training at i) Learning 120

Months/12 Nptel / Swayam / Moocs / course
Weeks-Second era/ lectera /Caltech / oxford /
Certificate development
hackerrank / udemy… etc.,
iii) Report preparation
iv)2nd Assessment
External Seminar on two reports/viva Evaluation by GUIDE/Co - 60

Evaluation Examiner,HOD and
External Examiner
TOTAL 300
Online Certificate courses –
1. First 3 Months/12 weeks-Registration and training at either of Nptel/ Swayam/

Moocs/courseera/lectera/ caltech /oxford/hackerrank/udemy for First Certificate Course
2. Next 3 Months/12 Weeks-Registration and training at either of Nptel/ Swayam/

Moocs/courseera/lectera/caltech /oxford/hackerrank/udemy for Second Certificate Cource.
269
Scheme of evaluation(Training at Industry)

No. Max.
Item Nature
Marks
Assessment of
learning
1.First outcomes by
120
12 Weeks) training
mentor of the
industry
Assessment of
learning
2.Second
outcomes by
Assessment at
both the
the Industry 120
faculty and
(After 20
Industrial training
1 6 months weeks))
industry
Final Training
20
Summative Report
30
the skills listed
in learning
outcomes
Viva Voce 10
TOTAL MARKS 300
270
Weightage of marks for Assessment of Learning Outcomes during first and second
assessment (at industry)
Max Marks Allotted Max Marks Allotted

Sl.No Learning Outcome
For first assessment For second assessment
Apply knowledge and skill already learnt in
1 50 10
the institution.
Acquire the required skills of analysis,
design and development, testing,
2 70 30
verification and validation, deployment and
distribution of the product.
Involve in product design, development,
quality testing and maintenance
3 - 40
production by exhibiting the strength,
teamwork spirit and self-confidence
Prepare product document, gain the skills
in deploying product at customer site,
4 - 40
training the end user, maintaining the
system.
Total 120 120
During assessment the performance of the students shall be assessed in those skills in which the
student has been trained and be awarded the marks as per the weightage assigned as above. In
case the student has undergone training in a few skill sets then the total marks obtained shall be
raised to 120 marks for the given assessment i.e., either assessment 1 or 2. However the
performance of the student shall be assessed at the most skill sets listed above but not less than
three skill sets.
Illustration for First assessment.
If the student has undergone training in only in 2 skill sets (namely 1 - for 50 marks, and 2 - for 40
marks) out of 3 (namely 1 - for 50 marks, 2 - for 40 marks and 3 - for 30 marks) in First
assessment and marks awarded during assessment is 60 out of 90 marks, then the marks of 60
shall be enhanced to 120 proportionately as (60/90) *120=80.
Illustration for second assessment.
If the student has undergone training in only in 5 skill sets (namely 1 - for 10 marks, 2 - for 20
marks, 3 - for 10 marks, 4 - for 25 marks, 5 - for 15 marks) out of 7 (namely 1 - for 10 marks, 2 - for
20 marks, 3 - for 10 marks, 4 - for 25 marks, 5 - for 15 marks, 6 - for 25 marks and 7 - for 15
marks) in Second assessment and marks awarded during assessment is 65 out of 80 marks, then
the marks of 65 shall be enhanced to 120 proportionately as (65/80) *120=97.5 = rounded to 98.
271
GUIDELINES FOR INDUSTRIAL TRAINING OF DIPLOMA IN COMPUTER ENGINEERING
PROGRAMME
1. Duration of the training: 6 months.
2. Eligibility: The As per SBTET norms
3. Training Area: Students can be trained in either in In-house/Industry/ TWO Online Certificate
in the areas of
courses
i. First 3 Months/12 weeks- Registration and training at either of Nptel/ Swayam/

Moocs/course era / lectera / caltech / oxford / hackerrank / udemy for First
Certificate Cource
ii. Next 3 Months/12 Weeks- Registration and training at either of Nptel/ Swayam/
Moocs/course era / lectera / caltech / oxford / hackerrank / udemy for Second
Certificate Cource.
4. Application Software Development / system software Development / firmware development
/ Mobile application development/ Database applications / Web development/ IoT
application development / smart technologies / Hardware interfacing/ Networking .
5. The candidate shall put a minimum of 90% attendance during Industrial Training.
6. If the student fails to secure 90% attendance during industrial training, the student shall
reappear for 6 months industrial training.
7. Formative assessment at industry level shall be carried out by the Mentor from of the
industry, where the student is undergoing training and the faculty in charge (Guide) from the
concerned section in the institution.
8. The Industrial training shall carry 300 marks and pass marks is 50% in assessments at
industry (first and second assessment) and final summative assessment at institution level
put together i.e. 150 marks out of 300 marks.
9. If the student fails to secure 50% marks in final summative assessment at institution level,
the student should reappear for final summative assessment in the subsequent board
examination.
10. Final summative assessment at institution level is done by a committee including1. Head of
the section ( of concerned discipline ONLY), 2.External examiner from an industry and 3.
Faculty member who assessed the student during Industrial Training as members.
Guidelines and responsibilities of the faculty members who are assessing the students
performance during industrial training.
***
272

5 - Dcme

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

5 - Dcme

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

5 - Dcme

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

&855,&8/80  

STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION & TRAINING

S.No Contents Page No.

2. High lights of Curriculum (C-23) ś

4. Rules and Regulations ŝ

5. Vision and Mission 

6. Scheme of Instructions and Examinations – 1 Year 

7. Scheme of Instructions and Examinations -III Sem 

8. Scheme of Instructions and Examinations- IV Sem 

9. Scheme of Instructions and Examinations -V Sem 

10. Scheme of Instructions and Examinations -VI Sem 

1Ř. III Sem Syllabus 

1ř. IV Sem Syllabus 

1Ś. V Sem Syllabus 

1ś VI Sem Syllabus 

Technical Education is a key driver of economic development and plays a crucial

Smt. C Naga Rani, I.A.S., Commissioner of Technical Education while

In continuation, series of workshops with subject experts followed in the subsequent

The outcome-based approach as given by NBA guidelines has been followed

The Revised Curriculum i.e., Curriculum–2023 (C-23) is approved by 45th

2. HIGHLIGHTS OF CURRICULUM C-23

1) The Weightage of theory & Practical in 50:50.

We are grateful to Sri. S. Suresh Kumar, I.A.S, Principal Secretary, Skills

It is pertinent to acknowledge the support of the following in the making of

4. RULES AND REGULATIONS OF C-23 CURRICULUM

4.1 Duration and pattern of the courses

4.2 Procedure for Admission into the Diploma Courses:

4.3 Medium of Instruction

The medium of instruction and examination shall be English.

4.4 Permanent Identification Number (PIN)

A cumulative / academic record is to be maintained of the Marks secured in

4.5 Number of Working Days Per Semester / Year:

a) A candidate shall be permitted to appear for the end examination in all

For INDUSTRIAL TRAINING:

Readmission shall be granted to eligible candidates by the respective

4.8 Scheme of Evaluation

b) III, IV, V, VI and VII Semesters:

4.9 Internal Assessment Scheme

Type of Assessment Weightage

Internal Assessment shall be of 90 minutes duration and for a maximum of 40

The total 50 marks assigned to internal assignment is to be scaled down to 20

Distribution of Marks for the Internal Assessment Marks

¾ (Part - A: 4 questions x 5 marks = 20 Marks; Part –B: 2 questions x 10 marks = 20

(ii) Laboratory Courses:

(a) Student’s performance in Laboratories / Workshop shall be assessed during

4.10 Minimum Pass Marks

4.11. Provision for Improvement

A) For Diploma Courses of 3 Years duration

v) A candidate shall be sent to Industrial training / VI semester provided he/she

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

i.) A candidate shall be permitted to appear for Third Semester examination

iii) A candidate shall be sent to Industrial training / VI semester provided he/she

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

a) Puts the required percentage of attendance in the 4th semester

a) Puts in the required percentage of attendance in the 7 th semester .

C) For Diploma Courses of 3 ½ Years duration (BM):

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry Students:

A candidate is eligible to appear for the 4th semester examination if he/she

For IVC & ITI Lateral Entry students:

&855,&8/80

5. Vision and Mission

6. Scheme of Instructions and Examinations – 1 Year

7. Scheme of Instructions and Examinations -III Sem

8. Scheme of Instructions and Examinations- IV Sem

9. Scheme of Instructions and Examinations -V Sem

10. Scheme of Instructions and Examinations -VI Sem

1Ř. III Sem Syllabus

1ř. IV Sem Syllabus

1Ś. V Sem Syllabus

1ś VI Sem Syllabus

Ǽ For drawing Courses: